JP2014230902A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can greatly increase attention to a game.SOLUTION: On a board surface of a game board 24, a game area is provided. In the game area, an upper operation port 33 and a lower operation port 34 are provided. When game balls enter the upper operation port 33, the entrance is stored to a main controller as retention information; when the game balls enter the lower operation port 34, the entrance is stored to the main controller as retention information. On the basis of the retention information about the upper operation port 33 or the retention information about the lower operation port 34, variable display of a symbol in a symbol display device 41 and variable display of a pattern in a main display part 43 are started. In so doing, retention notice reflecting a content of the retention information may be performed by a symbol display device 41 and, when retention information corresponding to jackpot winning is stored, setting to give a retention notice is not performed for the retention information even when retention information is newly obtained.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a winning gaming state triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into a starting pitching portion provided in the gaming area Done. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the display of the variation of the picture is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and a stop result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed in the final stop display of the variation display. A display effect corresponding to one game is displayed. In addition, when the lottery result is so-called winning game state winning, for example, after a display effect for one game is executed, for example, opening and closing of a variable pitching device provided in the game area is executed. Then, game balls are paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable pitching device.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the starting entrance part while the display of the change of the pattern is being performed, information used for the winning lottery is held and stored with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as an upper limit. There are pachinko machines that are designed to be used. In the case of hold storage, after the display of the variation of the pattern is completed, a winning lottery is performed using the information stored and stored, and the next variation display of the pattern is started (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2004-81853 A

  Here, in gaming machines such as the above-mentioned examples, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of attention to a game.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 is a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player,
A starting pitching portion into which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the start ball entry unit;
Special information acquired by the information acquisition means, an acquisition information storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a plurality of numbers,
When it is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transfer information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means Is a transition determination means for sequentially performing the transition determination on the plurality of special information,
State transition means for transitioning the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means that the determination target special information corresponds to the transition information. When,
In gaming machines equipped with
The special notification corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the shift determination is before the predetermined special information is the target of the shift determination. Notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means so as to be executed by the predetermined notification means at the timing;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to a game.

The front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. The perspective view which expand | deploys and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. The perspective view which expand | deploys and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. The front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A) The front view of the operating port apparatus which shows the case where an electrically-driven accessory is a closed state, (b) The front view of an operating-port apparatus which shows the case where an electric accessory is an open state. (A) The longitudinal cross-sectional view of the area | region including the main display part and its front side, (b) The front view of the segment indicator which comprises the main display part. The block diagram which shows the electrical constitution of a pachinko machine. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a lottery lottery etc. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for low probability modes, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for high probability modes. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table for 1st result display parts, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table for 2nd result display parts. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of a holding ball storage area. The flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. The flowchart which shows an information acquisition process. The flowchart which shows the winning process for through. The flowchart which shows a normal process. The flowchart which shows game times control processing. The flowchart which shows a data setting process. The flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. (A) An explanatory diagram for explaining a stop result table for explicit 2R probability change, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a stop result table for non-explicit 2R probability change, and (c) a stop result table for 15R probability change. An explanatory diagram for explaining, (d) an explanatory diagram for explaining a normal jackpot stop result table, (e) an explanatory diagram for explaining a special outage stop result table, and (f) an ordinary out put Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a stop result table. The flowchart which shows the stop result setting process for probability variation big hits. The flowchart which shows the stop result setting process for the time of detachment. The flowchart which shows the setting process of fluctuation | variation display time. The flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation completion process. The flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. The flowchart which shows a big prize opening / closing process. The flowchart which shows the setting process for each round. The flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of opening / closing execution mode. The flowchart which shows the process for electronic role support. The flowchart which shows an electric utility opening / closing process. The block diagram which shows the electrical structure of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus and a display control apparatus. The flowchart which shows the command response process in MPU of an audio lamp control apparatus. The flowchart which shows a 1st response process. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st table of the table | surfaces for holding | maintenance alerting | reporting, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 2nd table of the table for holding | maintenance alerting | reporting. The flowchart which shows the specific process for a pending | holding alert | report. The flowchart which shows a 2nd response process. The flowchart which shows a 4th response process. The flowchart which shows the holding | maintenance alert | report control process in MPU of a display control apparatus. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the area for a hold display information setting. The flowchart which shows the hold display information setting process at the time of winning. The flowchart which shows the output process of an internal command. (A)-(d) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of the hold alert | report performed in the 1st hold display area of a symbol display apparatus. The flowchart which shows the information acquisition process in 2nd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process for a pending | holding alert | report. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st table of the table | surfaces for holding | maintenance alerting | reporting, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 2nd table of the table for holding | maintenance alerting | reporting. The flowchart which shows the setting process of an operation winning command. The front view which shows the structure of the game board in 3rd Embodiment. The block diagram which shows the electrical structure which concerns on hold notification. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a lottery lottery etc. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a success / failure table, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a distribution table. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the symbol displayed in a symbol display apparatus. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. The flowchart which shows the winning process for the operation port in MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process for a hold notice. The flowchart which shows the setting process of a pending | holding command. The flowchart which shows game times control processing. The flowchart which shows a data setting process. The flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. The flowchart which shows the setting process of fluctuation | variation display time. The flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. The flowchart which shows the pending | holding command response process in MPU of a display control apparatus. The flowchart which shows a jackpot corresponding | compatible setting process. The flowchart which shows a detachment reach | attainment setting process. The flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation display control process. The flowchart which shows the process for a fluctuation | variation start. The flowchart which shows the stop result setting process corresponding to a hold notice. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a fluctuation | variation display pattern table. The flowchart which shows flag deletion processing. The flowchart which shows the process for change. (A) An explanatory diagram for explaining a first stage correction table, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a second stage correction table, and (c) an explanatory diagram for explaining a third stage correction table. . The time chart for demonstrating a mode when a change display pattern is corrected and a holding notice is performed. The flowchart which shows the process for a fluctuation | variation completion. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific aspect of a hold notice. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the acceptance table for low probability modes in 4th Embodiment, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success table for high probability modes. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st table of the table | surfaces for holding | maintenance alerting | reporting, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 2nd table of the table for holding | maintenance alerting | reporting. The flowchart which shows the specific process for a pending | holding alert | report.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing an unfolded main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting a wooden plate or the like to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility.

  The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a backpack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and when viewed from the front, the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side. It is possible to move.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its rotating tip, and the gaming machine main body 12 is locked to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. And has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that the front door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed at the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and a game area formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  Here, the structure of the game board 24 is demonstrated based on FIG. The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening has a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating port (first starting ball entering portion or a non-priority starting entering ball portion) 33, a lower operating port (second starting ball entering portion or a priority starting ball) Part) 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a main display part 43, an accessory display part 44, and the like.

  When a ball enters the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, and the lower operating port 34, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the back side of the game board 24, Based on the detection result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In this case, 10 game balls are paid out when the general winning opening 31 is entered, and 15 game balls are paid out when the variable winning device 32 is entered. Is executed, three game balls are paid out when a ball enters the upper working port 33, and four game balls are paid out when a ball enters the lower working port 34. Is executed.

  The number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above. However, in order to increase the advantage of the lower working port 34 with respect to the upper working port 33, it is preferable to set the number of payouts related to the lower working port 34 larger than the number of payouts related to the upper working port 33. Further, in order to increase the advantage of the variable winning device 32 with respect to each operating port 33, 34, it is preferable to set the payout number related to the variable winning device 32 larger than the payout number related to each operating port 33, 34.

  In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 37. The game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 38 in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Embodiments that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 37, the game ball enters the variable winning device 32, the upper operation port 33, the lower operation port 34, or the through gate 35. Is also expressed as a prize.

  The upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and are installed in the game board 24. Both the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction, more specifically in the vertical direction, with the upper operation port 33 facing upward. The lower working port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece made up of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

  Details of the electric accessory 34a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A shows a case where the electric accessory 34a is in a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state), and FIG. 5B is a state where the electric accessory 34a is in an open state (supported state or guide state). Shows the case.

  The working port case 33a constituting the upper working port 33 projects to the near side and has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, with the upper side length <the lower side length. At this time, the upper side length of the working port case 33a (that is, the left-right width of the upper working port 33) is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the lower side length is when the electric accessory 34a is in a closed state. The length is longer than the distance between the left and right electric accessories 34a. In addition, when the electric accessory 34a is in a closed state, the interval between the two operation openings 33, 34 is set so that the distance between the operating port case 33a and the upper end of the electric accessory 34a is slightly shorter than the diameter of the game ball. Has been adjusted.

  According to the above configuration, in the closed state of the electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot win the lower operation port 34, and the electric operation item 34a is opened, so that the lower operation port 34 can be won. In particular, at this time, during the operation in which the electric accessory 34a shifts from the closed state to the open state, the operating port case 33a of the upper operating port 33 has a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above, which becomes an obstacle. Until the accessory 34a is fully opened, it is impossible to win a game ball in the lower operating port 34, and it is possible to win only when the electric accessory 34a is almost fully open. That is, the game ball that has dropped from above hits the side surface of the operating port case 33a and is bounced outward, and does not win the lower operating port 34 directly. As a result, when the electric accessory 34a is opened in a very short time, it is extremely difficult to win the lower working port 34, and only when the open state of the electric accessory 34a is continued, the lower working port 34 is opened. Winning is easy.

  In addition to the configuration in which the working port case 33a of the upper working port 33 has a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above, the working port case 33a of the upper working port 33 has a two-stage configuration with a narrow upper portion and a lower lower portion. A substantially C-shaped guide piece may be provided on both the left and right sides of the mouth 33, or a failure nail may be implanted obliquely below the working port case 33a.

  The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and an open / close door 32b that opens and closes the large winning opening 32a. The open / close door 32b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win, and a predetermined game ball is likely to win when winning the transition to the open / close execution mode (open / close execution state) in the internal lottery. It can be switched to the open state. Here, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted when a big win or a special off-winning win is made. The opening / closing execution mode will be described in detail later. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 32, the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened with a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. There is an embodiment.

  The main display portion 43 and the accessory display portion 44 are provided on a decorative member 39 disposed along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 39 extends from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The distance between them is narrower than that of one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.

  A main display unit 43 and an accessory display unit 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 39. That is, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and a game ball is in front of both the display units 43 and 44. It is prevented from falling. In addition, on the upper surface of the decoration member 39, a part of the plurality of general winning ports 31 described above is installed in a state of being opened upward.

  The main display unit 43 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 6A is a longitudinal sectional view of the main display portion 43 and a region including the front side thereof, and FIG. 6B is a front view of the segment display 101 constituting the main display portion 43.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the main display unit 43 includes a segment display 101, a display substrate 102 on which the segment display 101 is mounted, and a cover panel 103 provided in front of the segment display 101. And.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, the segment display 101 is provided with three display areas RS, AS, and BS side by side on its display surface. In these three display areas RS to BS, eight display segments R1 to R8, A1 to A8, and B1 to B8 are provided, respectively. Each of the display segments R1 to R8, A1 to A8, and B1 to B8 has individual light sources composed of LEDs, and the individual light sources are controlled to be turned on / off, so that only one arbitrary display segment is provided. Can be lit, and any combination of display segments can be lit. Accordingly, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed in the display areas RS to BS. Since each of the individual light sources emits light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments R1 to R8, A1 to A8, and B1 to B8. .

  In the three display areas RS to BS, display segments R1 to R8, A1 to A8, and B1 to B8 are arranged so that a predetermined symbol can be displayed with the same size and the same shape. Specifically, for each display region RS, the first to seventh display segments R1 to R7 are all linear display segments, and the first to seventh display segments R1 to R7 are numbers. "1" to "9" and alphabets "F", "H", and "L" are arranged so as to be displayed at least. The eighth display segment R8 is a circular display segment, and is disposed on the side of the lower right portion of the region where the first to seventh display segments R1 to R7 are provided. Therefore, in the display area RS, “1” to “9” and “F”, “H”, “L”, “1.” to “9.”, “F.”, “H.”, “L”. . ”Can be displayed at least.

  In addition, in the three display areas RS to BS, if it is possible to individually display a plurality of patterns of symbols and display a predetermined symbol with the same size and the same shape, The display segments R1 to R8, A1 to A8, and B1 to B8 may have any shape and arrangement, and may be configured to use 7 segments or 9 segments instead of 8 segments. . Moreover, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the display segments R1 to R8, A1 to A8, and B1 to B8 are the same, and different colors may be displayed for the display areas RS to BS. In any or all display areas RS to BS, the colors displayed in the display segments R1 to R8, A1 to A8, and B1 to B8 may be appropriately changed. Moreover, the structure which controls lighting or light extinction of each display segment R1-R8, A1-A8, B1-B8 by carrying out on-off control of a light source is not essential, and each display segment R1-R8, A1- If display control can be performed individually in A8, B1 to B8, a segment display device may be configured by a single backlight and a liquid crystal display. Furthermore, the segment display may not be applied to each display area, but the symbol may be displayed by another type of display device such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix.

  The three display areas RS, AS, and BS each have a function of clearly (or teaching) different information to the player and the manager of the game hall. Specifically, in the left display area RS, when the variable winning device 32 is in the opening / closing execution mode (or in the opening / closing execution mode) by winning the big win, the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode. This is a round display part RS for clearly indicating the number of times the special winning opening 32a is opened.

  The intermediate display area AS is a first result display section AS for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning in the upper working port 33. In this case, in the first result display section AS, the change display of the pattern by sequentially turning on and off the first display segment A1 to the eighth display segment A8 using the winning to the upper working port 33 as a trigger (or (Variable display or switching display) is performed, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 33 is clearly indicated by the display as a stop result of the variable display. Note that the mode of the variable display is arbitrary. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper working port 33 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the first result display section AS and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. Further, in relation to the round display part RS, it can be said that the first result display part AS is provided adjacent to the round display part RS.

  The display area BS on the right side is a second result display section BS for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning in the lower working port 34. In this case, in the second result display unit BS, the variation display of the picture by sequentially turning on and off the first display segment B1 to the eighth display segment B8 using the winning of the lower working port 34 as a trigger (or (Variable display or switching display) is performed, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the lower operation port 34 is clearly indicated by the display as a stop result of the variable display. Note that the mode of the variable display is arbitrary. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the lower working port 34 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the second result display unit BS and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  On the front surface of the segment indicator 101, “R” is added as a symbol for clearly indicating that a round display is to be performed at a position below the round display section RS, and a position below the first result display section AS. Is numbered “1” as a symbol for clearly indicating that the result of the lottery based on the winning in the upper operating port 33 is to be displayed, and is positioned below the second result display section BS. A number “2” is attached as a symbol for clearly indicating that the lottery result is displayed based on the winning at the lower working port 34.

  Here, on the basis of winning in one of the operation ports 33, 34, the variable display is started in the corresponding result display sections AS, BS, until a predetermined stop result is displayed and the above variable display is stopped. It corresponds to one game time. However, the number of game times is not limited to the above-mentioned contents. For example, a single result display unit is provided, and even if any one of the operation ports 33 and 34 is won, the single game display is provided. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in the result display unit, the variable display is started in the single result display unit, and the above-mentioned variable display is stopped in a state where the predetermined stop result is displayed. Once.

  The segment display 101 having the above configuration is mounted on the display substrate 102 from the side opposite to the display surface. The display substrate 102 is electrically connected to a main control device, which will be described later, through electrical wiring, and when a drive signal is output from the main control device to the display substrate 102, each display segment R1-R8, A1- A8, B1 to B8 are turned on.

  The display substrate 102 on which the segment display 101 is mounted is configured such that the entire display units RS to BS of the segment display 101 are exposed on the front surface of the decoration member 39 through the opening 39 a provided in the decoration member 39. It is positioned and fixed from the back side of the decorative member 39.

  The opening 39 a of the decorative member 39 is closed by the cover panel 103 in front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the segment display 101. The cover panel 103 is opposed to the entire display units RS to BS in the segment display 101, and the display on the display units RS to BS is visible through the window panel 62 and the cover panel 103 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. It is formed so as to be translucent. Specifically, the cover panel 103 is made of a synthetic resin and is formed to be black translucent. By making the cover panel 103 semi-transparent in this way, the display on each display unit RS to BS is more transparent than the configuration in which the cover panel 103 is formed colorless and transparent while making the display on each display unit RS to BS visible. Disappears. Thereby, it becomes possible to attract a player's attention to the display of the symbol display apparatus 41 mentioned later rather than the display in each display part RS-BS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cover panel 103 may be formed to be colorless and transparent, or the cover panel 103 may be omitted.

Although the detailed description by illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the display part 44 for an accessory has a segment indicator similarly to the main display part 43, and the result display part for an accessory is provided in the said segment indicator. Yes. The accessory result display unit is a display unit for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning through the through gate 35. In this case, in the result display section for an accessory, a variable display (or variable display or switching display) is performed by sequentially turning on and off each display segment using a winning at the through gate 35 as a trigger. The result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the through gate 35 is clearly indicated by the display as the result of the change display stop. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 35 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the state where the electric character is released, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the result display section for the accessory and the variable display After is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 34a provided in the lower working port 34 is opened in a predetermined manner. The accessory display unit 44 is not limited to the above-described configuration, and other configurations exemplified in the main display unit 43 may be applied, and a configuration different from the main display unit 43 may be applied. May be.
The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 that performs variable display (or variable display or switching display) of symbols. The variable display unit 36 is provided with a center frame 42 so as to surround the symbol display device 41. The center frame 42 has an upper portion extending forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from dropping in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 41, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen is lowered due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. .

  The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. On the symbol display device 41, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the top, middle and bottom, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled in the horizontal direction. In this case, the change display on the symbol display device 41 is started based on winning in the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. That is, when the variable display is performed in the first result display unit AS, the variable display is performed in the symbol display device 41 accordingly, and when the variable display is performed in the second result display unit BS, In addition, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display. Then, for example, the symbol display device 41 is set in advance as a game time for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 15 rounds, in which the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened 15 times as the opening / closing execution mode. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  A first holding lamp portion 45 corresponding to the first result display portion AS and the symbol display device 41 is provided in the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 42. The maximum number of game balls won in the upper operation port 33 is reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed when the first reservation lamp unit 45 is turned on. Further, a second holding lamp portion 46 corresponding to the second result display portion BS and the symbol display device 41 is provided at the upper right portion on the front side of the center frame 42. A maximum of four game balls won in the lower operation port 34 are reserved, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed when the second reservation lamp unit 46 is turned on. As described above, since the upper portion of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10, the visibility of the first holding ramp portion 45 and the second holding ramp portion 46 is not hindered by the fall of the game ball. ing.

  Below the center frame 42, a third holding lamp portion 47 corresponding to the accessory result display portion of the accessory display portion 44 is provided. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by turning on the third holding lamp portion 47. In addition, the structure etc. by which each holding lamp | ramp parts 45-47 are displayed on a part of symbol display apparatus 41 may be sufficient.

  An inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 are attached to the game board 24, and a guide rail is constituted by the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52, and a game launched from the game ball launching mechanism 53. A ball is guided to the upper part of the game area. As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 53 is attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21. The game ball launching mechanism 53 is operated by operating a firing handle 54 provided on the front door frame 14. Operation is performed.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 described above is fitted therein. Although the window panel 62 is colorless and transparent with glass, the window panel 62 is not limited to this and may be colorless and transparent with synthetic resin.

  Around the window 61, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided. A display lamp part 63 is provided above the window part 61 as a part of the various lamp parts. In addition, on both the left and right sides of the display lamp unit 63, speaker units 64 are provided for outputting sound effects corresponding to the gaming state.

  Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 that bulge to the near side are provided side by side. An upper pan 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower pan 72 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper plate 71 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 53 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 72 has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 71. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 of the back pack unit 15 are discharged to the upper plate 71 and the lower plate 72 through a passage forming unit 73 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a main controller 81 and an audio lamp controller 82 are mounted on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

  The main control device 81 includes a main control board that controls the main control of the game and a power failure monitoring board that monitors the power source. The main control board and the power failure monitoring board are provided in a board box 83 made of a transparent resin material or the like. Contained and configured. The board box 83 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other in a non-separable manner by a box coupling portion 85 as a separation preventing means (or a coupling means), thereby sealing the substrate box 83. And by being connected inseparably by these box coupling | bond parts 85, when the internal space of the board | substrate box 83 is open | released, it has the structure which needs destruction of the said board | substrate box 83 or a part of excision. A plurality of box coupling portions 85 are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used for the coupling process.

  The box coupling portion 85 can be applied to any configuration as long as the box base and the box cover are coupled so as not to be opened, but by inserting a locking claw into the long hole constituting the box coupling portion 85, The box cover is connected to the box cover so that it cannot be opened. The coupling process by the box coupling unit 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the coupling, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. Even after the opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one of the plurality of box coupling portions 85. When the board box 83 is opened, such as when a failure occurs in the accommodated main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box coupling portion 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box coupling portion 85 The connecting part of the box and the connecting part with the box body are cut. Thereby, the box base and the box cover of the board box 83 are separated, and the internal main control board can be taken out. Thereafter, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the long hole of the other box coupling portion 85. If the history of opening the board box 83 is left in the board box 83, it can be easily found that the illegal opening has been performed by looking at the board box 83.

  A plurality of coupling pieces 86 are provided on one short side of the substrate box 83 so as to protrude laterally. These coupling pieces 86 have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main control device 81, and the board box 83 and the mounting base are formed by the coupling pieces 86 and the coupled pieces 87. Between them.

  In addition, as a trace means for discovering unauthorized opening of the substrate box 83, a seal seal may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the seal seal is peeled off from the pasted portion, the adhesive layer of the seal seal remains on the substrate box 83 side, and the trace remains. Further, an IC tag that transmits a response wave including identification information to the ringing wave having a predetermined frequency is provided on the seal sticker. When the seal sticker is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut and the response It is good also as a structure which cannot transmit a wave.

  The sound lamp control device 82 includes a sound lamp control board that controls sound and lamp display and control of a display control device (not shown) according to an instruction from the main control device 81. The sound lamp control board is made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 84 is configured to be accommodated.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, and a payout mechanism 92 and a control device assembly unit 93 are attached to the back pack 91. The back pack 91 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, the sound lamp control device 82, and the like from the rear. doing.

  The payout mechanism portion 92 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 94, and a tank 95 to which game balls supplied from island facilities in the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a game stored in the tank 95. A payout device 96 for paying out balls. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 are discharged to the upper plate 71 or the lower plate 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. Further, the payout mechanism 92 is mounted with a back pack substrate on which a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC is supplied and a power switch for turning on and off the power is provided.

  Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal plate 99 on the rotation axis side of the back pack unit 15 and on the upper edge side. The external output terminal plate 99 has an output terminal for outputting a signal when there is a shortage of game balls in the tank 95 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. State transition such as an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a loan is made, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the gaming machine body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and an opening / closing execution mode At this time (or during the transition to the state), an output terminal for outputting a signal is provided. And the signal regarding the state of a frame side is output with respect to the management control apparatus of the game hall side through these output terminals. Note that an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of game balls are lent out is not necessary in a so-called cash machine.

  The control device assembly unit 93 includes a payout control device 97 and a power source and launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 and the power supply / launch control device 98 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 97 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is accommodated in a substrate box. In this case, fraud suppression means similar to the substrate box 83 of the main control device 81 may be applied to the substrate box of the payout control device 97.

  The power source and launch control device 98 is configured such that a power source and launch control board is accommodated in a board box, and predetermined power required by various control devices and the like is generated and output by the board, and further by the player Control of the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the firing handle 54 is performed. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing and storing various data, so that even if a power failure occurs, it can maintain the state at the time of the power failure and can return to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure. It is like that.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 202 is mounted on the main control board 201 provided in the main control device 81. The MPU 202 is a ROM 203 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 202 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 203 is executed. The RAM 204 is an element incorporating an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. Note that a part of the functions of the MPU 202, for example, the function of the ROM 203 and the function of the RAM 204 may be provided as separate elements.

  The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 202, a power failure monitoring board 205 provided in the main control device 81, a payout control device 97, various detection sensors 211a to 211e, and the like are connected. In this case, a power supply and launch control device 98 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power failure monitoring board 205. Also, as a part of the various detection sensors 211a to 211e, a winning winning entry portion (a payout corresponding entering portion) such as a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating opening 33, a lower operating opening 34, a through gate 35, and the like. Are connected to each other, and the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 performs a winning determination (entering determination) for each entering part. In addition, the MPU 202 executes a lottery occurrence lottery based on winning at the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34, and also performs support generation lottery based on a winning at the through gate 35.

  On the output side of the MPU 202, a power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, and an audio lamp control device 82 are connected. For example, the payout control device 97 outputs a winning ball command based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning portion. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to. When a winning to the general winning opening 31 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to payout of 10 game balls is output, and when a winning to the variable winning device 32 is specified, 15 winning balls are output. When a winning ball command corresponding to paying out a game ball is output and a winning to the upper operating port 33 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to paying out three gaming balls is output and sent to the lower operating port 34. When a winning is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

  Various commands such as a change start command (or change command), a type command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the sound lamp control device 82. In this case, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to when these various commands are output. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each command is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as information of the predetermined number of bytes.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 202, a variable winning drive unit 32c that opens and closes the open / close door 32b of the variable winning device 32, an electric combination drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34, and a main display. The segment display 101 which comprises the part 43 is connected. The main control board 201 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 202 performs drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, drive control of the variable winning drive unit 32c is executed in the MPU 202 so that the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed. Further, when the electric combination 34a is won, the MPU 202 performs drive control of the electric combination drive unit 34b so that the electric combination 34a is opened and closed. In each game round, the display control of the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS in the segment display unit 101 is executed in the MPU 202, and the segment display unit is used in the opening / closing execution mode of the variable winning device 32. Display control of the round display unit RS in 101 is executed.

  Furthermore, an external output terminal plate 99 is connected to the output side of the MPU 202. In this case, the external output terminal plate 99 has a jackpot signal output terminal (first state signal output terminal) 99a and a jackpot and special out signal output terminal (second state signal) as output terminals for outputting a signal at the time of state transition. Output terminal) 99b.

  When the game result is a jackpot result, the MPU 202 can output a jackpot signal to the management control device on the game hall side through the jackpot signal output terminal 99a. Specifically, in a normal time, a LOW level signal is output from the jackpot signal output terminal 99a, and when a jackpot result is obtained, an HI level signal is output. The output mode of this signal may be reversed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, as will be described later, even if the winning / losing lottery result based on winning in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is not a big win, the variable winning device 32 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. A special loss result (that is, a small hit) is provided as one type of game result. In this case, when the game result is a jackpot result or when the game result is a special loss result, the MPU 202 sends a jackpot and special loss signal output terminal 99b to the management controller on the game hall side. It is possible to output jackpot and special off-line signals. Specifically, in normal times, a LOW level signal is output from the jackpot and special loss signal output terminal 99b, and a HI level signal is output when a jackpot result or a special loss result is obtained. The output mode of this signal may be reversed.

  The power failure monitoring board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power supply / launch control device 98, and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

  The power source and launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 201 and the payout control device 97, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. To do. The power source and launch control device 98 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 53, and the game ball launch mechanism 53 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The sound lamp control device 82 is based on various commands input from the main control device 81, the holding lamp portions 45 to 47 provided in the variable display unit 36, the display lamp portion 63 provided in the front door frame 14, and a speaker. The unit 64 is driven and controlled, and the display control device 212 is controlled.

  The display control device 212 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command input from the sound lamp control device 82. In this case, the sound lamp control device 82 determines the symbol combination display time on the symbol display device 41 and finally the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed based on various commands input from the main control device 81. The lottery of the presence / absence of reach and the contents of reach production is executed.

  Here, the display content of the symbol display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of the upper, middle and lower stages are set. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers in the upper symbol row Z1, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. On the display screen G, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, the display screen G is configured such that 3 symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has come to be.

  The display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5. Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number attached to any one of the effective lines is formed. When the fluctuation display of .about.Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variable jackpot result which will be described later.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “specific symbols”, and when a 15R probability variation jackpot result is generated, The combination is stopped. The main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “non-specific symbols”. When a normal jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. The

  In addition, in the case of an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result to be described later, the variation display of all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is finished in a state in which a combination of symbols with different numbers is formed, and then an explicit movie is displayed. It is displayed. In addition, in the case of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outlier result, which will be described later, the variation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is finished in a state where a combination of symbols with different numbers is formed, and thereafter , The common video is displayed.

  In addition, the mode of the display of the symbol variation in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the symbol variation display in the symbol sequence, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed.

  The first hold display area Ga is set on the left side of the lower part of the display screen G, and the second hold display area Gb is set on the right side of the lower part of the display screen G.

  In the first holding display area (non-priority side holding display area) Ga, the unit holding display areas Ga1 to Ga4 of the same number as the maximum holding number when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. The section is displayed as shown. Specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls when a game ball wins the upper operating port 33 is four, and the first reserved display area Ga corresponding to this is the first unit reserved display area Ga1, second A unit hold display area Ga2, a third unit hold display area Ga3, and a fourth unit hold display area Ga4 are set.

  For example, when the number of holds when the game ball is won in the upper operation port 33 is 1, a predetermined hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Ga1, and the game ball is displayed in the upper operation port 33. When the number of holds when winning is 4, the predetermined hold image is displayed in all of the first unit hold display area Ga1 to the fourth unit hold display area Ga4. The display contents in the first hold display area Ga will be described later in detail.

  In the second hold display area (priority hold display area) Gb, the same number of unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4 as the maximum hold number when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34 are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. The section is displayed as shown. Specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls when a game ball wins the lower operating hole 34 is four, and the second reserved display area Gb is associated with the first unit reserved display area Gb1, second A unit hold display area Gb2, a third unit hold display area Gb3, and a fourth unit hold display area Gb4 are set.

  For example, if the number of holds when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34 is 1, the hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Gb1, and the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. In the case where the number of holds is 4, the hold image is displayed in all of the first unit hold display area Gb1 to the fourth unit hold display area Gb4. The display contents in the second hold display area Gb will be described in detail later.

<About various counters>
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  The MPU 202 uses lots of counter information in the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the main display unit 43, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting of display of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery in which the jackpot is generated, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining a jackpot type such as a probabilistic jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, Reach random number counter C3 used for reach lottery when the symbol display device 41 fluctuates and fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a first result display unit AS of the main display unit 43 And the second result display unit BS and the variation type counter CS for determining the variation display time in the symbol display device 41. It is set to be. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is in the electric utility open state is used.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 231 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 204. The RAM 204 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 232 including a first result display area reservation area Ra, a second result display area reservation area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total number of reservations storage area. In the reserved ball storage area 232, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are time-sequentially matched to the winning history of the game balls to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. It is designed to be stored.

  For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599), it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The big hit random number counter C <b> 1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (availability information group) in a success / failure table storage area 221 as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the success / failure table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, as the success / failure table, the success / failure table for low probability mode (low probability success / failure information group) in FIG. 10 (a) and the success / failure table for high probability mode in FIG. 10 (b) (high Probability success / failure information group) is set. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. In this case, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the high probability mode. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

  Moreover, in each lottery mode, the lottery result is an outlier result except for the random number value that is a big win, but in this pachinko machine 10, two types of special outlook results and normal outlook results are set as outlier results. Has been. These differences will be described later.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 29, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 29) and then returns to 0. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The plurality of jackpot results are (1) a mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) a lottery mode in the winning lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the electric accessory 34a of the operating port 34.

  Here, as an aspect of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winning in the variable winning device 32 between the start and end of the opening / closing execution mode becomes relatively high. As described above, the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 32a is performed 15 times (the number of times for high frequency) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is 30 sec (high frequency time) ) Or until the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 32a reaches 10 (high frequency). On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 32a is performed twice (the number of times for low frequency) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is 0.2 sec (low frequency time). Or until the number of winning prizes in the special winning opening 32a reaches 6 (the number of low frequency).

  In this case, in the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 54 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 53 is set so that one game ball is launched toward the game area in 0.6 sec. Drive controlled. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, as described above, the opening time of one large winning opening 32a is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the one big winning opening 32a is shorter than the game ball firing cycle. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

  Note that the number of opening / closing of the large winning opening 32a in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are lower in the high-frequency winning mode. As long as the frequency of occurrence of winning in the variable winning device 32 increases from when the opening / closing execution mode is started to when it ends, the value is not limited to the above value and is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of opening and closing times than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer or the opening limit number for one opening is set larger. Good.

  However, in order to clarify the difference in privilege between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low-frequency winning mode, the winning to the variable winning device 32 does not substantially occur. It may be configured. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the product of the launch period of the game ball and the opening limit number is set shorter than the opening limit time for one release, while in the low-frequency winning mode, It is good also as a structure which sets the product of the launching period of a game ball and the open limit number longer than the open limit time. In addition, even if the launch interval of the game balls and the opening time of one large winning opening 32a are not as described above, in the low-frequency winning mode, by setting the latter to be shorter than the former, It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a winning to the variable winning device 32 is not substantially generated.

  As a support mode for the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34, the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34 is compared when the game ball is continuously being fired in the same manner with respect to the game area. Low frequency support mode (low frequency support state or low frequency guide state) and high frequency support mode (high frequency support state or high frequency guide state) so that the frequency of the open state per unit time is relatively high or low. And are set.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the power combination open state in the electric combination release lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5) However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electrified open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and one more release is performed. The time is set longer. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, the closed state from the end of one open state until the next open state is started The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is set shorter when the next electric character opening lottery is performed after one electric character opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode. Has been.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning a prize for the lower working port 34 than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will be given to the upper working port 33 than to the lower working port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower working port 34 is connected to the lower working port 34. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a winning is made to the lower working port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the power release state per unit time as compared with the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the electric component release lottery It is good also as a structure which raises the probability of becoming electrified in the electric character open state in Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the minimum secured time is secured when the next electric character opening lottery is performed after one electric character releasing lottery is performed. By applying any one condition or any combination of conditions (that is, shortening the one-time variable display time in the display part 44 for an accessory) and increasing the winning probability, the low frequency support mode is applied. The advantage of the high frequency support mode may be increased.

  The big hit type counter C <b> 2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 222 as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, the distribution table includes a distribution table (first distribution information group) for the first result display unit in FIG. 11A and a second result display unit in FIG. A distribution table (second distribution information group) is set.

  In the distribution table for the first result display section, as shown in FIG. 11A, as the distribution destination of the game result, the normal jackpot result (low-probability corresponding special game result), the unspecified 2R probability variable jackpot result (non- Explicit high-probability corresponding game result or latent probability variation state), explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result (explicit high probability corresponding game result or sudden probability variation result), 15R probability variation jackpot result (high probability special game result) Has been.

  The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / not-lotting mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the normal jackpot state (special gaming state corresponding to low probability).

  The result of the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot is that the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode is maintained at the previous mode. It is a result. In other words, the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot state (non-explicit high probability corresponding gaming state).

  The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. . The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning or failing lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big hit state by that. In other words, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot state (explicit high probability corresponding gaming state).

  The 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning or failing lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big hit state by that. In other words, the 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the gaming state is shifted to the 15R probability variation jackpot state (a special gaming state corresponding to high probability).

  Note that the normal gaming state in relation to the above gaming states refers to a state in which the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table for the first result display unit, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 14” is unspecified. It corresponds to the 2R probability variation jackpot result, “15 to 19” corresponds to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and “20 to 29” corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

  As described above, the non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result are set as the probability variation jackpot result, thereby diversifying the mode of the probability variation jackpot result. That is, when the three types of probability variation jackpot results are compared, the advantage for the player is that the 15R probability variation jackpot result, which is the high-frequency winning mode in the opening / closing execution mode and the high-frequency support mode in the support mode, is the highest. Although the mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, the support mode has the second highest explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, which is the high-frequency support mode, and the support mode is the low-frequency winning mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. 2R probability variation jackpot result is lowest. Thereby, monotonization of a game is suppressed and it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In particular, in the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / raising lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, but the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode as in the normal gaming state. Then, as a gaming state, it is possible to create a gaming state in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes a high probability mode even though the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is common to the low frequency support mode. It is possible to predict whether the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

  On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second result display section, as shown in FIG. 11B, only the normal jackpot result and the 15R probability variation jackpot result are set as the game result distribution destination. Of the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 29” corresponds to the 15R probability variable jackpot result.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the game result distribution mode in the case of winning the jackpot is based on the winning win based on the winning to the upper operating port 33 and the winning to the lower operating port 34. It is different from the case of winning the jackpot based on.

  Here, regardless of whether the distribution table for the first result display section or the distribution table for the second result display section is used, the probability of a promiscuous jackpot result when the jackpot is won is the same. Yes. That is, in the distribution table for the first result display unit, the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 assigned to the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and the 15R probability variation jackpot result is 20. ing. Further, in the distribution table for the second result display section, the number of values of the big hit type counter C2 assigned to the 15R probability variation big hit result is 20. Therefore, the probability that the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends is determined based on whether or not a big win is won based on the winning to the upper working port 33 and a big winning win based on the winning to the lower working port 34. (Specifically, 2/3).

  However, if a big win is won based on the winning of the lower working port 34 and a probable big hit result is generated, a 15R probable big winning result is always obtained, whereas a big win is won based on the winning of the upper working port 33 and In the case of a probabilistic jackpot result, an unspecified 2R probable jackpot result or an explicit 2R probable jackpot result with a probability of 1/4, and a 15R probable jackpot result with a probability of 1/2. In other words, the probability of occurrence of the 15R probability variation jackpot result, which is the most advantageous for the player among the probability variation jackpot results, is higher when the jackpot win is won based on the winning to the lower operation port 34. It will be higher than if you win a jackpot based on winning.

  In addition, in the unclear 2R probability variation jackpot result, the winning / raft lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends as described above, but the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. When compared with the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the opportunity to receive game balls is reduced by the fact that the electric accessory 34a is less likely to be in the open state, and further, based on the distribution table for the second result display section. The possibility that a lottery will be performed is reduced.

  As described above, the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 have a clear difference in the advantage for the player. Accordingly, the player plays a game while expecting that a prize will be generated in the lower working port 34 among the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34, and accordingly, the frequency of winning in the lower working port 34. The player's attention to the high-frequency support mode that increases becomes higher.

  Further, in the present pachinko machine 10, as described above, when a result of losing is determined in the lottery, a result of normal losing or a special losing result is obtained. In this case, in the case of a normal losing result that occurs with a relatively high probability when the result is a losing result, the open / close execution mode is not shifted, and further, the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode are not changed.

  On the other hand, a special failure result that occurs with a relatively low probability when a failure result is obtained results in a special failure state. In the special losing state, the open / close execution mode is entered in a situation where the result of losing is determined in the lottery. However, the opening / closing execution mode of the transfer destination is the low-frequency winning mode. Therefore, even if the result is a special losing result, it is not possible to expect a game ball to be awarded to the big prize opening 32a. Further, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode do not shift.

  By setting the special loss result as described above, the opening of the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 can be used as an effect. Here, not in the opening / closing execution mode, but also in the normal gaming state where the winning / raising lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, if the result is a special outage result, the low frequency winning mode is executed. Only the mode is changed, and thereafter, the normal gaming state is restored. On the other hand, when the above-described implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode that is the low-frequency winning mode, and thereafter, the winning / raising lottery mode is high although the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. Probability mode. As a result, the occurrence of a special outage result under normal gaming conditions and the occurrence of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result will result in a transition to the opening / closing execution mode as the same low-frequency winning mode, and then the support mode becomes low-frequency support. In both cases, the difference between the two is that the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode in the former, whereas the high probability mode is in the latter. In other words, the occurrence of a special loss result under normal gaming conditions and the occurrence of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result are common to the behavior of each movable object such as the behavior of the variable winning device 32 and the behavior of the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34. However, only the internal lottery state is different. As a result, when the opening / closing execution mode that is the low-frequency winning mode occurs under the normal gaming state, it is possible to imagine whether or not the winning lottery mode has shifted to the high-probability mode afterwards. It becomes possible to raise the degree of attention.

  When the winning / losing lottery mode is the low-probability mode, as shown in FIG. 10A, the number of random numbers resulting in the special loss result is two, as is the case with the random number winning the big hit. On the other hand, when the winning / losing lottery mode is the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 10 (b), the random number value resulting from the special losing result is the special number in the low probability mode. It is one smaller than the number of random number values that will be the result of divergence. In this way, by reducing the number of random values that result in special outliers to be less than the number of random number values that are won in big hits in the high probability mode, the jackpot is greater than the probability that results in special outage in the high probability mode. The probability of winning can be increased. In addition, by setting the number of random numbers resulting in special outliers to be lower in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the probability of a special outage result in the high probability mode is lower than in the low probability mode. Can also be lowered.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 238) and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. Stored in the reserved area Rb. Then, based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203, it is determined whether to generate a reach. However, in the game times that shift to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 202 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display is the same in each gaming state, but may be set individually according to the gaming state. For example, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display may be set larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

  Here, the reach display (reach state) includes a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures), and the opening / closing execution mode of the variable winning device 32 is a high-frequency winning mode. In the game machine in which the stop display result after the variable display is a special display result in the game times to be, the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 41 is started. This means a display state for making the player think that the display state is a variable display state that is likely to result in the special display result in the previous stage.

  In other words, the combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is established by stopping the symbols for some of the symbol sequences displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. This is a display state in which a combination of reach symbols that may be displayed is displayed, and in that state, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

  More specifically, as a step before ending the variable display of symbols, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is established on a preset active line in the display screen of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach symbols that may possibly be displayed, and a symbol change display is performed by a final stop symbol row in a situation where the reach line is formed.

  The display contents in FIG. 8 will be described in detail. First, in the state where the symbol variation display is finished in the upper symbol row Z1, and further in the state where the symbol variation display is finished in the lower symbol row Z3, any effective A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols having the same numbers on the lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol variation display is performed in the middle symbol row Z2. Reach display. When the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2. The symbol variation display is terminated.

  In the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of symbols is performed on the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. There are those that produce an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on almost the entire display screen after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols. Further, when reach display is performed or before reach display, it is determined using the reach random number counter C3 or other counter whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character. May be.

  For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 202 to determine the variation display time in the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS of the main display unit 43 and the symbol variation display time in the symbol display device 41. . The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS and at the variation start time of the symbol by the symbol display device 41.

  For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 is incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 249 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 249). The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric combination holding area 233 of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state based on the value of the stored electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 199, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the open state, and if C4 = 200 to 249, the electric accessory 34a is not controlled to the open state.

  As already described, the MPU 202 uses at least the buffer value of the variation type counter CS to determine the variation display time in the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS. A variable display time table storage area 223 is used. Further, the MPU 202 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to determine the stop results in the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS. However, the stop result table storage area 224 of the ROM 203 is used for the determination.

<Configuration of the holding ball storage area 232>
Next, the configuration of the reserved ball storage area 232 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG.

  The first result display section holding area Ra stores the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 in time series in accordance with the winning history of the game balls to the upper working port 33. Is a reserved area for In addition, the second result display section holding area Rb displays the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 in time series in accordance with the winning history of the game balls to the lower operating port 34. This is a reserved area for storing. Here, since the first result display area reservation area Ra and the second result display area reservation area Rb have the same configuration, the first result display area of the both reservation areas Ra and Rb will be described below. The configuration of the reserved area Ra will be described.

  The first result display area reservation area Ra includes four storage areas of a first area to a fourth area, and a reservation number storage area. Each storage area has a C1 storage area for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a C2 storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and a C3 storage for storing the value of the reach random number counter C3. It consists of an area and more. With the four storage areas of the first area to the fourth area, up to four game balls winning histories to the upper operation port 33 are stored on hold.

  The C1 storage area is composed of 2 bytes, and the jackpot counter C1 value of any of 0 to 599 is stored using the lower 10 bits of 0 to 9. The upper 6 bits of 10 to 15 in the C1 storage area are unused areas.

  The C2 storage area is composed of 1 byte, and the jackpot type counter C2 value of any of 0 to 29 is stored using the lower 5 bits of 0 to 4. The upper 2 bits of 5 to 7 in the C2 storage area are unused areas.

  The C3 storage area is composed of 1 byte, and one of the reach random number counters C3 of 0 to 238 is stored using all 8 bits of 0 to 7.

  The reserved number storage area is a storage area for storing the number of use of the storage area, that is, the number of the game balls won in the upper operation port 33 and held. The reserved number storage area is composed of 1 byte, and any value of 0 to 4 is stored using the lower 3 bits of 0 to 2. The upper 5 bits of 3 to 7 in the reserved number storage area are unused areas.

  In addition, in the reserved ball storage area 232, the total number of holds for storing information of the sum of the number of holds in the first result display area reservation area Ra and the number of holds in the second result display area reservation area Rb. A storage area is provided. The total reserved number storage area is composed of 1 byte, and any value from 0 to 8 is stored using lower 4 bits of 0 to 3. Of the total reserved number storage area, the upper 4 bits of 4 to 7 are unused areas.

  The execution area AE shown in FIG. 9 is stored in the storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area Rb when the variable display of each result display section AS, BS is started. This is an area for moving each value. The execution area AE has the same configuration as the storage area for one of the result display area reservation areas Ra and Rb, that is, a C1 storage area having a 2-byte configuration, a C2 storage area having a 1-byte configuration, and a 1-byte configuration. And a C3 storage area.

<Various processes executed by main controller 81>
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process that are executed when the MPU 202 in the main controller 81 advances the game in each game time will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 202 executes a main process activated when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). However, description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically by the MPU 202 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, various winning switch reading processes are executed. That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 81 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Thereafter, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. In subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. Thereafter, in step S104, a winning process for the operating port accompanying winning in the operating ports 33, 34 is executed, and in addition, in a step S105, a winning process for winning in accordance with winning in the through gate 35 is executed. This timer interrupt process is terminated.

  The winning opening process for the operation port in step S104 and the through winning process in step S105 will be described below.

<Winning process for working port>
First, the winning process for the working opening will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S <b> 201, it is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the upper operating port 33 whether or not the game ball has won a prize (start winning) at the upper operating port 33. If it is determined that the game ball has won the upper working port 33, in step S202, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out three game balls is set. In subsequent step S203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the upper working port 33. In step S204, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra is read, and the start reserved storage number RaN stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra is set. (Hereinafter, it is also referred to as the first start reserved memory number RaN). Thereafter, in step S205, an information acquisition process for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is performed, and the main winning process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the upper working port 33, in step S206, whether or not the game ball has won the lower working port 34 (starting winning) corresponds to the lower working port 34. The determination is made based on the detection state of the detection sensor. If it is determined that the game ball has won the lower operation port 34, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out four game balls is set in step S207. In the subsequent step S208, an external signal setting process is performed so as to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the lower operation port 34. In step S209, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the second result display area reservation area Rb is read, and the start reserved memory number RbN stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb is set. (Hereinafter, it is also referred to as the second start reserved memory number RbN). Thereafter, an information acquisition process is performed in step S205, and the main winning process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if both step S201 and step S206 are NO, that is, if the game ball has not won any of the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34, the main winning process is finished as it is.

  The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S207 is transmitted to the payout control device 97 in an external output process S501 of a normal process described later.

  Here, the information acquisition process of step S205 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved start storages N (RaN or RbN) set in step S204 or step S209 described above is less than an upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If the start hold storage number N is the upper limit value, the information acquisition process is terminated as it is. If the start hold storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the start hold storage number N of the corresponding result display unit hold area is set to 1 in step S302. In addition to the increment, the value stored in the total reserved number storage area in step S303 (hereinafter referred to as the common reserved number CRN) is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are used as the first storage area among the free storage area areas of the corresponding result display area reservation area. That is, the number is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number incremented by 1 in step S302.

  That is, when the first start pending storage number RaN is set, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the step S103 are used for the first result display unit. The first storage area among the free storage areas of the reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation storage number RaN incremented by 1 in step S302 is stored.

  If the second start pending storage number RbN is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are used for the second result display section. The first storage area among the free storage areas of the reserved area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start reserved memory number RbN incremented by 1 in step S302 is stored.

  In the subsequent step S305, an operation winning command (start winning command or information for making the audio lamp control device 82, which is a sub-side control device, recognize that a game ball has won the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34). Start selection information) is executed. Specifically, depending on whether the first start hold memory number RaN or the second start hold memory number RbN is set as the start hold memory number N, the operation port that is the target of the current information acquisition process is activated. Whether the port 33 or the lower working port 34 is specified. In the case of the lower operating port 34, an operation winning command including information indicating that a winning to the lower operating port 34 has occurred is selected from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 as the current operating winning command.

  On the other hand, in the case of the upper working port 33, from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, information indicating that the winning to the upper working port 33 has occurred as the current working winning command, and the first result in step S304. An operation winning command including information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and information on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the storage area of the display unit reservation area Ra is selected. That is, the operation winning command in this case includes the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 as they are.

  In the subsequent step S306, the operation winning command selected in step S305 is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82, and then the information acquisition process is terminated. The operation winning command set in step S306 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). In the sound lamp control device 82, based on the received operation winning command, the display on the first holding lamp unit 45 and the second holding lamp unit 46 of the variable display unit 36, the first holding display area Ga of the symbol display device 41, and Processing for changing the display in the second hold display area Gb in accordance with the increase in the number of hold is executed. This will be described in detail later.

  Note that, instead of the operation winning command, a hold notification command including information that a winning to the upper operation port 33 has occurred, and a content command including information corresponding to the winning lottery or the distribution lottery in the holding information related to the winning May be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82.

<Winning winning process>
Next, the through winning process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 35. If it is determined that the game ball has won the through gate 35, the process proceeds to step S402, and it is determined whether or not the accessory reserve storage number SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment).

  On the condition that the game ball wins the through gate 35 and that the accessory reservation storage number SN <4, the process proceeds to step S403, and the accessory reservation storage number SN is incremented by one. Subsequently, in step S404, the value of the electric utility product release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the first area of the free storage area of the electric utility reservation area 233 of the RAM 204. Then, after turning on the third holding lamp section 47 of the variable display unit 36 corresponding to the number of stored storage, the main winning process is terminated. The third hold lamp unit 47 is sequentially lit from the left side. For example, if the accessory reservation storage number SN is 1, the leftmost third reservation lamp unit 47 is turned on and the accessory reservation storage number SN is If it is 4, all the 3rd holding | maintenance lamp | ramp parts 47 will be lighted.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined in step S401 that a game ball has won the through gate 35, or if it is determined in step S402 that the value of the reserved item storage number SN is greater than or equal to the upper limit value, the electric accessory release counter C4 The prize winning process is terminated without storing the value of.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is activated when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, the processing of steps S501 to S507 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S508 and S509 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S501, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence / absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. If an effect command such as a change start command, a type command, or a change end command is set, it is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82.

  Next, in step S502, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In the subsequent step S503, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 97 are read. Thereafter, in step S504, game time control processing for controlling the game in each game time is executed. In the game times control process, jackpot determination, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the result display sections AS and BS on the side performing variation display, and the like are performed. Details of the game times control process will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S505, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. Although details will be described later, the gaming state shifts to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like by this gaming state transition processing.

  In step S <b> 506, a power combination support process for driving and controlling the electric combination 34 a provided in the lower operation port 34 is executed. In this electronic combination support process, it is determined whether or not the electric combination 34a is opened, display control of the combination display 44, and the like are performed. The details of the power combination support process will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S507, it is determined whether or not the next normal process execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. The random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing (steps S508 and S509). That is, in step S508, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. In step S509, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S501 to S506 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random. Similarly, The variation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process in step S504 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS.

  In the game times control process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening / closing execution mode flag (opening / closing execution state information) is stored (stored) in the opening / closing execution mode flag storage area (opening / closing execution state information storage means) in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. To do. The opening / closing execution mode flag is stored when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is erased when the opening / closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

  When in the open / close execution mode, the game is executed without executing any of the processes after step S602, that is, the game times starting process of steps S603 to S605 and the game times progressing process of steps S606 to S609. End control processing. In other words, in the open / close execution mode, the game times are not started regardless of whether or not a winning for the operation ports 33 and 34 has occurred.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S602 whether the main display unit 43 is in a variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS is in a variable display. This determination is made as to whether or not the variable display flag (variable display information) is stored (stored) in the variable display flag storage area (variable display information storage unit) in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. This is done by judging. The variable display flag is stored when variable display is started for either the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS, and is erased when the variable display ends.

  When the main display unit 43 is not in a variable display, the process proceeds to the game turn start process in steps S603 to S605. In the game turn starting process, first, in step S603, it is determined whether or not the common pending number CRN is “0”. The case where the common hold number CRN is “0” means that the start hold storage number is “0” for both the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34. Therefore, the game times control process is finished as it is. If the common hold number CRN is not “0”, in order to set the data stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra or the second result display area reservation area Rb in step S604 for variable display. In step S605, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display unit 43 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41 is performed, and then the game number control process is terminated.

  Here, the data setting process in step S604 and the change start process in step S605 will be described in detail below.

  First, the data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the data setting process, first, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is “0”. When the second start reserved memory number RbN is “0”, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S702 to S707 is executed, and when the second start reserved memory number RbN is not “0”. Executes the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S708 to S713.

  Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is a case where the common pending number CRN is 1 or more as described above. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN is “0”. If it is not “0”, that is, the hold information for variable display is displayed for the second result display unit BS. If stored, the data stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb is set for variable display regardless of whether or not the first start reservation storage number RaN is 1 or more. I made it. Thereby, when the hold information is stored in both the first result display hold area Ra and the second result display hold area Rb, the second result display hold area corresponding to the lower operation port 34. The hold information stored in Rb is prioritized.

  In the data setting process for the first result display unit, first, in step S702, the first reserved storage number RaN of the first result display unit reservation area Ra is decremented by one. In subsequent step S703, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by one. Thereafter, in step S704, the data stored in the first area of the first result display area reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

  After that, in step S705, a process for shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first result display area reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area, and the second area → the first area, the first area, Data in each area is shifted, such as 3 area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on.

  In the subsequent step S706, the second result display section flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. If it is stored, it is erased, and if it is not stored, its state is maintained. The second result display unit flag is information for specifying whether the start of the current variation display is the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS.

  In the subsequent step S707, a shift time command (shift occurrence information) that is information for causing the audio lamp control device 82, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted is set. In this case, from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, information indicating that the reserved area to which the data is shifted this time corresponds to the reserved area Ra for the first result display section, that is, the upper operating port 33. A shift time command including information indicating that it is compatible is selected, and the selected shift time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The shift command set in step S707 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). In the sound lamp control device 82, the number of the hold is reduced based on the received command at the time of shift, the display in the first hold lamp unit 45 of the variable display unit 36 and the display in the first hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 41. Execute the process to change in accordance with. This will be described in detail later.

  In the data setting process for the second result display unit, first, in step S708, the second reserved storage number RbN of the second result display unit reserved area Rb is decremented by one. In subsequent step S709, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by one. Thereafter, in step S710, the data stored in the first area of the second result display area reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

  Then, the process which shifts the data stored in the memory | storage area of 2nd result display part holding | maintenance area Rb in step S711 is performed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area, and the second area → the first area, the first area, Data in each area is shifted, such as 3 area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on.

  In the subsequent step S712, the second result display section flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. If not stored, the second result display section flag is stored, and if stored, the state is maintained.

  In the subsequent step S713, a command at the time of shifting (shift occurrence information) is set, which is information for causing the audio lamp control device 82, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, it corresponds to the information indicating that the reserved area to which the current data is shifted corresponds to the reserved area Rb for the second result display section, that is, corresponds to the lower operation port 34. The command at the time of shift including the information indicating that the command is being performed is selected, and the selected command at the time of shift is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The shift command set in step S713 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). In the voice lamp control device 82, the number of the hold is reduced based on the received shift command, the display on the second hold lamp unit 46 of the variable display unit 36 and the display on the second hold display area Gb of the symbol display device 41. Execute the process to change in accordance with. This will be described in detail later.

  Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the variation start process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the high probability mode flag (high probability state information) is stored (stored) in the high probability mode flag storage area (high probability state information storage means) provided in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. Determine whether. The high probability mode flag is a flag that is stored at the end of the opening / closing execution mode related to the occurrence of the probability variation jackpot result, and is erased when a normal jackpot result occurs thereafter.

  If it is not the high probability mode, in step S802, the determination is made with reference to the determination table for the low probability mode. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the success / failure table for the low probability mode as shown in FIG. 10 (a). It is determined whether or not. On the other hand, in the case of the high probability mode, whether or not it is determined is determined in step S803 by referring to a high probability mode determination table. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the success / failure table for the high probability mode as shown in FIG. 10 (b). It is determined whether or not.

  After the process of step S802 or step S803, in step S804 to step S812, a process for setting the game result of the current game round is executed, and in the current game round, the first result display unit AS or the first (2) A process for setting a stop result when the variable display executed in one of the result display units BS is ended is executed. In this case, when setting the stop result, various stop result tables (stop result information group) stored in the stop result table storage area 224 as stop result information group storage means in the ROM 203 are referred to.

  Here, the stop result table will be described with reference to FIG. 21A is a stop result table for explicit 2R probability change, FIG. 21B is a stop result table for non-explicit 2R probability change, and FIG. 21C is a stop result table for 15R probability change. FIG. 21D is a normal jackpot stop result table, FIG. 21E is a special miss stop result table, and FIG. 21F is a normal miss stop result table.

  Information on the stop result is stored in advance in the ROM 203 as stop result data. Each stop result data is set not only for the contents of the stop result to be displayed when the variable display in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS is ended, but in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode In addition, the content of the number of rounds to be displayed on the round display part RS (the number of times the special winning opening 32a is opened) is also set. That is, in each stop result data, the content of the stop result in the result display unit and the content of the number of rounds in the round display unit RS are set as a pair.

  As the stop result data, a plurality of data of data 1 to data 12 is stored. Among these data 1 to 12, data 1 and data 2 are stop result data for explicit 2R probability change, data 3 and data 4 are stop result data for implicit 2R probability change, data 5 and data 6 is stop result data for 15R probability change, data 7 and data 8 are usually stop result data for big hits, data 9 and data 10 are stop result data for special outage, and data 11 and data 12 are This is stop result data for normal removal. That is, a plurality of stop result data is set for each game result.

  It is not essential that two pieces of stop result data are set for one game result. Even if the number of pieces of stop result data set for a game result is different for each game result. It may be different in a predetermined combination.

  The stop result table for explicit 2R probability change, the stop result table for unspecified 2R probability change, the stop result table for 15R probability change, and the stop result table for normal jackpot each include the value of the jackpot type counter C2 and stop result data. Is stored. Specifically, the address of the stop result data is stored in association with the value of the jackpot type counter C2. On the other hand, the correspondence relationship between the value of the big hit random number counter C1 and the stop result data is stored in each of the special outage stop result table and the normal outage stop result table. Specifically, the address of the stop result data is stored in association with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1.

  For details of each stop result table, as shown in FIG. 21A, the stop result table for explicit 2R probability change is set as the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to the explicit 2R probability change jackpot result. Among “15-19”, “15-17” corresponds to the stop result data of data 1, and “18-19” corresponds to the stop result data of data 2. In this case, in the stop result data of data 1, the content of the number of rounds is “2”, and the content of the result display is “5”. Further, in the stop result data of data 2, the content of the number of rounds is “2”, and the content of the result display is “7”.

  In the stop result table for the implicit 2R probability change, as shown in FIG. 21B, among the “10 to 14” set as the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to the implicit 2R probability change jackpot result, “10 to 12” corresponds to the stop result data of data 3, and “13 to 14” corresponds to the stop result data of data 4. In this case, in the stop result data of data 3, the content of the number of rounds is “2”, and the content of the result display is “5.”. Further, in the stop result data of data 4, the content of the number of rounds is “2”, and the content of the result display is “7.”.

  Here, as described above, the case where the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result or the non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result occurs is a case where a game ball is won in the upper operating port 33 and the jackpot is won in the lottery. Therefore, the contents of the result display corresponding to the data 1 to data 4 are set only in the first result display part AS among the first result display part AS and the second result display part BS.

  In the stop result table for 15R probability change, as shown in FIG. 21C, among “10 to 29” set as the value of the big hit type counter C2 corresponding to the 15R probability change big hit result, “10 to 19” "Corresponds to the stop result data of data 5, and" 20 to 29 "corresponds to the stop result data of data 6. In this case, in the stop result data of data 5, the content of the number of rounds is “F”, and the content of the result display is “L”. Further, in the stop result data of data 6, the content of the number of rounds is “F”, and the content of the result display is “H”.

  Here, as described above, when the 15R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the game ball wins at the upper operation port 33 and the game ball wins at the lower operation port 34 when the game ball wins the winning jackpot. In either case, the winning lottery is either a big win. Among them, in the latter, since “10-29” is set as the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed to the 15R probability variation jackpot result, the stop result data of the data 5 or the stop result data of the data 6 Either one is selected. On the other hand, in the former, since “20 to 29” is set as the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed to the 15R probability variation jackpot result, only the stop result data of the data 6 is selected. Therefore, the content of the result display corresponding to the data 6 can be set in either the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS, whereas the content of the result display corresponding to the data 5 is Of the first result display part AS and the second result display part BS, only the second result display part BS is set.

  In the normal jackpot stop result table, as shown in FIG. 21 (d), "0 to 4" among "0 to 9" set as the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to the normal jackpot result. Corresponds to the stop result data of data 7, and “5 to 9” corresponds to the stop result data of data 8. In this case, in the stop result data of data 7, the content of the number of rounds is “F”, and the content of the result display is “L.”. Further, in the stop result data of data 8, the content of the number of rounds is “F”, and the content of the result display is “H.”.

  Here, as described above, when a normal jackpot result occurs, a game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and a game ball wins the lower operation port 34 when the game ball wins in the winning / losing lottery, One of the cases where the winner was won in the lottery. Therefore, the contents of the result display corresponding to the data 7 and the data 8 can be set in either the first result display part AS or the second result display part BS.

  In the special outage stop result table, “157” out of “157,457” set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the special outage result is data as shown in FIG. 9 corresponds to the stop result data of “9”, and “457” corresponds to the stop result data of data 10. In this case, in the stop result data of data 9, the content of the number of rounds is not set (that is, the light is turned off), and the content of the result display is “2”. Further, in the stop result data of the data 10, the content of the number of rounds is “.”, And the content of the result display is “2.”.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 10A and FIG. 10B, the special loss result is set so that the success / failure lottery mode can be generated in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode. Among these, in the former, since “157,457” is set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a special outage result, either the stop result data of the data 9 or the stop result data of the data 10 is selected. The On the other hand, in the latter case, since “157” is set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a special loss result, only the stop result data of the data 9 is selected.

  Further, the special losing result can be generated in any of the game times based on the winning of the game ball to the upper working port 33 and the game times based on the winning of the game ball to the lower working port 34. Therefore, the contents of the result display corresponding to the data 9 and the data 10 can be set in either the first result display part AS or the second result display part BS.

  In the normal outage stop result table, as shown in FIG. 21 (f), among the values set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the normal outage result, the corresponding value of 299 or less Corresponding to the stop result data, the corresponding value of 300 or more corresponds to the stop result data of the data 12. In this case, in the stop result data of the data 11, the content of the number of rounds is not set (that is, the light is turned off), and the content of the result display is “−”. In the stop result data of the data 12, the content of the number of rounds is not set (that is, the light is turned off), and the content of the result display is “-.”.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 10 (a) and FIG. 10 (b), the normal losing result is set so that the success / failure lottery mode can occur in either the low probability mode or the high probability mode. 1, either stop result data of data 11 or stop result data of data 12 is selected. In addition, the normal losing result can be generated in any of the game times based on the winning of the game ball to the upper working port 33 and the game times based on the winning of the game ball to the lower working port 34. Therefore, the contents of the result display corresponding to the data 11 and the data 12 can be set in either the first result display part AS or the second result display part BS.

  As described above, different display contents are set for every game result regardless of whether or not a big hit occurs. As a result, when the game round is ended, the manager of the game hall can select the result display section in which the variable display related to the game round is performed among the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS. By watching, it is possible to monitor what the game result of the game times is. In particular, since the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS provided in the main display unit 43 are display units that are directly controlled by the main control device 81, the sub display control device 212 performs display control. The display reliability is higher than that of the display unit which is interposed at the time.

  On the other hand, the contents of the number of rounds are common to “2”, which is the number of times that the big prize opening 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 is opened, in the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result. Probability jackpot results and normal jackpot results are common to “F”. Thereby, the manager of the game hall, when the content of the stop result displayed on the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS when the game round ends is based on the jackpot result, By looking at the display content of the round display section RS, it is possible to monitor the number of times the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is subsequently opened. In particular, the round display unit RS provided in the main display unit 43 is a display unit that is directly displayed and controlled by the main control device 81. In comparison, the display reliability is high.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 20), after the process of step S802 or step S803, it is determined in step S804 whether the lottery result in step S802 or step S803 is a big win. In the case of a big win, in steps S805 to S811, a process for setting a game result and a process for setting a stop result in the case of a big win are executed.

  In step S805, it is determined whether the second result display unit flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the second result display unit flag is not stored, in step S806, distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the first result display unit (see FIG. 11A). Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is a numerical range of a normal jackpot result, a numerical range of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, a numerical range of an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, a 15R probability variation jackpot Determine which of the resulting numerical ranges is included.

  On the other hand, if the second result display unit flag is stored, the distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the second result display unit (see FIG. 11B) in step S807. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the normal jackpot result or the numerical range of the 15R probability variable jackpot result.

  After the process of step S806 or step S807, it is determined in step S808 whether or not the game result distributed in step S806 or step S807 is a probability variation jackpot result. If it is a probable jackpot result, in step S809, any stop result is displayed on the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS in the current game round in which a probable jackpot result will occur. Execute the stop result setting process for probability variation jackpot to set whether to end the variable display at.

  The stop result setting process for probability variation big hit will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the game result distributed in step S806 or step S807 is a 15R probability variation jackpot result. Here, as already described, in the distribution table for the first result display section, as the probability variation jackpot result, a plurality of types of game results including an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and a 15R probability variation jackpot result. However, in the distribution table for the second result display section, only one type of 15R probability variation jackpot result is set as the probability variation jackpot result. Therefore, in the case where the current game time is based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 33 and the game result is distributed in the distribution table for the first result display unit. In step S901, a negative determination may be made or an affirmative determination may be made. On the other hand, in the case where the current game time is based on the winning of a game ball to the lower operation port 34 and the game result is distributed in the distribution table for the second result display section. In step S901, an affirmative determination is always made.

  If a negative determination is made in step S901, it is determined in step S902 whether or not the distributed game result is an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result. If the result is an explicit 2R probability change jackpot result, the stop corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is referred to the stop result table for the explicit 2R probability change already described in step S903. The address information of the result data is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 in step S904. Thereafter, in step S905, after storing (storing) the explicit 2R probability variation flag (explicit high probability correspondence information) in the explicit 2R probability variation flag storage area (explicit high probability correspondence information storage means) in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204, The stop result setting process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S902, in step S906, the stop result table for the implicit 2R probability change described above is referred to and the value of the big hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is handled. The address information of the stop result data obtained is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 in step S907. Thereafter, in step S908, the implicit 2R probability variation flag storage area (implicit high probability correspondence information storage means) in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 is stored (stored). ), The stop result setting process is terminated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, in step S909, the stop corresponding to the value of the big hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is referred to the stop result table for 15R probability change already described. The address information of the result data is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 in step S910. After that, after storing (storing) the 15R probability variation flag (high probability correspondence special information) in the 15R probability variation flag storage area (high probability correspondence special information storage means) in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 in step S911, this stop The result setting process ends.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 20), after executing the process of step S809, the process proceeds to step S813. On the other hand, if the game result distributed in step S806 or step S807 is not a probability variation jackpot result, a negative determination is made in step S808, and the process proceeds to step S810. In step S810, referring to the normal jackpot stop result table already described, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is acquired, and the address information is obtained. The result is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204. Thereafter, in step S811, the normal big hit flag (low probability correspondence special information) is stored (stored) in the normal big hit flag storage area (low probability correspondence special information storage means) in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204, and then this stop The result setting process ends. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S813.

  If the lottery result in step S802 or step S803 is not a big win, a negative determination is made in step S804, and the flow proceeds to step S812. In step S812, for the off time for setting which stop result is displayed on the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS in the current game round that results in a losing result, and the variable display is ended. Execute the stop result setting process.

  The stop result setting process for detachment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the high probability mode flag storage area provided in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. If it is not the high probability mode, a special outage determination is made as to whether or not the current game result is a special outage result with reference to the success / failure table for the low probability mode in step S1002. Specifically, does the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE match the value set as a special outage result in the low probability mode success / failure table shown in FIG. 10 (a)? Determine whether or not. On the other hand, if the mode is the high probability mode, in step S1003, the determination is made with reference to the determination table for the high probability mode. Specifically, does the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE match the value set as a special outage result in the high probability mode success / failure table shown in FIG. 10 (b)? Determine whether or not.

  Thereafter, in step S1004, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S1002 or step S1003 is a special loss result. In the case of a special outage result, in steps S1005 to S1007, processing for setting a game result in the case of a special outage result, processing for setting a stop result, and the like are executed.

  In step S1005, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the special outage stop result table described above, and in step S1006. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204. Thereafter, in step S1007, the special outage flag (special outage correspondence information) is stored (stored) in the special outage flag storage area (special outage correspondence information storage means) in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204, and then this stop result setting is performed. End the process.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1004, the stop corresponding to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is referred to in step S1008 with reference to the normal outage stop result table already described. The address information of the result data is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 in step S1009. Thereafter, the stop result setting process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 20), after executing the process of step S812, the process proceeds to step S813. In step S813, a variable display time setting process for setting the variable display time of the current game time in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS is executed.

  The variable display time setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1101, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer of the RAM 204 is acquired and stored in the register of the MPU 202. In a succeeding step S1102, it is determined whether or not a reach display is generated in the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the explicit 2R probability change flag, the non-explicit 2R probability change flag, the 15R probability change flag, the normal jackpot flag, and the special loss flag is stored in the RAM 204. If any flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1102 as the occurrence of reach display. Even if none of the above flags is stored, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, the occurrence of reach display is generated. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1102.

  If a positive determination is made in step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1103. In step S1103, it is determined whether the game result of the current game round is an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outage result. In the case of either the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or the special outlier result, the common variation display time table (common variation display time information group) stored in the variation display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 in step S1104 Referring to this, the variable display time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired, and in step S1105, the variable display time information is stored in the variable display time counter area (in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204). Set to variable display time measuring means). Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  Here, as described above, in the case of a special loss result under the normal gaming state and in the case of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, the behavior of the variable winning device 32 and the behavior of the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 The behavior of each movable object is common, and only the internal lottery state is different. In this case, in both cases of a special outlier result and an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, a reach display will occur in the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 41, and further, the variation of the game number By referring to the common variation display time table when determining the display time, the variation display time of the pattern in the result display unit and the symbol display device 41 becomes common.

  On the other hand, if the game result of the current game round is neither an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outage result, a negative determination is made in step S1103, and the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1106, by referring to the other variable display time table stored in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203, the variable display time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired, and in step S1107. The variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1108. In step S1108, the common hold number CRN is grasped. In a succeeding step S1109, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode is set. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support flag (high frequency support information) is stored (stored) in the high frequency support flag storage area (high frequency support information storage means) in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. To do. The high-frequency support flag is stored or deleted when the open / close execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process described later.

  If the high frequency support flag is not stored, in step S1110, the current change is referred to by referring to the variable display time table for low frequency support stored in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203. Fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the type counter CS and the number of common pending numbers CRN is acquired, and the fluctuation display time information is set in the fluctuation display time counter area of the RAM 204 in step S1111. Thereafter, the setting process ends. Note that the variable display time is set to be shorter as the number of the common hold number CRN is larger.

  On the other hand, if the high frequency support flag is stored, in step S1112, the variable display time table for high frequency support stored in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 is referred to this time. Fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS and the number of common pending numbers CRN is acquired, and the fluctuation display time information is set in the fluctuation display time counter area of the RAM 204 in step S1113. Thereafter, the setting process ends. Note that the variable display time is set to be shorter as the number of the common hold number CRN is larger.

  As described above, when reach display does not occur, a special outage result is obtained under normal gaming conditions by changing the variable display time table to be referenced depending on whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. When the result is an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, the result display unit in the subsequent game times and the pattern change display time in the symbol display device 41 are common.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 20), after step S813, a variation start command and a type command are set in step S814. The change start command includes information on presence / absence of reach and information on change display time. The type command includes game result information. In other words, the type command includes 15R probability variation jackpot result information, normal jackpot result information, explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result information, non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result information, special outage result information, etc. included.

  The variation start command and type command set in step S814 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). Based on the received change start command and type command, the sound lamp control device 82 determines the contents of the effect in the game time and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. The contents of the effect include a symbol variation display mode (that is, a variation display pattern) on the symbol display device 41. The determined symbol variation display mode is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 82 to the display control device. A display content command is output to 212. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 based on the display content command received from the sound lamp control device 82 so that the symbol change display corresponding to each game time is performed.

  After that, in step S815, the variation display of the pattern is started in the result display unit corresponding to the current game time out of the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS. In this case, when the second result display unit flag is not stored in the RAM 204, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is specified as the first result display unit AS, and the second result display unit flag is set. If stored, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is specified as the second result display unit BS. Then, this variation start process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 18), when the main display unit 43 is in a variable display, the game times progress process of steps S606 to S609 is executed. In the process for advancing game times, first, in step S606, it is determined whether or not the current game time fluctuation display time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204 is “0”. The value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (FIG. 24) as described above. The set value of the variable display time information is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is started.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S607. In the variable display process, display control is performed on the result display unit (light emission control of each display segment) so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order in the result display unit according to the current game round. . As for the first result display section AS, for example, the first display segment A1 → the second display segment A2 →... → the seventh display segment A7 → the eighth display segment A8 → the first display segment A1 → In this order, the display segments A1 to A8 blink. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished.

  If the fluctuation display time has elapsed, a fluctuation end process is executed in step S608. Here, the variation end process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1201, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 is confirmed. In the following step S1202, stop result data corresponding to the address information confirmed in step S1201 is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 203, and the content of the result display is determined from the specified stop result data. Check.

  In a succeeding step S1203, it is determined whether or not the second result display unit flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the second result display section flag is not stored, the contents display section confirms that the result display confirmed in step S1202 is output to the first result display section AS in step S1204. Thereby, in the 1st result display part AS, the change display of a picture is complete | finished in the state by which the result display concerning the said output was stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, when the second result display unit flag is stored, the content display unit confirms the result display confirmed in step S1202 in step S1205, and then ends this variation end process. To do. As a result, in the second result display section BS, the variation display of the pattern is terminated in a state where the result display related to the output is stopped.

  Here, the result display stopped and displayed on the first result display unit AS in step S1204 and the result display stopped and displayed on the second result display unit BS in step S1205 are game time control in the next game time. The process is maintained until the change start process in step S605 is executed. That is, the MPU 202 maintains the content of the result display that is stopped and displayed on the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS when one game round is completed until the next game round is started. As described above, each result display section AS, BS has a function of controlling display.

  The contents of the result display in the stop result data store information on display segments to be lit in the eight display segments A1 to A8 and B1 to B8. In this case, since the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS are both configured using eight display segments A1 to A8 and B1 to B8, the stop result data is first The result display part AS and the second result display part BS do not need to be set individually, and can be set as common.

  In the game times control process (FIG. 18), after executing the change end process, a change end command is set in step S609. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished. The change end command set in step S609 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). The sound lamp control device 82 ends the effect in the game round based on the received variation end command. Further, the change end command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212, and the display control device 212 receives the change end command, thereby confirming and displaying the combination of the final stop symbols in the game round ( Final stop display).

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition process of step S505 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is finished, it is determined in step S1303 whether or not the game result of the current game time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the explicit 2R probability change flag, the non-explicit 2R probability change flag, the 15R probability change flag, the normal jackpot flag, or the special loss flag is stored in the RAM 204. If none of the above flags is stored, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If any of the above flags is stored, an opening / closing execution mode start process is executed in step S1304. In the start process, an opening waiting time (starting waiting period) for waiting without opening the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is set for opening in the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, opening waiting time information stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. In this case, the waiting time information that is set differs depending on whether the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the waiting time information indicates that the waiting time information is lower in the low-frequency winning mode than in the high-frequency winning mode. It is set to be shorter. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the count value of the standby time information is set so that the standby time is 1 sec. In the low frequency winning mode, the count value of the standby time information is set so that the standby time is 0.2 sec. Is set. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is executed.

  In subsequent step S1305, a round display start process for informing the type of the current opening / closing execution mode is executed. In the round display start process, first, address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 is confirmed. Then, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 203, and the content of the number of rounds is confirmed from the specified stop result data. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43. As a result, the round display section RS displays information about the round related to the output. The contents of the number of rounds in the stop result data store information on display segments to be lit in the eight display segments R1 to R8.

  In a succeeding step S1306, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the 15R probability variation flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. If it is not the high-frequency winning mode, that is, if it is the low-frequency winning mode, “2” is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S1307. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the special winning opening 32a is opened. On the other hand, if the high-frequency winning mode is set, “15” is set in the first round counter area RC1 in step S1308.

  After executing the process of step S1307 or step S1308, an opening command is set in step S1309. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). This opening command includes information indicating whether the high-frequency winning mode or the low-frequency winning mode is set. Based on the received opening command, the sound lamp control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. The contents of this effect include the display mode on the symbol display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the sound lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. Based on the display content command received from the sound lamp control device 82, the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that display corresponding to the current open / close execution mode (for example, moving image display) is performed.

  In the subsequent step S1310, after executing the external signal setting process, the gaming state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, it is determined whether or not any of the explicit 2R probability variation flag, the non-explicit 2R probability variation flag, the 15R probability variation flag, or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204, and any one of the flags is stored. In this case, the signal output state of the jackpot signal output terminal 99a is set to the jackpot signal output state. Thereby, when the jackpot signal output terminal 99a is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, a jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the jackpot is generated in the pachinko machine 10 in the management control device. I can understand that.

  Further, in the external signal setting process, it is determined whether any of the explicit 2R probability change flag, the non-explicit 2R probability change flag, the 15R probability change flag, the normal jackpot flag, or the special out flag is stored in the RAM 204. When the flag is stored, the signal output state of the jackpot and special out signal output terminal 99b is set to the jackpot and special out signal output state. Thereby, when the jackpot and special miss signal output terminal 99b is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot and special miss signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 in the management control device. It is possible to grasp that the opening / closing execution mode has occurred.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, and the process proceeds to step S1311. In step S1311, it is determined whether or not the opening standby time has elapsed. If the opening standby time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, a big winning opening / closing process is executed in step S1312. Here, the special winning opening opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 32a is being opened. Specifically, this determination is performed based on the driving state of the variable prize driving unit 32c. If the big winning opening 32a is not open, it is determined in step S1402 whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”, and in step S1403, the value of the first timer area T1 is “0”. Is determined.

  When the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” or when the value of the first timer area T1 is not “0”, the big prize winning opening / closing process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” and the value of the first timer area T1 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1404, and variable prize driving is performed to open the big prize opening 32a. The unit 32c is set in a driving state.

  In subsequent step S1405, setting processing for each round is executed. The setting process for each round will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency winning mode is set. In the case of the high-frequency winning mode, in step S1502, the first timer area T1 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 has “15000” ( That is, 30 sec) is set. The count value set here is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is started, that is, every 2 msec. In the subsequent step S1503, “10” is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in order to count the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening 32a. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  If it is not the high-frequency winning mode, that is, if it is the low-frequency winning mode, “100” (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer area T1 in step S1504, and the winning counter area is subsequently set in step S1505. Set “6” on the PC. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  After executing the setting process for each round in the big winning opening / closing process (FIG. 27), an opening command is set in step S1406, and the big winning opening / closing process ends. The set release command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). This release command includes information indicating whether the high-frequency winning mode or the low-frequency winning mode is set. Based on the received release command, the sound lamp control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the high-frequency winning mode, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed.

  If it is determined in step S1401 that the special winning opening is open, the process advances to step S1407 to determine whether or not the value of the first timer area T1 is “0”. If the value of the first timer area T1 is not “0”, it is determined in step S1408 whether or not a game ball has won the big winning opening 32a based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 32. If no winning has occurred, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if a winning has occurred, the value of the winning counter area PC is decremented by 1 in step S1409, and then it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC is “0” in step S1410. If it is not “0”, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If the value of the first timer area T1 is “0” in step S1407, or if the value of the winning counter area PC is “0” in step S1410, it means that the big prize opening closing condition is satisfied. . In such a case, in step S1411, the variable winning drive unit 32c is set to a non-driven state so as to close the special winning opening 32a.

  In the following step S1412, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is decremented by 1, and in step S1413, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0”, it is determined in step S1414 whether the high-frequency winning mode is set.

  In the case of the high-frequency winning mode, “1000” (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer area T1, and in the case of the low-frequency winning mode, “100” (that is, 0. 0) is set in the first timer area T1. 2 sec) is set. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the time during which the large winning opening 32a is closed between rounds is set shorter than in the high frequency winning mode. Thereafter, a closing command is set in step S1417, and the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The set closing command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). This closing command includes information indicating whether the high-frequency winning mode or the low-frequency winning mode is set. Based on the received closing command, the sound lamp control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the high-frequency winning mode, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed.

  If it is determined in step S1413 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”, an ending start process is executed in step S1418. In the start process, an ending waiting time for waiting without starting the next game round is set for the ending in the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, ending waiting time information stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. In this case, the waiting time information that is set differs depending on whether the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the waiting time information indicates that the waiting time information is lower in the low-frequency winning mode than in the high-frequency winning mode. It is set to be shorter. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the count value of the standby time information is set so that the standby time is 1 sec. In the low frequency winning mode, the count value of the standby time information is set so that the standby time is 0.2 sec. Is set. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is executed.

  Then, after setting an ending command in step S1419, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). This ending command includes information indicating whether the high-frequency winning mode or the low-frequency winning mode is set. Based on the received ending command, the sound lamp control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. The contents of this effect include the display mode on the symbol display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the sound lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. Based on the display content command received from the sound lamp control device 82, the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that display corresponding to the current open / close execution mode (for example, moving image display) is performed.

  Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 26), after performing the big prize opening / closing process in step S1312, it is determined in step S1313 whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. In step S1314, it is determined whether the ending standby time has elapsed. If the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” or if the ending waiting time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” and the waiting time for ending has elapsed, a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S1315. Here, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the 15R probability variation flag or the explicit 2R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 204. If any flag is stored, in step S1602, a flag erasing process for erasing information for specifying the gaming state is executed. Specifically, when the opening / closing execution mode flag, the high probability mode flag, and the high frequency support flag are stored, they are deleted, and when they are not already stored, the states are maintained. In the subsequent step S1603, the high probability mode flag is stored, and in step S1604, the high frequency support flag is stored. As a result, the gaming state shifts to a gaming state where the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode (hereinafter, the gaming state is also referred to as a special advantageous state). Note that these high probability mode and high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big win is won.

  In the subsequent step S1605, a special advantageous start command (special advantageous state start information), which is information for causing the audio lamp control device 82, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the gaming state has shifted to the special advantageous state, It is set as a command to be transmitted to the lamp control device 82. The special advantageous start command is stored in the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203. Thereafter, the migration process ends.

  The special advantageous start command set in step S1605 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). In the sound lamp control device 82, based on the received special advantageous start command, a process for making the display in the first hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 41 correspond to the special advantageous gaming state is executed. This will be described in detail later.

  If it is determined in step S1601 that both the 15R probability variation flag and the explicit 2R probability variation flag are not stored, it is determined in step S1606 whether or not the implicit 2R probability variation flag is stored. If the implicit 2R probability variation flag is stored, it is determined in step S1607 whether or not the high frequency support flag is stored. If the high frequency support flag is not stored, steps S1608 to S1608 are performed. After executing each processing in step S1610, the migration processing is terminated. In this case, in step S1608, the flag erasing process is executed. In step S1609, a high probability mode flag is stored. As a result, the gaming state shifts to a gaming state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. Note that the high probability mode is maintained at least until the next big win is won.

  In step S1610, a special advantageous end command (special advantageous state end information), which is information for causing the audio lamp control device 82, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that the gaming state is not the special advantageous state, It is set as a command to be transmitted to the control device 82. The special advantageous end command is stored in the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203.

  The special advantageous end command set in step S1610 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). In the sound lamp control device 82, based on the received special advantageous end command, processing for making the display in the first hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 41 correspond to a gaming state other than the special advantageous gaming state. Run. This will be described in detail later.

  On the other hand, if the high frequency support flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1607, and after executing the processes in steps S1602 to S1605, the present migration process is terminated. In this case, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode is maintained at least until the next big win is won.

  If it is determined in step S1606 that the implicit 2R probability variation flag is not stored, it is determined in step S1611 whether the normal jackpot flag is stored. If the normal jackpot flag is stored, the flag erasure process is executed in step S1612. Thereafter, in step S1613, the high frequency support flag is stored, and in step S1614, “100” is set in the game number counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. As a result, the gaming state shifts to a gaming state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode is ended when the number of game times continues 100 times, and thereafter, a transition is made to a normal game state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode.

  In the subsequent step S1615, a special advantageous end command (special advantageous state end information), which is information for causing the audio lamp control device 82 as the sub-side control device to recognize that the gaming state is not the special advantageous state, It is set as a command to be transmitted to the device 82. The special advantageous end command is stored in the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203. Thereafter, the migration process ends.

  The special advantageous end command set in step S1615 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). In the sound lamp control device 82, based on the received special advantageous end command, processing for making the display in the first hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 41 correspond to a gaming state other than the special advantageous gaming state. Run. This will be described in detail later.

  If it is determined in step S1611 that the normal jackpot flag is not stored, the migration process is terminated. In other words, when the result is a special losing result and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the gaming state of the game times resulting in the special losing result is maintained after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 26), after the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in step S1315 is terminated, a round display termination process is performed in step S1316. In this process, the display control of the round display unit RS is terminated so that the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43 is turned off. That is, the round display in the round display unit RS is started when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and is ended when the opening / closing execution mode is ended. In this case, when the opening / closing execution mode is the low frequency winning mode, the number of times of opening / closing the large winning opening 32a is smaller and the opening time and closing time of the large winning opening 32a are set shorter than in the high frequency winning mode. . Therefore, the period during which the content of the number of rounds is displayed on the round display portion RS is shorter than that in the high-frequency winning mode. Furthermore, the result display that is stopped and displayed on the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS is started when the game round ends, and is continued until the next game round is started. Therefore, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, the result display starts before the content of the number of rounds is displayed on the round display unit RS and after the display of the content of the number of rounds is finished. Will continue. That is, the result display is maintained for a longer period than the display of the content of the number of rounds.

  Thereafter, in step S1317, after executing the opening / closing execution mode termination processing, the gaming state transition processing is terminated. In the open / close execution mode end processing, if the explicit 2R probability change flag, the unspecified 2R probability change flag, the 15R probability change flag, the normal jackpot flag, and the special out flag are stored, they are erased and are not already stored. If so, keep that state.

<Telephone support processing>
Next, the electric role support process in step S506 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS.

  First, in step S1701, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a supporting flag is stored in a supporting flag storage area provided in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. The in-support flag is a flag that is stored when the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is in an open state, and is erased when the state is returned to a closed state.

  If the in-support flag is not stored, the process advances to step S1702 to determine whether or not the support winning flag is stored in the support winning flag storage area provided in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. The support winning flag is a flag that is stored when the open state is won in the lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, and is deleted when the supporting flag is stored.

  If the support winning flag is not stored, the process advances to step S1703 to determine whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 is “0”. If the value of the second timer area T2 is not “0”, the main role support process is terminated.

  If the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”, it is determined in step S1704 whether it is the end timing of the variable display of the pattern on the accessory display unit 44 or not. If it is the end timing of the variable display, in step S1705, after setting the out-of-line display, the main role support process is ended. By setting the out-of-display, the variable display of the pattern on the accessory display unit 44 is terminated in a state where the out-of-display is stopped.

  If the value of the second timer area T2 is “0” and it is not the end timing of the variable display, it is determined in step S1706 whether or not the value of the accessory reserved storage number SN is greater than “0”. When the value of the stored item reservation memory number SN is “0”, the main character support process is terminated as it is. If the value of the stored item storage number SN is larger than “0”, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in step S1707, and whether or not the high frequency support mode is determined in step S1708. .

  If it is not the opening / closing execution mode and the high-frequency support mode, the open lottery is performed in step S1709. Specifically, when the value stored in the accessory holding ball storage area is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the winning lottery is selected. Become. At the same time as the open lottery, “750” (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer area T2. The second accessory timer area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is activated.

  In subsequent step S1710, it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery in step S1709 is a support winning. If it is not a support win, the process proceeds to step S1712 without executing the process of step S1711. If it is a support win, a support win flag is stored in step S1711 and provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. After setting “3” in the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S1712.

  In step S1712, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1712, the main role support process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1712, it is determined in step S1713 whether or not the game number counter area is “0”. The game number counter is decremented by 1 every time one game time is completed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If the game number counter area is not “0”, the main role support process is terminated. If the game number counter area is “0”, the high frequency support flag is erased in step S1714, and then the main role support process is terminated.

  If it is in the opening / closing execution mode or not in the high frequency support mode, an open lottery is performed in step S1715. Specifically, when the value stored in the accessory holding ball storage area is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the winning lottery is selected. Become. Simultaneously with the open lottery, “14750” (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer area T2.

  In the subsequent step S1716, it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery in step S1715 is a support winning. If the support is not won, the main role support process is terminated. In the case of support winning, the support winning flag is stored in step S1717, and “1” is set in the second round counter area RC2, and then the main role supporting process is terminated.

  When the support winning flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, and the process proceeds to step S1718 to determine whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”. When the value of the second timer area T2 is not “0”, since the variation display of the picture on the accessory display unit 44 is being performed, the main character support process is terminated as it is. If the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”, a win display is set in step S1719. As a result, the display of the variation of the pattern in the accessory display unit 44 is terminated in a state where the winning display is stopped. In the subsequent step S1720, the supporting flag is stored, and after the support winning flag is deleted, the main role support processing is terminated.

  If the in-support flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1721, and after executing the electric combination opening / closing process for opening / closing the electric combination 34a, the electric combination support process is terminated. The electric role opening / closing control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in a driving state. If the electric accessory 34a is opened, the process proceeds to step S1802, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”.

  When the value of the second timer area T2 is not “0”, the main utility opening / closing process is terminated as it is. If the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1803 to perform a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the closed state, and the second timer area T2 is set to “250” (that is, 0.5 sec). ) Is set.

  Thereafter, in step S1804, after the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, it is determined in step S1805 whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. When the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0”, the main utility opening / closing process is terminated, and when the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”, the supporting flag is deleted. After that, the main role opening / closing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the electric accessory 34a is being opened, an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, and the flow proceeds to step S1807. In step S1807, it is determined whether or not the second timer area T2 is “0”. When the second timer area T2 is not “0”, the main utility opening / closing process is terminated as it is. If the second timer area T2 is “0”, an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the opened state is executed in step S1808.

  Thereafter, it is determined in step S1809 whether or not it is in the opening / closing execution mode, and in step S1810, it is determined whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. If it is not the opening / closing execution mode and the high-frequency support mode is set, “800” (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer area T2 in step S1811, and then the electric utility opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is in the opening / closing execution mode or not in the high frequency support mode, after setting “100” (that is, 0.2 sec) in the second timer area T2 in step S1812, the main utility opening / closing process is terminated. .

<Electric Configuration of Audio Lamp Control Device 82 and Display Control Device 212>
Next, the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212 will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 242 is mounted on an audio lamp control board 241 provided in the audio lamp control device 82. The MPU 242 is a ROM 243 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 242 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 243. The RAM 244 is an element incorporating an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 242, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242. From the main control device 81, the hold display control commands (hold display control information) such as the operation winning command, the shift command, the special advantageous start command, and the special advantageous end command which have already been described are received. In addition, a game time control command (game time control information) such as a change start command, a type command, and a change end command is received. Also, an open / close execution mode command (open / close execution mode information) such as an opening command and an ending command is received.

  As described above, the holding lamp portions 45 to 47 provided in the variable display unit 36 and the display lamp portion 63 and the speaker portion 64 provided in the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 242. In addition, a display control device 212 is connected.

  The ROM 243 includes a hold notification table storage area 245 that is referred to when determining whether the information included in the operation winning command received from the main control device 81 is information corresponding to the hold notification, and display control. A command information storage area 246 that stores various commands to be output to the device 212, and an effect content table storage area 247 that is referred to when determining the content of effects in each game time are set. Further, the RAM 244 has a command storage area 248 for temporarily storing commands received from the main control device 81, a hold counter area 249 used for performing light emission control of each of the hold lamp units 45 to 47, and An other flag storage area 250 used for executing various control processes is set. The command storage area 248 is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can read from the previously stored commands.

  The display control device 212 includes a display control board 251 on which an MPU 252 that is an element in which a program ROM 253 and a work RAM 254 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 256, and a video RAM 257 are mounted. It has. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 253 and the work RAM 254 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 252, but each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 252 receives a hold display control command (hold display control information) for performing hold display control, and a game time control command (game time control information) for performing variable display of symbols from the audio lamp control device 82. Then, an open / close execution mode command (open / close execution mode information) for displaying a moving image during the open / close execution mode is received. Then, the received commands are analyzed or predetermined arithmetic processing is performed based on the received commands to control the VDP 255 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 255).

  The program ROM 253 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 252 and fixed value data, and JPEG format image data for a background image is also stored and held. In the program ROM 253, the notification generation lottery table storage area 261 referred to in the lottery whether or not to execute the predetermined notification in the hold display, and the notification content as the specific notification content when the predetermined notification is executed. An individual notification lottery table storage area 262 that is referred to when lottery is selected is set.

  The work RAM 254 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 252. In the work RAM 254, a command storage area 263 for temporarily storing commands received from the voice lamp control device 82, and a count for holding the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 in the MPU 252 are counted. Images to be displayed in the hold counter area 264 and the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 and Gb1 to Gb4 of the first hold display area Ga and the second hold display area Gb (see FIG. 8B) of the symbol display device 41. For holding display information setting area 265 for storing information for instructing VDP 255 and for generating a lottery for generating lottery acquisition information for lottery whether or not to execute the predetermined notification. Acquisition for lottery in the lottery of the counter area 266 and whether or not the notification content is the specific notification content when the predetermined notification is executed. Individual notification lottery counter area 267 for generating a multi-address, and other flag storage area 268, which is used to execute various control processes are set. The command storage area 263 is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can read from the previously stored commands.

  The VDP 255 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 255 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 255 should be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 255 adjusts the timings of the MPU 252, the video RAM 257, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and also reads out the image data to be stored in the video RAM 257 from the character ROM 256 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

  The character ROM 256 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 256 holds bit map format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bit map image, and the like. The character ROM 256 has a holding image data storage area 269 that stores image data to be displayed in the first holding display area Ga and the second holding display area Gb of the symbol display device 41 as a part of the data. Has been.

  It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 256 and store the image data and the like in a shared manner with each character ROM 256. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the JPEG image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 253 is stored in the character ROM 256.

  The video RAM 257 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 257. In the video RAM 257, a first hold display area 271 corresponding to the first hold display area Ga and a second hold display area 281 corresponding to the second hold display area Gb are set.

  The first hold display area 271 includes a first unit area 272 and a second unit area 273 so as to correspond to the first to fourth unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 in the first hold display area Ga on a one-to-one basis. A third unit area 274 and a fourth unit area 275 are set. In each unit hold display area Ga1 to Ga4 of the first hold display area Ga, an image corresponding to the data written in each unit area 272 to 275 is displayed. In the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 corresponding to the unit areas 272 to 275 in which no data is set, no image is displayed or a background image on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 is displayed.

  The second hold display area 281 includes a first unit area 282 and a second unit area 283 so as to correspond to the first to fourth unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4 in the second hold display area Gb on a one-to-one basis. A third unit area 284 and a fourth unit area 285 are set. In each unit hold display area Gb1 to Gb4 of the first hold display area Gb, an image corresponding to the data written in each unit area 282 to 285 is displayed. In the unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4 corresponding to the unit areas 282 to 285 in which no data is set, no image is displayed or a background image on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 is displayed.

<Command Corresponding Process Executed by Audio Lamp Control Device 82>
Next, command response processing executed by the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Here, the command received from the main control device 81 is stored in the command storage area 248 of the RAM 244 by the command storage process activated when the command is received. The command handling process is a process for executing various controls corresponding to commands stored in the command storage area 248, which are periodically activated (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) in the MPU 242.

  In the command response processing, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the command storage area 248 and the command to be read this time is an operation winning command. In step S1902, after executing the first corresponding process for executing the process corresponding to the stored operation winning command, this command corresponding process is terminated.

  Here, the first handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the first response process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the operation winning command received this time includes information corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 33. That is, it is determined whether or not the operation winning command received this time is a command transmitted from the main control device 81 in response to the winning of a game ball in the upper operation port 33. In the case of a command transmitted in response to a winning of a game ball in the upper working port 33, the first hold increase time process in steps S2002 to S2013 is executed. On the other hand, in the case of a command transmitted in response to a winning of a game ball to the lower operation port 34, the second hold increase time process in steps S2014 to S2015 is executed.

  In the first hold increase processing, first, in step S2002, the voice side first hold storage number IaN1 stored in the hold counter area 249 of the RAM 244 is incremented by one. The voice side first hold memory number IaN1 corresponds to the first hold lamp unit 45, and the first hold lamp unit 45 is controlled to be turned on according to the voice side first hold memory number IaN1. The first hold lamp unit 45 is sequentially turned on from the left side. For example, if the first hold storage number IaN1 on the voice side is 1, the first hold lamp unit 45 on the left end is turned on and the first on the voice side If the reserved storage number IaN1 is 4, the first hold lamp unit 45 up to the right end is turned on.

  In subsequent step S2003, based on the information included in the operation winning command received this time, whether or not the hold information in main controller 81 related to the operation winning command corresponds to the jackpot result to be notified and A specific process for holding notification for specifying the type of the jackpot result to be notified is executed. That is, first, the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the information on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 included in the operation winning command are grasped. Thereafter, referring to the hold notification table storage area 245 of the ROM 243, whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that have been grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot result to be notified. And, if corresponding, the type of the jackpot result of the notification target is specified. Then, the identification result is temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 242.

  In this regard, the MPU 242 specifies whether or not the grasp processing execution function for grasping the hold notification specifying information and the grasped hold notification specifying information coincide with the information corresponding to the jackpot result to be notified. A jackpot result correspondence specifying function, a type specifying function for specifying the type of the jackpot result of the notification target when specifying that it corresponds to the jackpot result of the notification target, and the type of the jackpot result of the notification target And a type storage function for storing.

  An outline of the specific processing content of step S2003 will be described. As described above, the hold notification table storage area 245 of the ROM 243 is referred to when the jackpot result correspondence specification and the type specification are performed. Here, the hold notification table storage area 245 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The hold notification table storage area 245 includes a first table shown in FIG. 35A and a second table shown in FIG. In the first table, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is associated with the first specific result. When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value that is a jackpot winning in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode in the winning / not-winning lottery in the main controller 81, the first specific result is the common jackpot result. If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value that is a jackpot winning only in the high probability mode in the winning lottery in the main control device 81, the first specific result is a jackpot result dedicated to the probability change ( In other words, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value other than the above, the first specific result is set to be a non-notification result. ing.

  In the second table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the second identification result. When the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is a value that normally results in a jackpot result in the sorting table for the first result display unit in the main control device 81 (the sorting table corresponding to the upper operation port 33), The second specific result is set to be a normal jackpot result, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is set to a distribution table for the first result display section in the main controller 81 (the distribution corresponding to the upper operation port 33). Table), the second specific result is set to be the 15R probability variation jackpot result, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is a value other than the above. The second specific result is set to be a result not to be notified.

  That is, as the notification target jackpot result, the normal jackpot result and the 15R probability variation jackpot result are set, and the types of the notification target jackpot result are the normal jackpot result, the common jackpot result in the case of the normal jackpot result, A jackpot result dedicated to the probability change in the case of a normal jackpot result, a common jackpot result in the case of the 15R probability variation jackpot result, a jackpot result dedicated to the probability change in the case of the 15R probability variation jackpot result can be set. However, in the pachinko machine 10, among the above, four types of notifications are provided: a normal jackpot result, a 15R probability variation jackpot result, a common jackpot result in the case of 15R probability variation jackpot result, and a dedicated jackpot result in the case of 15R probability variation jackpot result. Set as a jackpot result for the subject.

  In step S2003, with reference to the first table, it is identified which of the first identification results the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 among the information included in the operation winning command received this time corresponds. At the same time, referring to the second table, it is determined which second identification result corresponds to the value information of the jackpot type counter C2 among the information included in the operation winning command received this time. . Then, the first specified result information and the second specified result information that are specified are stored in the register of the MPU 242. Note that if the specified information can be referred to in the subsequent processing, whether or not the information is stored in the register of the MPU 242 is arbitrary. For example, the information may be stored in the RAM 244.

  Here, the specific process for holding notification will be described in more detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the hold notification specific process, first, in step S2101, information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the current operation winning command is grasped. In subsequent step S2102, information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time with reference to the first table of the hold notification table stored in the hold notification table storage area 245 of the ROM 243 is the notification target jackpot. It is specified whether or not it corresponds to either the common jackpot result set as a result or the jackpot result dedicated to the probability change.

  In subsequent step S2103, it is determined whether or not the result of referring to the first table in step S2102 is a common jackpot result. If it is a common jackpot result, the common jackpot information is temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 242 in step S2104. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2107.

  If it is not the common jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S2105, and it is determined whether or not the result of referring to the first table in step S2102 is a jackpot result dedicated to probability change. If it is not a jackpot result dedicated to the probability change, this specific process is terminated as it is. In the case of the jackpot result dedicated to the probability change, in step S2106, the jackpot information dedicated to the probability change is temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 242. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2107.

  In step S2107, information on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 included in the current operation winning command is grasped. In subsequent step S2108, referring to the second table of the hold notification table stored in the hold notification table storage area 245 of the ROM 243, the information of the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time is the notification target jackpot. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to either a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variation jackpot result set as a result.

  In subsequent step S2109, it is determined whether or not the result of referring to the second table in step S2108 is a normal jackpot result. If it is a normal jackpot result, the normal jackpot information is temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 242 in step S2110. Then, this specific process is complete | finished.

  If it is not the normal jackpot result, the process advances to step S2111 to determine whether or not the result of referring to the second table in step S2108 is a 15R probability variation jackpot result. If it is not the 15R probability variation jackpot result, the present specific process is terminated as it is. If the result is a 15R probability variation jackpot result, the 15R probability variation jackpot information is temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 242 in step S2112. Then, this specific process is complete | finished.

  Returning to the description of the first response process (FIG. 34), after executing the hold notification specific process in step S2003, the processes in and after step S2004 are executed. In this case, in step S2004, based on the information on the first specific result and the information on the second specific result stored in the register of the MPU 242, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot result to be notified. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either common jackpot information or probability change dedicated jackpot information is stored, and if any information is stored, the normal jackpot information or 15R probability variable jackpot information is determined. It is determined whether any one is stored.

  In the case of the jackpot result of the notification target, in step S2005, the information on the number of hold corresponding to the command received this time is specified by the value of the voice side first hold storage number IaN1 updated in the immediately preceding step S2002, The specified number of reserved information is set in an erasing counter area provided in the RAM 244. In a succeeding step S2006, it is determined whether or not the big hit hold flag (big hit hold information) is stored in the big hit hold flag storage area (big hit hold information storage means) in the other flag storage area 250 of the RAM 244. If the jackpot hold flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S2013 described later. If the jackpot hold flag is not stored, the jackpot hold flag is stored in step S2007.

  Here, the jackpot holding flag means that when the holding information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in the holding information related to winning in the upper operating port 33 stored and held in the main control device 81, Is the information for specifying in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82. The erasure counter area is a measuring means for specifying the timing for erasing the jackpot hold flag when the jackpot hold flag is stored. As will be described later, the information on the number of holds set in the erasure counter area is updated to be decremented every time an upper hold decrement command is transmitted, and is stored in the erasure counter area after the update. When the stored information is the initial value “0”, the big hit hold flag erasing process is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S2008, it is determined based on the second specific result information stored in the register of the MPU 242 whether the result is a 15R probability variation jackpot result. Specifically, it is determined whether 15R probability variation jackpot information is stored. In step S2009, it is determined based on the information on the first specific result stored in the register of the MPU 242 whether or not it is a jackpot result dedicated to probability change. Specifically, it is determined whether either normal jackpot information or 15R probability variable jackpot information is stored, and if any information is stored, is the jackpot information dedicated to probability change stored? Determine whether or not.

  As a result, if the result is a 15R probability variation jackpot result and a probability variation dedicated jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2009, and the flow proceeds to step S2010. In step S2010, the first hold increase command is selected from various commands stored in the command information storage area 246 of the ROM 243, and the first hold increase command is transmitted to the display control device 212. Thereafter, the first corresponding process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is a 15R probability variation jackpot result and not a probability variation dedicated jackpot result, a negative determination is made in step S2009, and the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, the second hold increase command is selected from various commands stored in the command information storage area 246 of the ROM 243, and the second hold increase command is transmitted to the display control device 212. Thereafter, the first corresponding process is terminated.

  If the result is a normal jackpot result, a negative determination is made in step S2008, and the process proceeds to step S2012. In step S2012, the third hold increase command is selected from various commands stored in the command information storage area 246 of the ROM 243, and the third hold increase command is transmitted to the display control device 212. Thereafter, the first corresponding process is terminated.

  If the result is not a notification target, a negative determination is made in step S2004, and the process proceeds to step S2013. When the big hit hold flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S2006, and the process proceeds to step S2013. In step S2013, the fourth hold increase command is selected from various commands stored in the command information storage area 246 of the ROM 243, and the fourth hold increase command is transmitted to the display control device 212. Thereafter, the first corresponding process is terminated.

Here, if the jackpot hold flag is stored, even if it is a notification target jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2006, and a command transmitted when it is determined that the notification target jackpot result is not determined A fourth hold increase command similar to the above is transmitted. As a result, in the situation in which the hold information corresponding to the big win is included in the hold information related to the winning to the upper operating port 33 that is already stored and stored in the main control device 81, the new operation to the upper operating port 33 is performed. Even if the hold information acquired based on the winning prize corresponds to the jackpot winning, various settings for performing the hold notification are not performed.
In the second hold increase processing, first, in step S2014, the voice side second hold storage number IbN1 stored in the hold counter area 249 of the RAM 244 is incremented by one. The voice side second reserved memory number IbN1 corresponds to the second reserved lamp unit 46, and the second reserved lamp unit 46 is controlled to be lighted according to the voice side second reserved memory number IbN1. The second hold lamp unit 46 is sequentially turned on from the left side. For example, if the second hold number IbN1 on the voice side is 1, the second hold lamp unit 46 on the left end is turned on and the second on the voice side If the reserved storage number IbN1 is 4, the second hold lamp unit 46 up to the right end is turned on.

  In subsequent step S2015, the lower hold increase command is selected from various commands stored in the command information storage area 246 of the ROM 243, and the lower hold increase command is transmitted to the display control device 212. Thereafter, the first corresponding process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the command handling process (FIG. 33), if the command stored in the command storage area 248 and the command to be read this time is not an operation winning command, a negative determination is made in step S1901, and step The process proceeds to S1903. In step S1903, it is determined whether or not the command to be read this time is a shift command. If the command is a shift command, a process corresponding to the stored shift command is executed in step S1904. After executing the second response process for executing the command, the command response process is terminated.

  Here, the second handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the second handling process, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the shift command received this time includes information indicating that the upper working port 33 is supported. That is, it is determined whether or not the shift command received this time is a command transmitted in response to a data shift with respect to the first result display section holding area Ra corresponding to the upper operation port 33 in the main control device 81. . In the case of a command transmitted in response to a data shift with respect to the first result display section reservation area Ra corresponding to the upper operation port 33, the first reservation decrease processing in steps S2202 to S2204 is executed. On the other hand, in the case of a command transmitted in response to a data shift with respect to the second result display section reservation area Rb corresponding to the lower operation port 34, the second hold reduction processing in steps S2205 to S2206 is executed. .

  In the first hold decrease process, first, in step S2202, the voice side first hold storage number IaN1 stored in the hold counter area 249 of the RAM 244 is decremented by 1. In this case, the first hold lamp unit 45 is controlled to be turned off according to the voice side first hold storage number IaN1. In this turn-off control, contrary to the turn-on control, the first holding lamp unit 45 is turned off in order from the right side.

  In the subsequent step S2203, the upper hold decrease command is selected from various commands stored in the command information storage area 246 of the ROM 243, and the upper hold decrease command is transmitted to the display control device 212.

  In a succeeding step S2204, a flag erasing process is executed. In the flag erasing process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot holding flag is stored in the RAM 244. If the jackpot holding flag is stored, the information stored in the erasing counter area provided in the RAM 244 is stored. To be decremented by 1. As a result of the update, when the value of the erasure counter area is “0”, the jackpot holding flag is erased. After executing the process of step S2204, the second corresponding process is terminated.

  In the second hold reduction process, first, in step S2205, the voice-side second hold storage number IbN1 held in the hold counter area 249 of the RAM 244 is decremented by 1. In this case, the second hold lamp unit 46 is controlled to be extinguished according to the voice-side second hold storage number IbN1. In this turn-off control, contrary to the turn-on control, the second holding lamp unit 46 is turned off sequentially from the right side.

  In the subsequent step S 2206, a lower hold decrease command is selected from various commands stored in the command information storage area 246 of the ROM 243, and the lower hold decrease command is transmitted to the display control device 212. Thereafter, the second correspondence process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the command handling process (FIG. 33), if the command stored in the command storage area 248 and the command to be read this time is not a shift command, a negative determination is made in step S1903, The process proceeds to S1905. In step S1905, it is determined whether the command to be read this time is either a special advantageous start command or a special advantageous end command. If it is a special advantageous start command or a special end command, in step S1906, After executing the third response process for executing the process corresponding to the stored command, the command response process is terminated.

  In the third response process, when the special advantageous start command is received, the MPU 242 specifies that the gaming state is the special advantageous gaming state, and when the special advantageous end command is received, the gaming state Is determined not to be in the special advantageous gaming state in the MPU 242. When a special advantageous start command is received, a command maintaining the information form as it is, that is, a special advantageous start command is transmitted to the display control device 212. If a special advantageous end command has been received, a command maintaining the information form as it is, that is, a special advantageous end command is transmitted to the display control device 212.

  Returning to the description of the command handling process (FIG. 33), if the command stored in the command storage area 248 and the command to be read this time is not a special advantageous command, a negative determination is made in step S1905, The process proceeds to step S1907. In step S1907, it is determined whether there is another command to be read this time. If there is no command to be read, this command handling process is terminated. If there is a command to be read, in step S1908, after executing a fourth corresponding process for executing a process corresponding to the stored command, the command corresponding process is terminated.

  Here, the fourth response process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the fourth response process, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not a change start command and a type command are received from the main control device 81. If a change start command and a type command have been received, whether or not information indicating that either an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outage result occurs is included in the received type command in step S2302. Determine whether. When either the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or the special outlier result occurs, in step S2303, the change start command is referred to with reference to the common effect content table stored in the effect content table storage area 247 of the ROM 243. The content of the effect corresponding to the information of the variable display time included in the is determined, and the content of the effect is set in step S2304. Thereafter, the fourth corresponding process ends.

  In this case, the production contents include the light emission mode of the display lamp unit 63 and the output mode of the speaker unit 64, and the symbol variation mode in the symbol display device 41. The symbol variation mode includes symbol variation display time, presence / absence of reach display, reach display start timing, type of reach effect, final stop symbol combination information, and the like. Each game time effect is executed in accordance with the effect content set in step S2304. Among these, the pattern variation mode in the symbol display device 41 is transmitted to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 based on the display content command received from the sound lamp control device 82 so that the symbol change display corresponding to each game time is performed.

  Here, in the case where the result is a special loss result as described above and the case where the result is an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, by referring to the common effect content table, the change in the symbol on the symbol display device 41 when both game results are obtained. It is possible to share the display mode. Specifically, it is possible to share the symbol variation display time on the symbol display device 41, the reach effect, the combination of symbols that are finally stopped and displayed, and the like. By the way, in this pachinko machine 10, in the case of a special outlier result and in the case of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, a combination of symbols with the same number is not stopped and displayed with a different number. The displayed symbol combination is stopped and displayed. In this case, the combination of symbols is a combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed even when the result is a normal off result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a combination of symbols for common display that is not stopped and displayed in the case of a result that is not normal.

  As described above, by sharing the symbol variation display mode, the behavior of the variable winning device 32 and the lower operation port 34 are obtained in the case of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result in a normal gaming state or a special outage result. In addition to the common behavior of each movable object such as the behavior of the electric accessory 34a, the behavior in the display for production is also common. As a result, when the opening / closing execution mode that is the low-frequency winning mode occurs under the normal gaming state, it is possible to make the player imagine whether or not the success / failure lottery mode has shifted to the high probability mode thereafter. Become.

  As already described, when the 15R probability variation jackpot result is reached, the combination of symbols with the same odd number is stopped and displayed, and when the normal jackpot result is obtained, the same even number is assigned. The displayed symbol combination is stopped and displayed. However, in the former, after the combination of symbols with the same even number is once stopped and displayed, the combination of symbols with the same odd number is given in the game round or in the subsequent opening / closing execution mode. It is good also as a structure which can produce the effect which switches the content of a stop display. Furthermore, in the case of an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, a combination of symbols with different numbers is stopped and displayed in a different manner from the case of a special outlier result and the case of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result. .

  On the other hand, if the game result of the current game round is neither an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outage result, a negative determination is made in step S2302, and the process proceeds to step S2305. In step S2305, referring to the other effect content table stored in the effect content table storage area 247 of the ROM 243, the effect content corresponding to the information on the change display time included in the change start command is determined. In step S2306, the contents of the effect are set. Thereafter, the fourth corresponding process ends.

  The other effect content tables may be different for each game result, or some or all of them may be common. Moreover, you may change the production content table to refer by whether the support mode of the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower operating port 34 is a high frequency support mode. In this case, in the normal gaming state, when the result is an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outage result, the symbol variable display mode on the symbol display device 41 in the subsequent game times is made common. Is possible. Further, the effect content table to be referred to may be changed depending on whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. In this case, for example, by changing the contents of the reach display that is easy to select between the low probability mode and the high probability mode, an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outage result is obtained under the normal gaming state. In this case, it becomes possible to slightly change the display variation pattern of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 in the subsequent game rounds, and whether or not the high probability mode is determined from the contents of the reach display generated in the symbol display device 41. Can be predicted by the player. However, even in this case, the variable display time may be the same in the case of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result and in the case of a special outlier result.

  If no change start command and type command have been received, it is determined in step S2307 whether an opening command has been received. If the opening command has been received, after setting the opening effect in step S2308, the fourth corresponding process ends. When setting the opening effect, the effect contents set for the high-frequency winning mode are different from those for the low-frequency winning mode.

  Specifically, in the case of the high-frequency winning mode, the opening contents in the opening / closing execution mode are set. In this case, an opening video is set as the display content of the symbol display device 41. Further, in the case of the low frequency winning mode, the effect contents for the opening / closing execution mode in the low frequency winning mode are set. In this case, as a display content of the symbol display device 41, a series of moving images are set from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. It should be noted that the setting of the moving image only needs to be at least common in the case of the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the case of the special outlier result. In the case of the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, different movie settings are performed. Also good.

  If the opening command has not been received, it is determined in step S2309 whether an ending command has been received. If the ending command has been received, after setting the ending effect in step S2310, the fourth corresponding process ends. The setting of the ending effect is performed only in the high-frequency winning mode. In this case, an ending video is set as the display content of the symbol display device 41.

  If the ending command has not been received, after performing other setting processes in step S2311, the fourth corresponding process is terminated. In the other setting process, for example, on the condition that the high-frequency winning mode is set, the effect content corresponding to the opening command and the effect content corresponding to the closing command are set. When the change end command is received, the command is transmitted to the display control device 212 so that the stop result that has already been stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displayed.

<On Hold Notification Control Process Executed by Display Control Device 212>
Next, the hold notification control process executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The hold notification control process is a part of a plurality of types of processes repeatedly executed in the MPU 252 and is started approximately at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle). In the hold notification control process, a process corresponding to the hold display control command among the commands stored in the command storage area 263 is executed. Note that the command received from the voice lamp control device 82 is stored in the command storage area 263 of the work RAM 254 by a command storage process activated when the command is received.

  In the hold notification control process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the command storage area 263 and the command to be read this time is a hold increase command, and is a hold increase command. In step S2402 to step S2410, the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 and Gb1 to Gb4 of the first hold display area Ga and the second hold display area Gb (see FIG. 8B) of the symbol display device 41 are set. A setting process for holding increase is executed to set information for instructing the VDP 255 to display an image to be displayed.

  In the hold increase setting process, the hold display information is set for the hold display information setting area 265 of the work RAM 254. Here, the hold display information setting area 265 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 40, the hold display information setting area 265 includes a first hold display information setting area 291 corresponding to the first hold display area Ga and a second hold display information corresponding to the second hold display area Gb. A setting area 294.

  The hold display information set in the first hold display information setting area 291 is stored in the VDP 255 in an internal command (internal instruction information) output process that is a part of a plurality of processes repeatedly executed in the MPU 252. In the VDP 255, the image data corresponding to the internal command is selected from the hold image data storage area 269 of the character ROM 256 and set in the first hold display area 271 of the video RAM 257. Thereby, the hold image is displayed in each of the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 of the first hold display area Ga. The internal command output process will be described later in detail.

  In the first hold display information setting area 291, two combinations of the first unit setting area to the fourth unit setting area are provided. That is, the first hold display information setting area 291 includes a hold notification permission area 292 and a hold notification disabling area 293, each of which includes a set of first unit setting area to fourth unit setting. Areas 292a to 292d and 293a to 293d are provided.

  Here, as the state of the hold display in the first hold display area Ga corresponding to the upper operation port 33, in the pachinko machine 10, the hold information stored in the main control device 81 is information corresponding to the jackpot result to be notified. Is set to a hold notification permission state in which it can be notified and a hold notification disabled state in which the notification is disabled.

  In the hold notification permission area 292, hold display information for specifying image data to be set in the first hold display area 271 of the video RAM 257 in the hold notification permission state is set. In the hold notification permission state, the hold display information set in the hold notification permission area 292 in the internal command output process described later is output to the VDP 255. The image data corresponding to the hold display information set in the first unit setting area 292a is set in the first unit area 272, and the image data corresponding to the hold display information set in the second unit setting area 292b is the first. The image data corresponding to the hold display information set in the second unit area 273 and set in the third unit setting area 292c is set in the third unit area 274 and the hold display information set in the fourth unit setting area 292d. Corresponding image data is set in the fourth unit area 275.

  In the hold notification impossible area 293, hold display information for specifying the image data set in the first hold display area 271 of the video RAM 257 in the hold notification disabled state is set. In the hold notification disabled state, the hold display information set in the hold notification disabled area 293 in the internal command output process described later is output to the VDP 255. The image data corresponding to the hold display information set in the first unit setting area 293a is set in the first unit area 272, and the image data corresponding to the hold display information set in the second unit setting area 293b is the first. The image data corresponding to the hold display information set in the second unit area 273 and set in the third unit setting area 293c is set in the third unit area 274 and the hold display information set in the fourth unit setting area 293d. Corresponding image data is set in the fourth unit area 275.

  In addition, the hold display information set in the second hold display information setting area 294 is output to the VDP 255 in an internal command output process to be described later, and the VDP 255 stores image data corresponding to the internal command in the character ROM 256. The selection is made from the image data storage area 269 and set for the second hold display area 281 of the video RAM 257. Thereby, the hold image is displayed in each of the unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4 of the second hold display area Gb.

  In the second hold display information setting area 294, a set of first unit settings so as to correspond one-to-one to the first unit area 282 to the fourth unit area 285 in the second hold display area 281 of the video RAM 257. An area 294a to a fourth unit setting area 294d are provided. In this case, image data corresponding to the hold display information set in the first unit setting area 294a is set in the first unit area 282, and image data corresponding to the hold display information set in the second unit setting area 294b is set. The image data corresponding to the hold display information set in the second unit area 283 and set in the third unit setting area 294c is set in the third unit area 284 and the hold display information set in the fourth unit setting area 294d. Is set in the fourth unit area 285.

  In the hold increase setting process, first, in step S2402, it is determined whether or not the hold increase command received this time includes information corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 33. Specifically, it is determined whether the hold increase command received this time is one of a first hold increase command, a second hold increase command, a third hold increase command, or a fourth hold increase command. If it is one of the first to fourth pending increase commands, an affirmative determination is made in step S2402, and the flow proceeds to step S2403.

  In step S2403, the display-side first reserved storage number IaN2 stored in the reserved counter area 264 of the work RAM 254 is incremented by one. The display-side first hold storage number IaN2 corresponds to the first hold display information setting area 291 of the hold display information setting area 265, and when the hold display information is set for reception of the hold increase command. Is set to the unit setting areas 292a to 292d and 293a to 293d corresponding to the display-side first hold storage number IaN2 in the first hold display information setting area 291.

  In a succeeding step S2404, a notification display suspending display information setting process is executed. Specifically, among the first unit setting area 293a to the fourth unit setting area 293d in the hold notification disabling area 293 of the first hold display information setting area 291, the display side first that is incremented by 1 in step S2403. The normal hold display information is set in the unit setting areas 293a to 293d corresponding to the hold storage number IaN2. For example, if the display-side first reserved memory number IaN2 is 1, the normal hold display information is set for the first unit setting area 293a. If the display-side first reserved memory number IaN2 is 4, the fourth The normal hold display information is set for the unit setting area 293d. In the internal command output process described later, the normal hold display information is output to the VDP 255, so that the normal hold image data is set in the corresponding unit areas 272 to 275, and the corresponding unit hold in the first hold display area Ga. An image “●” is displayed in the display areas Ga1 to Ga4.

  Thereafter, in steps S2405 to S2408, a hold display information setting process for permitting notification is executed. That is, in step S2405, a notification generation lottery process is executed. In the notification generation lottery process, first, a notification generation lottery counter value is read from the notification generation lottery counter area 266 of the work RAM 254. Here, the notification generation lottery counter area 266 is configured to be able to store a counter value of “0 to 99”, and is configured to be incremented by 1 every time the hold notification control process is started, that is, at a cycle of about 2 msec. And is initialized to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In the notification generation lottery process, the notification generation lottery table read out corresponds to the notification generation lottery with reference to the notification generation lottery table stored in the notification generation lottery table storage area 261 of the program ROM 253. It is determined whether or not. Although the probability of being informed generation winning is arbitrary, in this pachinko machine 10, the informing generation lottery table is set so as to be informed generation winning with a probability of 9/10.

  In a succeeding step S2406, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in the step S2405 is a notification generation winning. If it is a notification generation winning, a hold display information setting process at the time of winning is executed in step S2407.

  The hold display information setting process at the time of winning will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Here, in the hold display information setting process at the time of winning, among the first unit setting area 292a to the fourth unit setting area 292d in the hold notification permitting area 292 of the first hold display information setting area 291, the above step S2403 is performed. In the unit setting areas 292a to 292d corresponding to the display side first reserved storage number IaN2 incremented by 1, the hold display information corresponding to the type of the hold increase command received this time is set. For example, if the display-side first reserved memory number IaN2 is 1, the display information is set for the first unit setting area 292a. If the display-side first reserved memory number IaN2 is 4, the fourth unit The hold display information is set in the setting area 292d.

  In the hold display information setting process at the time of winning, first, in step S2501, a notification execution flag (notification execution information) is stored in a notification execution flag storage area (notification execution information storage means) in the other flag storage area 268 of the work RAM 254. It is determined whether or not it has been done. The notification execution flag is information for specifying in the MPU 252 whether or not the information for performing the hold notification is already stored in any of the unit setting areas 292a to 292d in the hold notification allowing area 292. It is stored when information for notification is set, and is deleted when the information is deleted. If the notification execution flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S2517 described later. If the notification execution flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2502.

  In step S2502, it is determined whether or not the hold increase command received this time is the first hold increase command. If it is the first pending increase command, notification execution setting processing is executed in step S2503. In the notification execution setting process, the notification execution flag is stored in the work RAM 254, and the information on the number of holds corresponding to the command received this time is specified by the value of the display-side first hold storage number IaN2 updated in the immediately preceding step S2403. The information on the specified number of hold is set in the erasure counter area provided in the work RAM 254. The counter area for erasure is a measuring means for specifying, in the game time, the hold information according to the setting by the MPU 252 when the hold counter is set to perform the hold notification. As will be described later, the information on the number of holdings set in the erasing counter area is updated so that it is decremented every time an upper holding reduction command is received, and is stored in the erasing counter area after the update. When the information is “0”, which is the initial value, the notification execution flag erasing process is executed.

  Thereafter, an individual notification lottery process is executed in step S2504. In the individual notification lottery process, first, the individual notification lottery counter value is read from the individual notification lottery counter area 267 of the work RAM 254. Here, the individual notification lottery counter area 267 is configured to be able to store a counter value of “0 to 199”, and is configured to be incremented by 1 every time the hold notification control process is started, that is, at a cycle of about 2 msec. And is initialized to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In the individual notification lottery process, the individual notification lottery table read out corresponds to the individual notification lottery with reference to the individual notification lottery table stored in the individual notification lottery table storage area 262 of the program ROM 253. It is determined whether or not. The probability of winning the individual notification is arbitrary, but in the pachinko machine 10, the individual notification lottery table is set so that the individual notification is won with a probability of 1/2.

  In subsequent step S2505, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S2504 is an individual notification winning. If it is not the individual notification winning, the first notification information is set in step S2506 for the unit setting areas 292a to 292d corresponding to the display-side first reserved storage number IaN2 incremented by 1 in step S2403. When the first notification information is output to the VDP 255 in an internal command output process described later, the first notification image data is set in the corresponding unit areas 272 to 275, and the corresponding unit of the first hold display area Ga is set. A “certain” image is displayed in the hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4.

  On the other hand, in the case of individual notification winning, in step S2507, second notification information is set for the unit setting areas 292a to 292d corresponding to the display-side first reserved storage number IaN2 incremented by 1 in step S2403. To do. The second notification information is output to the VDP 255 in an internal command output process to be described later, whereby the second notification image data is set in the corresponding unit areas 272 to 275, and the corresponding unit of the first hold display area Ga is set. An image “definitely dedicated” is displayed in the hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4.

  Here, as described above, the first hold increase command is newly stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit of the main control device 81 based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 33. This is a command that is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212 when the hold information is the 15R probability variation jackpot result and the probability variation dedicated jackpot result. In this case, the case where the individual notification winning is performed in the individual notification lottery processing is a case where the hold information is a 15R probability variation jackpot result and a notification is made that the probability variation dedicated jackpot result is informed. On the other hand, the case where the individual notification is not won in the individual notification lottery processing is a case where only the fact that the hold information is a 15R probability variation jackpot result is notified. The “definitely” image corresponds to the former notification, and the “definite” image corresponds to the latter notification.

  If the hold increase command received this time is not the first hold increase command, a negative determination is made in step S2502, and whether the hold increase command received this time is the second hold increase command in step S2508. Determine whether or not. If it is the second pending increase command, notification execution setting processing is executed in step S2509. The content of the notification execution setting process is the same as that in step S2503. Thereafter, an individual notification lottery process is executed in step S2510. The contents of the individual notification lottery process are the same as in step S2504.

  In subsequent step S2511, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S2510 is an individual notification winning. If it is not the individual notification winning, in step S2512 the first notification information is set for the unit setting areas 292a to 292d corresponding to the display-side first reserved storage number IaN2 incremented by 1 in step S2403.

  On the other hand, in the case of individual notification winning, in step S2513, third notification information is set for the unit setting areas 292a to 292d corresponding to the display-side first reserved storage number IaN2 incremented by 1 in step S2403. To do. The third notification information is output to the VDP 255 in an internal command output process to be described later, so that the third notification image data is set in the corresponding unit areas 272 to 275, and the corresponding unit of the first hold display area Ga. In the on-hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4, the “probably common” image is displayed.

  Here, as already described, the second hold increase command is newly stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the main control device 81 based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 33. This is a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212 when the hold information is a 15R probability variation jackpot result and not a probability variation dedicated jackpot result. In this case, the case where the individual notification winning is performed in the individual notification lottery processing is a case where the hold information is notified that the 15R probability variation jackpot result is not a probability variation dedicated jackpot result. On the other hand, the case where the individual notification is not won in the individual notification lottery processing is a case where only the fact that the hold information is a 15R probability variation jackpot result is notified. The “probably common” image corresponds to the former notification, and the “probable” image corresponds to the latter notification.

  If the hold increase command received this time is not the second hold increase command, a negative determination is made in step S2508, and whether the hold increase command received this time is the third hold increase command in step S2514. Determine whether or not. If it is the third pending increase command, notification execution setting processing is executed in step S2515. The content of the notification execution setting process is the same as that in step S2503.

  Thereafter, in step S2516, after the fourth notification information is set for the unit setting areas 292a to 292d corresponding to the display-side first reserved storage number IaN2 incremented by 1 in step S2403, the hold display at the time of true selection is performed. The information setting process ends. When the fourth notification information is output to the VDP 255 in an internal command output process described later, the fourth notification image data is set in the corresponding unit areas 272 to 275, and the corresponding unit of the first hold display area Ga is set. In the hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4, a “success” image is displayed.

  Here, as already explained, the third hold increase command is newly stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the main control device 81 based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 33. This is a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212 when the hold information is a normal jackpot result. Therefore, the case where the third hold increase command is received is a case where the hold information is notified that it is a normal jackpot result. The “communication” image corresponds to this notification.

  If the hold increase command received this time is not the third hold increase command, it means that the hold increase command received this time is the fourth hold increase command. Accordingly, a negative determination is made in step S2514, and in step S2517, normal hold display information is set for the unit setting areas 292a to 292d corresponding to the display-side first hold memory number IaN2 incremented by 1 in step S2403. After that, the hold display information setting process at the time of true selection is terminated. The normal hold display information is output to the VDP 255 in an internal command output process to be described later, whereby the normal hold image data is set in the corresponding unit areas 272 to 275, and the corresponding unit hold in the first hold display area Ga. An image “●” is displayed in the display areas Ga1 to Ga4.

  If it is determined in step S2501 that the notification execution flag is stored, whether or not any of the first hold increase command, the second hold increase command, and the third hold increase command has been received. Regardless, the process proceeds to step S2517 to set the normal hold display information. In other words, in the situation where the hold notification is already set, even if the first hold increase command, the second hold increase command, or the third hold increase command is newly received, it is a jackpot result of the notification target. No new setting is made to perform notification indicating the above.

  Returning to the description of the hold notification control process (FIG. 39), if the result of the lottery process in step S2405 is not a notification generation win, a hold display information setting process at the time of losing is executed in step S2408. In the hold display information setting process at the time of detachment, after the normal hold display information is set for the unit setting areas 292a to 292d corresponding to the display-side first hold memory number IaN2 incremented by 1 in step S2403, the true selection is performed. End the hold display information setting process. The normal hold display information is output to the VDP 255 in an internal command output process to be described later, whereby the normal hold image data is set in the corresponding unit areas 272 to 275, and the corresponding unit hold in the first hold display area Ga. An image “●” is displayed in the display areas Ga1 to Ga4.

  On the other hand, if the pending increase command received this time does not include information corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the upper working port 33, a negative determination is made in step S2402, and the flow proceeds to step S2409.

  In step S2409, the display-side second reserved storage number IbN2 stored in the reserved counter area 264 of the work RAM 254 is incremented by one. The display-side second reserved storage number IbN2 corresponds to the second hold display information setting area 294 of the hold display information setting area 265, and when the hold display information is set for reception of the hold increase command. In the second hold display information setting area 294, the hold display information is set in the unit setting areas 294a to 294d corresponding to the display-side second hold storage number IbN2.

  In a succeeding step S2410, a hold display information setting process for the lower working port is executed. Specifically, among the first unit setting area 294a to the fourth unit setting area 294d in the second hold display information setting area 294, it corresponds to the display-side second hold storage number IbN2 incremented by 1 in step S2409. Normal hold display information is set in the unit setting areas 294a to 294d. For example, if the display-side second reserved memory number IbN2 is 1, the normal hold display information is set for the first unit setting area 294a, and if the display-side second reserved memory number IbN2 is 4, the fourth The normal hold display information is set in the unit setting area 294d. In the internal command output process described later, the normal hold display information is output to the VDP 255, whereby the normal hold image data is set in the corresponding unit areas 282 to 285, and the corresponding unit hold in the second hold display area Gb. An image of “●” is displayed in the display areas Gb1 to Gb4.

  If it is a command stored in the command storage area 263 and the command to be read this time is not a pending increase command, a negative determination is made in step S2401, and the flow proceeds to step S2411. In step S2411, it is determined whether the command to be read this time is a pending decrease command. In the case of the hold reduction command, in step S2412 to step S2417, the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga1 of the first hold display area Ga and the second hold display area Gb (see FIG. 8B) of the symbol display device 41 are displayed. A setting process for holding reduction is performed to shift the images displayed on Ga4, Gb1 to Gb4 in accordance with the reduction of the holding information.

  In the hold reduction setting process, first, in step S2412, it is determined whether or not the information corresponding to the upper operation port 33 is included in the hold reduction command received this time. If the information corresponding to the upper operating port 33 is included, the display side first reserved storage number IaN2 stored in the reserved counter area 264 of the work RAM 254 is decremented by 1 in step S2413.

  In a succeeding step S2414, a first shift process is executed. In the first shift process, the hold display information set in the first unit setting area 292a to the fourth unit setting area 292d of the hold notification permission area 292 in the first hold display information setting area 291 is moved to the lower area side. In addition to shifting in order, the hold display information set in the first unit setting area 293a to the fourth unit setting area 293d of the hold notification disabling area 293 in the first hold display information setting area 291 is sequentially shifted to the lower area side. It is a process to make.

  Specifically, the hold display information in each first unit setting area 292a, 293a is cleared, and each second unit setting area 292b, 293b → each first unit setting area 292a, 293a, each third unit setting area 292c. , 293c → second unit setting areas 292b, 293b, fourth unit setting areas 292d, 293d → third unit setting areas 292c, 293c, and so on, and so on, in the unit setting areas 292a to 292d, 293a to 293d. Information is shifted.

  In the output process of the internal command to be described later after the first shift process, each hold display information of the hold notification permission area 292 or the hold notification disabling area 293 is output to the VDP 255, whereby the first hold display for the video RAM 257 is performed. The image data of the unit areas 272 to 275 of the area 271 is updated. Thereby, the images displayed in the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 of the first hold display area Ga are also shifted to the lower side.

  In a succeeding step S2415, a flag erasing process is executed. In the flag erasing process, it is determined whether or not the notification execution flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If the notification execution flag is stored, it is stored in the erasure counter area provided in the work RAM 254. Update the information to be decremented by 1. As a result of the update, when the value of the erasure counter area is “0”, the notification execution flag is erased.

  On the other hand, if the information corresponding to the upper operation port 33 is not included in the hold decrease command received this time, a negative determination is made in step S2412, and the process proceeds to step S2416. In step S2416, the display-side second reserved storage number IbN2 stored in the hold counter area 264 of the work RAM 254 is decremented by one.

  In a succeeding step S2417, a second shift process is executed. The second shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the hold display information set in the first unit setting area 294a to the fourth unit setting area 294d of the second hold display information setting area 294 to the lower area side.

  Specifically, the hold display information in the first unit setting area 294a is cleared, and the second unit setting area 294b → first unit setting area 294a, third unit setting area 294c → second unit setting area 294b, fourth The hold display information in each of the unit setting areas 294a to 294d is shifted, for example, from the unit setting area 294d to the third unit setting area 294c.

  In the internal command output process to be described later after the second shift process, each hold display information in the second hold display information setting area 294 is output to the VDP 255, whereby each of the second hold display area 281 in the video RAM 257 is output. The image data in the unit areas 282 to 285 is updated. Thereby, the images displayed in the unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4 of the second hold display area Gb are also shifted to the lower side.

  If it is a command stored in the command storage area 263 and the command to be read this time is not a pending decrease command, a negative determination is made in step S2411 and the process proceeds to step S2418. In step S2418, it is determined whether or not the command to be read this time is a special advantageous start command.

  If the command is a special advantageous start command, in step S2419, a hold notification permission flag (hold notification notification permission) is stored in the hold notification permission flag storage area (hold notification permission information storage means) provided in the other flag storage area 268 of the work RAM 254. Information) is stored, or when it is already stored, this state is maintained, and then the hold notification control process is terminated. The state in which the hold notification permission flag is stored, that is, the situation in which the game state is in the special advantageous state or the game execution state in which the game state is in the special advantageous state is in the opening / closing execution mode is described above. In this case, the hold notification permissible state is set. In this case, in the internal command output process described later, each hold display information set in the hold notification permission area 292 is output to the VDP 255 for the first hold display information setting area 291. The Therefore, in the first hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 41, a notification for clearly indicating the number of hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit of the main control device 81 is performed, and A hold notification according to the content of the hold information is performed. In other words, the hold notification according to the content of the hold information is performed in a state in which the order of determination of the success / failure is specified.

  On the other hand, if it is not a special advantageous start command, it is determined in step S2420 whether or not the command to be read this time is a special advantageous end command. If it is not a special advantageous end command, the on-hold notification control process is ended as it is.

  If it is a special advantageous end command, in step S2421, if the hold notification permission flag is erased from the hold notification permission flag storage area provided in the other flag storage area 268 of the work RAM 254, or if it has not already been stored. After the state is maintained, the hold notification control process is terminated. A state in which the hold notification permission flag is not stored, that is, a situation in which the game state is not in the special advantageous state and a state in which the game operation is in the special advantageous state is not in the opening / closing execution mode is the above-described hold notification impossible state, In this case, in the internal command output process to be described later, each hold display information set in the hold notification disabling area 293 is output to the VDP 255 with respect to the first hold display information setting area 291. Therefore, in the first hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 41, a notification for clearly indicating the number of hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit of the main control device 81 is performed. The hold notification according to the content of the hold information is not performed.

<Regarding Output Process of Internal Command Executed by Display Control Device 212>
Next, an internal command output process executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The internal command output process is a part of a plurality of processes repeatedly executed by the MPU 252 and is started approximately at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec cycle). In the internal command output process, the hold notification permission area 292 of the first hold display information setting area 291 and the hold notification of the first hold display information setting area 291 in the hold display information setting area 265 of the work RAM 254 are displayed. The area to be output of the internal command is specified from the unavailable area 293 and the second hold display information setting area 294, and each hold set in the first to fourth unit setting areas of the specified area A process for outputting an internal command including the contents of the display information to the VDP 255 is executed.

  Specifically, first, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not a hold notification permission flag is stored in the work RAM 254. When the hold notification permission flag is stored, that is, when the hold notification permission state is set, in step S2602, the area to which the internal command is output is the hold notification permission for the first hold display information setting area 291. The area 292 is specified. Then, an internal command including the contents of each hold display information set at that time in the first to fourth unit setting areas 292a to 292d of the hold notification permission area 292 is output to the VDP 255. In the VDP 255, display data corresponding to each hold display information included in the internal command input from the MPU 252 is set in each unit area 272 to 275 in the first hold display area 271 of the video RAM 257. Thereby, in the 1st reservation display area Ga of the symbol display device 41, while notifying in order to specify the number of reservation information stored in reservation area Ra for the 1st result display part of main controller 81, it performs. A hold notification corresponding to the contents of the hold information is performed. In other words, the hold notification according to the content of the hold information is performed in a state in which the order of determination of the success / failure is specified.

  Here, when the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 33 occurs, the main control device 81 transmits an operation winning command to the sound lamp control device 82 when the occurrence of the winning is specified. The voice lamp control device 82 executes the above-described command response process (FIG. 33) at a relatively short cycle such as 2 msec. When an operation winning command is received, a corresponding hold increase command is immediately received. It is transmitted to the display control device 212. In the display control device 212, as described above, the hold notification control process and the internal command output process are executed in a relatively short cycle such as a 2 msec cycle. Therefore, when a game ball is won in the upper operating port 33 in a situation where the symbol display is performed in the predetermined game times on the symbol display device 41, a hold notification is started during the symbol variation display. Is possible.

  On the other hand, if the hold notification permission flag is not stored, that is, if the hold notification is disabled, the process proceeds to step S2603. In step S2603, the output target area of the internal command is identified as the hold notification disabled area 293 of the first hold display information setting area 291. Then, an internal command including the contents of each hold display information set in the first to fourth unit setting areas 293a to 293d of the hold notification disabled area 293 is output to the VDP 255. In the VDP 255, display data corresponding to each hold display information included in the internal command input from the MPU 252 is set in each unit area 272 to 275 in the first hold display area 271 of the video RAM 257. Thereby, in the 1st reservation display area Ga of the symbol display apparatus 41, the alert | report for specifying the number of the hold information stored in the 1st result display part reservation area Ra of the main control apparatus 81 is performed. However, the hold notification according to the contents of the hold information is not performed.

  After executing the process of step S2602 or step S2603, the process proceeds to step S2604. In step S2604, the output target area of the internal command is specified as the second hold display information setting area 294. Then, an internal command including the contents of each hold display information set at that time in the first to fourth unit setting areas 294a to 294d of the second hold display information setting area 294 is output to the VDP 255. In the VDP 255, display data corresponding to each hold display information included in the internal command input from the MPU 252 is set in each unit area 282 to 285 in the second hold display area 281 of the video RAM 257. Thereby, in the 2nd reservation display area Gb of the symbol display apparatus 41, the alert | report for specifying the number of the hold information stored in the 2nd result display part reservation area Rb of the main controller 81 is performed. However, the hold notification according to the content of the hold information is not performed. Thereafter, the output process of this internal command is terminated.

<Regarding the state of hold notification performed in the first hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 41>
Next, the state of hold notification performed in the first hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, as already explained, the hold notification is performed in the case of the hold notification allowable state, and the hold notification allowable state is a state in which the gaming state is in the special advantageous state or in the game times in which the gaming state is in the special advantageous state. This is the situation when transitioning. In the following description, the gaming state is a special advantageous state, that is, the winning / lottery mode in the main control device 81 is the high probability mode, and the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 is the high frequency support mode. The explanation is based on the premise.

  FIG. 43 (a) shows that the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit of the main control device 81 is a 15R probability variation jackpot result and not a jackpot result dedicated to probability change (a common jackpot result). )) Is shown on hold. In this case, the hold information that is the 15R probability change jackpot result and not the probability change dedicated jackpot result is the second hold information in the upper working port 33, and therefore the second unit hold display area Ga2 of the first hold display area Ga. Is displayed on the hold notification image of “probably common”.

  When such a hold notification image is displayed, the player can play the game times corresponding to the hold information regardless of whether the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. It can be recognized that a 15R probability variation jackpot result occurs. In this case, the current gaming state is that the support mode of the lower working port 34 by the electric accessory 34a is the high frequency support mode, so that winning of the game ball to the lower working port 34 occurs relatively frequently, With regard to the hold information that is a trigger for starting the game round, the hold information relating to the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 34 is prioritized over the hold information relating to the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 33. Furthermore, since the current lottery mode is the high probability mode in the current gaming state, the game times related to the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 34 are some jackpot results, specifically, the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variable jackpot result. The probability of becoming is relatively high.

  Then, the player operates the lower operation while expecting that a big hit result will be generated in the game times related to winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 34 before the game times corresponding to the hold information related to the hold notification. It is considered that the firing handle 54 is operated in expectation of winning a prize in the mouth 34. This is because if a jackpot result is generated in the game times related to the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 34, the player will be in a state where the two jackpot results are secured in one special advantageous state.

  FIG. 43 (b) notifies the holding that the holding information stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the main control device 81 is a 15R probability variation jackpot result and a jackpot result dedicated to probability change. It shows how it is. In this case, since the hold information which is the 15R probability change jackpot result and the jackpot result dedicated to the probability change is the fourth hold information in the upper working port 33, the fourth unit hold display area of the first hold display area Ga. An on-hold notification image “definitely dedicated” is displayed on Ga4.

  When such a hold notification image is displayed, if the player becomes a game number corresponding to the hold information, and if the winning lottery mode at that time is the high probability mode, a 15R probability variation jackpot result is generated. However, it is possible to recognize that the big hit result does not occur if the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode. In other words, in the current special advantageous state, if the game times correspond to the hold information related to the hold notification, the 15R probability variation jackpot result is surely generated, while the game times related to winning a game ball to the lower operating port 34 If the game times corresponding to the hold information related to the hold notification after the normal jackpot result is generated, it can be recognized that the 15R probability variable jackpot result that has been obtained cannot be obtained.

  Then, in order to prevent another jackpot result from being generated before the game times corresponding to the hold information related to the hold notification, the player receives a new game ball winning in the lower operation port 34. It is considered that the operation of the firing handle 54 is stopped so as not to occur.

  FIG. 43 (c) shows a state in which the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit of the main control device 81 is on hold notification that it is a 15R probability variation jackpot result. In this case, since the hold information which is the 15R probability variation jackpot result is the third hold information in the upper operation port 33, the hold notification of “probability” is given to the third unit hold display area Ga3 of the first hold display area Ga. Is displayed.

  When such a hold notification image is displayed, the player can reliably generate a 15R probability variation jackpot result if the game times corresponding to the hold information related to the hold notification are present in the current special advantageous state. It is unclear whether or not a 15R probability variable jackpot result will be generated if the game times corresponding to the hold information related to the hold notification after the normal jackpot result has occurred in the game times related to winning the game ball to the mouth 34 Can be recognized.

  Then, the player who predicted that the hold information is a 15R probability variation jackpot result and not a probability variation dedicated jackpot result expects the game ball to win the lower operating port 34 as in FIG. 43 (a). The player who is considered to operate the firing handle 54 and predicts that the hold information is the 15R probability variation jackpot result and the probability variation dedicated jackpot result, as shown in FIG. 43 (b). It is considered that the operation 54 is stopped. That is, the launch handle 54 is operated according to the player's prediction, and the game can be diversified through the hold notification.

  FIG. 43 (d) shows a state in which the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit of the main controller 81 is on hold notification that it is a normal jackpot result. In this case, since the hold information which is the normal jackpot result is the fourth hold information in the upper working port 33, a hold notification of “communication” is displayed in the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 of the first hold display area Ga. An image is displayed.

  When such a hold notification image is displayed, the player can determine that a jackpot result is normally generated at least when the game times correspond to the hold information in the current special advantageous state. . If a normal jackpot result occurs in the special advantageous state, the high-frequency winning mode open / close execution mode is shifted to, but the winning lottery mode falls from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. On the other hand, when a jackpot result is generated based on a winning of a game ball to the lower working port 34, it is either a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variable jackpot result. In other words, if a jackpot result is generated based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 34, the player can obtain a value equal to or higher than the hold information related to the hold notification.

  Then, the player expects that a big hit result will be generated in the game times related to winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 34 before the game times corresponding to the hold information related to the hold notification, It is considered that the launching handle 54 is operated in expectation of winning a game ball to 34.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The hold information stored in the second result display portion holding area Rb corresponding to the lower working port 34 has priority over the hold information stored in the first result display portion holding area Ra corresponding to the upper working port 33. Then, in the configuration in which the success / failure lottery is performed, the hold notification corresponding to the hold information stored in the first result display portion hold area Ra is executed at a timing prior to the hold information being determined as the pass / fail lottery. Sometimes. When such a hold notification is made, the player will receive a winning game ball to the lower operating port 34 so that a winning / no-use lottery is performed on the hold information that is the subject of the hold notification. While expecting to manually operate the firing handle 54 or expecting a winning of a game ball to the lower operation port 34 so that the winning / successful lottery is not performed on the hold information that is the subject of the hold notification. Changes in consciousness may occur depending on the content of the hold notification such as manually operating the firing handle 54. Then, for example, the operation mode of the firing handle 54 may be changed according to the content of the hold notification, such as stopping the operation of the firing handle 54 or slightly reducing or slightly increasing the operation amount of the firing handle 54. . As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which the launch handle 54 is manually operated and a passive game in which the result of the success / failure lottery is confirmed are associated with each other. It becomes possible to increase the degree.

  By performing the hold notification in the special advantageous state, the hold notification is performed in a situation where the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the lower operation port 34 is the high frequency support mode. Thereby, for example, when it is considered that the lottery lottery is not performed on the hold information related to the hold notification stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, the game to the lower operation port 34 is performed. By manually operating the launch handle 54 in such a manner that a winning of a ball is likely to occur, the state in which the hold information is stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, where the winning lottery is given priority, is continued, It becomes possible not to perform the lottery for the hold information related to the hold notification.

  In the hold display information setting area 265 in the work RAM 254 of the display control device 212, a hold notification permission area 292 and a hold notification disabling area 293 are provided as the first hold display information setting area 291 to display the first result. When new hold information is stored in the department hold area Ra, the hold notification permission area 292 corresponds to the hold display information corresponding to the success / failure result when the success / failure lottery is performed on the hold information. While being set in the unit setting areas 292a to 292d, hold display information for clearly indicating the number of hold information is set in the corresponding unit setting areas 293a to 293d of the hold notification disabled area 293. In addition, when the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is shifted, information is sent to the hold notification permission area 292 and the hold notification disabled area 293 accordingly. The shift process was executed. In the hold notification permission state, the hold display information stored in the hold notification permission area 292 is output to the VDP 255, and in the hold notification disabled state, the hold display information stored in the hold notification disable area 293 is output to the VDP 255. Output to. As a result, when the hold notification disabled state is switched to the hold notification allowable state, the hold information stored in the first result display unit holding area Ra can be immediately notified at that timing. Become.

  The main control device 81 displays the variation display time of the patterns of the result display sections AS and BS (that is, in the symbol display device 41) with respect to the hold information subject to the determination of success / failure prior to the hold information that is the subject of the hold notification. When determining the symbol variable display time), the variable display time is determined without referring to the content of the hold information related to the hold notification. In other words, in the process of determining the variable display time (specifically, the process of step S813), the information that will be a big win is included in the hold information that is the target of the lottery after the hold information related to the determination of the variable display time. Do not refer to whether it is included (not determined).

  For example, when the hold information related to the hold notification is information corresponding to the jackpot result of the notification target, the variable display time longer than usual is selected for the hold information that is the target of the determination of the success prior to the hold information. With this configuration, there is a concern that in a situation where the hold notification is performed, the time required for digesting each game time becomes long, and the game is prolonged. On the other hand, for example, when the hold information related to the hold notification is information corresponding to the jackpot result of the notification target, the hold information that is the target of the determination of the success prior to the hold information is displayed in a shorter display than usual. If the time is selected, there is a concern that the time required to digest each game time will be shortened in the situation where the hold notification is performed, and the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 will be extremely high. Is done. On the other hand, since the variable display time is determined without referring to the content of the hold information related to the hold notification as described above, the configuration for performing the hold notification can be improved. .

  In the situation where the hold information indicating that the hold information corresponds to the jackpot result to be notified is already set, even if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is newly stored, the hold information is newly added. The setting for performing the hold notification is not performed. For example, in a situation in which a high-probability mode is in place and a lottery information that is a target of execution of a hold notification is stored and a plurality of hold information is stored, the order of starting game times is first. There may occur a situation in which the hold information corresponds to the normal jackpot result and the hold information whose turn is the target of starting the game round is the hold information that is a big hit only in the high probability mode. In such a situation, if the hold notification is continued for the latter hold information even after the game times related to the former hold information are ended, the notification contents can be false information. In addition, after the game times related to the former hold information are ended, if the hold notification is ended with respect to the latter hold information, the player thinks that the jackpot result has disappeared, and there is a possibility that the willingness to continue the game is reduced. is there. In particular, unlike the first embodiment, in the configuration in which the transition information corresponding to the jackpot winning in the low probability mode and the transition information corresponding to the jackpot winning in the high probability mode do not overlap, the above situation is low probability. It may also occur when a plurality of hold notifications are made simultaneously in the mode. Furthermore, in a configuration in which a process for preventing the above situation from occurring while simultaneously performing a hold notification for a plurality of pieces of hold information, the process may be complicated. On the other hand, in the situation where it is already set to perform the hold notification, even if new hold information is stored, the setting for newly performing the hold notification is not performed for the hold information. By doing so, the hold notification can be performed without causing the above-described inconvenience.

  In the situation where the hold information corresponding to the big win is already stored, even if the hold information is newly stored, the setting for performing the hold notification is not performed for the hold information. For example, in a situation in which a high-probability mode is in place and a lottery information that is a target of execution of a hold notification is stored and a plurality of hold information is stored, the order of starting game times is first. There may occur a situation in which the hold information corresponds to the normal jackpot result and the hold information whose turn is the target of starting the game round is the hold information that is a big hit only in the high probability mode. In such a situation, if the hold notification is continued for the latter hold information even after the game times related to the former hold information are ended, the notification contents can be false information. In addition, after the game times related to the former hold information are ended, if the hold notification is ended with respect to the latter hold information, the player thinks that the jackpot result has disappeared, and there is a possibility that the willingness to continue the game is reduced. is there. In particular, unlike the first embodiment, in the configuration in which the transition information corresponding to the jackpot winning in the low probability mode and the transition information corresponding to the jackpot winning in the high probability mode do not overlap, the above situation is low probability. It may also occur when a plurality of hold notifications are made simultaneously in the mode. Furthermore, in a configuration in which a process for preventing the above situation from occurring while simultaneously performing a hold notification for a plurality of pieces of hold information, the process may be complicated. On the other hand, in the situation where the hold information corresponding to the big win is already stored, even if the hold information is newly stored, the setting for performing the hold notification is not performed for the hold information. Thus, the hold notification can be performed without causing the above inconvenience.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the contents of the information transmitted from the main control device 81 to the sound lamp control device 82 are different in executing the hold notification. Such a difference is caused by the fact that the processing content of the information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 is different from the processing content of the information acquisition processing (FIG. 15) in the first embodiment. Therefore, the information acquisition process in the present embodiment will be described below. In the following description, differences from the first embodiment will be described, and the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing information acquisition processing in the present embodiment.

  In the information acquisition process, in steps S2701 to S2704, the same processes as those in steps S301 to S304 of the information acquisition process (FIG. 15) in the first embodiment are executed. Thereafter, the confirmation process for holding notification is executed in step S2705, and the operation winning command setting process is executed in step S2706, and then the information acquisition process is terminated.

  Next, the hold notification confirmation process in step S2705 and the operation winning command setting process in step S2706 will be described.

  First, the hold notification confirmation process in step S2705 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the confirmation processing for holding notification, first, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the current information acquisition processing is based on winning in the upper working port 33. If it is not based on winning in the upper working port 33, the confirmation process for the on-hold notification is terminated as it is. If it is based on a winning to the upper working port 33, the process proceeds to step S2802.

  In step S2802, information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped from the hold information stored in the first result display portion hold area Ra of the RAM 204 in step S2704. In the subsequent step S2803, the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time with reference to the first table of the hold notification table stored in the hold notification table storage area of the ROM 203 is the notification target jackpot result. It is specified whether or not it corresponds to either the common jackpot result set as or the dedicated jackpot result at the time of probability change.

  In detail about the first table, as shown in FIG. 46A, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is associated with the first specified result. If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value that is a jackpot winning in both the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode in the winning or failing lottery executed in the fluctuation start process (FIG. 20), the first identification When the result is set to be a common jackpot result, and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value that is won only in the high probability mode, the first specific result is the jackpot result dedicated to probability change In the case where the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value other than the above, the first specific result is set to be a result not to be notified.

  Here, in the first embodiment, the values that are the jackpot result in the low probability mode are set such that the intervals of the plurality of values corresponding to the jackpot result are all the same. In the embodiment, the intervals of a plurality of values corresponding to the jackpot result are set to be different. In other words, when the counter C1 is updated a specific number of times from the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to any one jackpot result value, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the value of another jackpot result is always The value corresponding to the jackpot result is set so that this situation does not occur. The same applies to the value that is a jackpot result in the high probability mode.

  In the subsequent step S2804, it is determined whether or not the result of referring to the first table in step S2803 is a common jackpot result. If the result is a common jackpot result, the common jackpot information is temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S2805. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2808.

  If it is not a common jackpot result, the process advances to step S2806 to determine whether or not the result of referring to the first table in step S2803 is a jackpot result dedicated to probability change. If it is not a jackpot result dedicated to the probability change, this confirmation process is terminated as it is. If it is a jackpot result dedicated to the probability change, in step S2807, the jackpot information dedicated to the probability change is temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 202. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2808.

  In step S2808, the information of the value of the big hit type counter C2 is grasped from the hold information stored in the first result display portion hold area Ra of the RAM 204 in step S2704. In subsequent step S2809, with reference to the second table of the hold notification table stored in the hold notification table storage area of the ROM 203, the information of the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time is the result of the notification target jackpot result. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to either the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variation jackpot result set as.

  In detail about the 2nd table, as shown in Drawing 46 (b), the value of jackpot type counter C2 and the 2nd specific result are matched. When the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is a value that is a normal jackpot result in the distribution table for the first result display unit, the second specific result is set to be a normal jackpot result, When the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is a value that is a 15R probability variation jackpot result in the distribution table for the first result display unit, the second specific result is set to be a 15R probability variation jackpot result, When the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is a value other than the above, it is set so that the second specific result is a result not to be notified.

  In subsequent step S2810, it is determined whether or not the result of referring to the second table in step S2809 is a normal jackpot result. If the result is a normal jackpot result, the normal jackpot information is temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S2811. Then, this confirmation process is complete | finished.

  If it is not the normal jackpot result, the process advances to step S2812, and it is determined whether or not the result of referring to the second table in step S2809 is the 15R probability variation jackpot result. If it is not the 15R probability variation jackpot result, the present confirmation process is terminated as it is. If the result is a 15R probability variation jackpot result, the 15R probability variation jackpot information is temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S2813. Then, this confirmation process is complete | finished.

  As described above, in the confirmation process for hold notification, it is specified whether the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the hold information stored this time corresponds to either the common jackpot result or the jackpot result dedicated to probability change In addition, it is specified whether the information on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 included in the hold information stored this time corresponds to either the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variable jackpot result. As a result, in this pachinko machine 10, as the types of the jackpot results to be notified, the common jackpot result in the case of the normal jackpot result, the normal jackpot result, the dedicated jackpot result at the time of the probability change in the case of the normal jackpot result, the 15R probability variation jackpot result, 15R A common jackpot result in the case of the probability variation jackpot result and a jackpot result dedicated to the probability variation in the case of the 15R probability variation jackpot result can be set. However, in the pachinko machine 10, among the above, four types of notifications are provided: a normal jackpot result, a 15R probability variation jackpot result, a common jackpot result in the case of 15R probability variation jackpot result, and a dedicated jackpot result in the case of 15R probability variation jackpot result. It is set as the type of the target jackpot result.

  Note that if the information specified in the specific process for holding notification can be referred to in the subsequent process, whether or not the specified information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 is arbitrary, for example, stored in the RAM 204. May be.

  Next, the operation winning command setting process in step S2706 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the operation winning command setting process, first, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the current information acquisition process is based on winning in the upper working port 33. If the winning is based on the winning of the upper working port 33, the first setting process in steps S2902 to S2908 is executed. On the other hand, if the winning is based on the winning of the lower working port 34, the second setting process of step S2909 is executed.

  In the first setting process, first, in step S2902, it is determined based on the information on the first specific result and the information on the second specific result stored in the register of the MPU 202 whether or not it is the jackpot result of the notification target. . Specifically, it is determined whether or not either common jackpot information or probability change dedicated jackpot information is stored, and if any information is stored, the normal jackpot information or 15R probability variable jackpot information is determined. It is determined whether any one is stored. In step S2903, it is determined based on the second specific result information stored in the register of the MPU 202 whether the result is a 15R probability variation jackpot result. Specifically, it is determined whether 15R probability variation jackpot information is stored. Also, in step S2904, it is determined based on the information on the first specific result stored in the register of the MPU 202 whether or not it is a jackpot result dedicated to probability change. Specifically, it is determined whether either normal jackpot information or 15R probability variable jackpot information is stored, and if any information is stored, is the jackpot information dedicated to probability change stored? Determine whether or not.

  As a result, if the result is a 15R probability variation jackpot result, which is a probability variation dedicated jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in all of steps S2902 to S2904, and the process proceeds to step S2905. In step S2905, a first action winning command is selected from various commands stored in the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, and the first action winning command is set. The first operation winning command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process in step S501 of the normal process (FIG. 17). Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  The voice lamp control device 82 receives the first operation winning command, thereby grasping that a new winning to the upper operating port 33 has occurred, and holding information related to the winning is a 15R probability variable big hit result. Understand that it is information corresponding to the jackpot result dedicated to the probability change. In addition, the voice lamp control device 82 transmits a first hold increase command to the display control device 212 by receiving the first operation winning command. The processing executed when the display control device 212 receives the first hold increase command is the same as that in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  If it is a 15R probability variation jackpot result and not a probability variation dedicated jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2902 and step S2903, a negative determination is made in step S2904, and the flow proceeds to step S2906. In step S2906, the second action winning command is selected from various commands stored in the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, and the second action winning command is set. The second operation winning command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process in step S501 of the normal process (FIG. 17). Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  The voice lamp control device 82 receives the second operation winning command, thereby grasping that a new winning to the upper operating port 33 has occurred, and holding information related to the winning is a 15R probability variable big hit result. Understand that the information corresponds to the fact that it is not a jackpot result dedicated to the probability change. In addition, the voice lamp control device 82 transmits a second hold increase command to the display control device 212 by receiving the second operation winning command. The processing executed when the display control device 212 receives the second pending increase command is the same as that in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  If the result is a normal jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2902, a negative determination is made in step S2903, and the flow proceeds to step S2907. In step S2907, a third action winning command is selected from various commands stored in the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, and the third action winning command is set. The third operation winning command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process in step S501 of the normal process (FIG. 17). Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  The voice lamp control device 82 receives the third operation winning command, thereby grasping that a new winning to the upper operating port 33 has occurred, and holding information related to the winning is a normal jackpot result. Understand that the information corresponds to. In addition, the voice lamp control device 82 transmits a third hold increase command to the display control device 212 by receiving the third operation winning command. The processing executed when the display control device 212 receives the third hold increase command is the same as that in the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted here.

  If the result is not to be notified, a negative determination is made in step S2902, and the flow proceeds to step S2908. In step S2908, the fourth action winning command is selected from various commands stored in the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, and the fourth action winning command is set. The fourth operation winning command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process in step S501 of the normal process (FIG. 17). Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  The voice lamp control device 82 receives the fourth operation winning command, thereby grasping that a new winning to the upper operating port 33 has occurred, and holding information related to the winning is a result not to be notified. To understand that the information corresponds to the situation. In addition, the voice lamp control device 82 transmits a fourth hold increase command to the display control device 212 by receiving the fourth operation winning command. The processing executed when the display control device 212 receives the fourth hold increase command is the same as that in the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted here.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained in addition to the effects in the first embodiment.

  In the configuration in which the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is included in the operation winning command, a signal line (for electrically connecting the main controller 81 and the sound lamp controller 82) Specifically, the connector unit provided with a common connector at both ends of a plurality of signal lines is illegally removed, and the current value of the big hit random number counter C1 and the value of the big hit type counter C2 in the main control device 81 are acquired. It is assumed that cheating is done. In addition to such illegal acts, an illegal board is connected to the signal line that electrically connects the main control device 81 and the sound lamp control device 82, and the current jackpot random number counter C1 of the main control device 81 is connected. It is assumed that an illegal act of acquiring the value or the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is performed. As described above, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is acquired, it is erroneously assumed that an illegal act or a start prize for illegally starting and winning a prize at a timing that results in a jackpot winning or a 15R probability variable jackpot result has occurred. There is a concern that fraudulent acts to be detected will cause a great disadvantage to the game hall. On the other hand, instead of transmitting the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 as they are, it is configured to transmit the information of the result specified in the main control device 81, so that the occurrence of the fraud Can be prevented.

  The operation winning command transmitted from the main control device 81 to the sound lamp control device 82 has a one-to-one correspondence with the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot result and the jackpot type counter C2 which is a 15R probability variable jackpot result. Instead, each operation winning command is set so as to include a value of a jackpot random number counter C1 that is a plurality of types of jackpot results and a value of a jackpot type counter C2 that is a plurality of types of 15R probability variation jackpot results. Therefore, even if the information of the operation winning command is illegally acquired by illegally removing the signal line electrically connecting the main controller 81 and the sound lamp controller 82, the illegally acquired information It is difficult to specify which jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to, and it is difficult to specify which jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to the value. Can be made.

  Further, for the value that is a jackpot result in the low probability mode and the value that is a jackpot result in the high probability mode, the counter C1 is updated a specific number of times from the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to any one of the jackpot result values In this case, a value corresponding to each jackpot result is set so that a situation where the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the value of another jackpot result does not always occur. Even with such a configuration, even if the information of the operation winning command is illegally acquired by illegally disconnecting the signal line electrically connecting the main control device 81 and the sound lamp control device 82, the illegal acquisition is performed. It is possible to specify which jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and more specifically to identify which jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to the value. It can be difficult.

<Third Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 that performs the hold notification will be described in detail based on the drawings. In the following description, differences from the first embodiment will be described, and the description of the same configuration will be basically omitted.

  First, the configuration of the game board 24 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  As in the first embodiment, the game board 24 includes a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating port 33, a lower operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, and a main display unit 301. And an accessory display 44 and the like. Each of these devices has the same mechanical configuration as that of the first embodiment except for the main display unit 301.

  Unlike the first embodiment, the main display unit 301 is provided with only one display region, and in this display region, the main display unit 301 was performed based on winning in the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. The result of the internal lottery is clearly indicated. That is, in the first embodiment, the winning to the upper working port 33 and the winning to the lower working port 34 are distinguished from each other, and the main display unit 43 is based on the winning to the upper working port 33. An area for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery and an area for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the lower working port 34 were provided. On the other hand, in this embodiment, there is no distinction between winning in the upper working port 33 and winning in the lower working port 34, and the main display unit 301 has the upper working port 33 or the lower working port. The result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to 34 is clearly shown in the common display area. Moreover, although the round display part is not provided in the main display part 301 in this Embodiment, the said round display part may be provided.

  Corresponding to the fact that the winning to the upper working port 33 and the winning to the lower working port 34 are not distinguished from each other as described above, the second holding lamp unit 46 is not provided in the present embodiment. ing. That is, as the holding light emitting unit, the first holding lamp unit (operation holding light emitting unit) 45 corresponding to the main display unit 301 and the symbol display device 41, and the third holding lamp unit (through) corresponding to the accessory display unit 44. For holding light emitting section) 47. A maximum of four game balls won in the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 are reserved, and the number of reservations is displayed when the first reservation lamp unit 45 is turned on. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed when the third holding lamp section 47 is turned on.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the present embodiment will be described based on the block diagram of FIG. In describing the electrical configuration, FIGS. 50 and 51 are referred to as appropriate.

  In the present embodiment, similar to the first embodiment, various processes are executed by main controller 81 based on the detection results of the various detection sensors. In this case, as shown in FIG. 50, the main controller 81 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, a random number initial value counter CINI, a variation type counter CS, and an electric accessory release counter C4. The RAM 204 of the main controller 81 is provided with a lottery counter buffer 231, a holding ball storage area 302, and an electric role holding area 233. A lottery or the like is performed as to whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is opened.

  Here, since the configurations of the various counters, the lottery counter buffer 231 and the electric utility reservation area 233 are the same as those in the first embodiment, description thereof will be omitted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in order not to distinguish between winning in the upper working port 33 and winning in the lower working port 34, the configuration of the reserved ball storage area 302 is different from that in the first embodiment. ing.

  The holding ball storage area 302 includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and matches the winning history to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. The numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 is stored in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4. In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when the winning to the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of RE2 → third reserved area RE3 → fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 are stored on hold. In addition, the holding area RE includes a holding number storage area NA, in order to specify the number in which the winning history to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is stored in the holding number storage area NA. Is stored.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display on the main display unit 301. At the start of one game round Based on various pieces of numerical information stored in the execution area AE, determination of success / failure, allocation of jackpot type, determination of a variable display time, and the like are performed.

  The main control device 81 uses a determination table or a distribution table stored in the ROM 203 of the main control device 81 for determining whether or not the game is successful or sorting the jackpot type. The information forms of the success / failure table and the distribution table are different from those of the first embodiment.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), as the success / failure table, a success / failure table for the low probability mode and a success / failure table for the high probability mode are prepared. In the first embodiment, Although a special failure result has been set as the success / failure result in the hit / reject table, in the present embodiment, this special failure result is not set. That is, in the success / failure table for the low probability mode, as for the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, “7,307” corresponds to the jackpot winning, and the other values correspond to the losing results. In the high-probability mode success / failure table, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is “7, 36, 67, 100,..., 572, 598” corresponding to the jackpot winning selection, and other values are not included. It corresponds to the result.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (b), as the allocation table, a common table is set for winning in the upper operating port 33 and winning in the upper operating port 34. As a distribution destination of game results in the minute table, a normal jackpot result and a probability variable jackpot result are set. The contents of the normal jackpot result are the same as in the first embodiment, and the contents of the probability variation jackpot result are the same as the 15R probability variation jackpot result in the first embodiment.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 49, the main control device 81 executes various processes based on winning in the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34, and a command including information reflecting the processing result is a voice lamp control device 82. Sent to. As in the first embodiment, the command includes commands such as a change start command (change command), a type command, and a change end command transmitted from the main control device 81 at the start of a game. A command for performing a hold notification is included.

  The MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82 executes various processes based on the command received from the main control device 81. In this case, in the first embodiment, the variation display pattern of each game time on the symbol display device 41 is determined by the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82, and the processing related to the hold notification is also performed by the sound lamp control device 82. In the present embodiment, the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82 performs the process for determining the variation display pattern of each game time in the symbol display device 41 and the process related to the hold notification. Not done. Instead, the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82 transmits the command for determining the variable display pattern received from the main control device 81 and the command related to the hold notification to the display control device 212 as they are.

  The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 determines a variation display pattern of each game time in the symbol display device 41 based on receiving a command from the main control device 81 via the audio lamp control device 82 and also issues a hold notification. This process is executed. In these processes, various information stored in the areas 311 to 316 of the ROM 253 is used, and the areas 321 to 333 of the RAM 254 are used. Details of these areas will be described together when the processing executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 is described.

  The display control device 212 includes a VDP 255, a character ROM 256, and a video RAM 257, as in the first embodiment. Various processes are executed in the MPU 252, and a drawing process is executed on the video RAM 257 in the VDP 255 corresponding to the processing result, whereby various images are displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. The contents related to the variable display of symbols of each game time will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG.

  In the character ROM 256, as shown in FIGS. 52 (a) to (i), nine types of main symbol data with numbers "1" to "9" and as shown in FIG. 52 (j). Sub-symbol data without numerals is stored in advance.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 53 (a), on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine kinds of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. On the display screen G, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left) with periodicity.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), the display screen G is configured such that three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has come to be. The display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5. Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number attached to any one of the effective lines is formed. When the variation display of .about.Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the normal jackpot result or the probability variation jackpot result.

  In view of the fact that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the lower symbol row Z3 is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). 2 symbol rows), the middle symbol row Z2 can be referred to as a third symbol row (or third symbol row).

  Among the above main symbols, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “specific symbols”, and if a probabilistic jackpot result occurs, The combination is stopped. The main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “non-specific symbols”. When a normal jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. The

  In addition, the mode of the display of the symbol variation in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the symbol variation display in the symbol sequence, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. For example, a plurality of symbol sequences may be set to be arranged side by side, and the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol sequence may be set to the vertical direction. Incidentally, in the first embodiment, the first hold display area Ga and the second hold display area Gb are set at the bottom of the display screen G. In the present embodiment, these hold display areas Ga, Gb is not set, and the number of hold information is taught only by turning on the first specific lamp unit 45. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one hold display area may be set on the display screen G, and the number of hold information in the hold display area may be taught.

<About processing configuration>
Next, the processing configuration of the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 and the processing configuration of the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 will be described as different from the first embodiment.

  The processing configuration of the audio lamp control device 82 in the MPU 242 is also different from that of the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. However, the MPU 242 of the audio lamp control device 82 starts the fluctuation received from the main control device 81. Based on the command and type command, the light emission mode of the display lamp unit 63 and the sound output mode from the speaker unit 64 in each game time are determined, and a hold command and shift command, which will be described later, received from the main controller 81, etc. Based on the above, the emission control of the first holding lamp unit 45 and the third holding lamp unit 47 is performed.

<Processing in MPU 202 of Main Controller 81>
As processing executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, a winning process for an operating port, a game turn control process, and a game state transition process are different from those in the first embodiment. Therefore, these processes will be described below.

<Winning process for working port>
The winning process for the working opening will be described below. As in the first embodiment, the winning process for the operating opening is performed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) periodically started by the MPU 202 in the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter. This is executed after the update process for the lottery counter buffer 231 of C3 and the electric accessory release counter C4 is executed.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 54, in the winning process for the operating port, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in either the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. If the game ball has not won any of the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34, the main winning process is terminated. If the game ball has won a prize in either the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34, in step S3002, the value stored in the number-of-holds storage area NA of the holding ball storage area 302 is read and stored. It is determined whether or not the number N of starting reserved balls stored in the area RE is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment).

  If the number N of starting reserved balls is equal to or greater than the upper limit value, the main winning process is terminated as it is. If the number N of starting reserved balls is less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S3003, and the number N of starting reserved balls is incremented (added) by one. In the following step S3004, the values (each numerical information) of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S103 are stored in the free reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the reserved area RE. The first reserved area, that is, the reserved area corresponding to the reserved storage number incremented by 1 in step S3003 is stored.

  In subsequent steps S3005 and S3006, the audio lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212 recognize that the winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 has occurred, and the display control device displays a hold notice as a hold notification. A confirmation process for holding notice and a setting process for holding command, which are processes to be executed at 212, are executed. Thereafter, the main winning process is terminated.

  In the following, a confirmation process for holding notice and a setting process for holding command will be described.

  First, the reservation notice confirmation process in step S3005 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the confirmation process for holding notice, in step S 3101, information on the number of holdings stored in the holding number storage area NA in the holding area RE is read, and the information on the number of holdings is stored in the register of the MPU 202. In subsequent step S3102, the big hit determination information out of the hold information acquired in step S3004 based on the current winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34, that is, the information updated by the big hit random number counter C1 is obtained. Know the information.

  In subsequent step S3103, it is determined whether or not the current probability lottery mode is the low probability mode by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the RAM 204. In the case of the low probability mode, in step S3104, the jackpot determination information grasped in step S3102 is set as the jackpot winning with reference to the winning table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. That it is included in the information. In the case of the high probability mode, in step S3105, with reference to the winning table for high probability mode shown in FIG. 51 (a), the jackpot determination information grasped in step S3102 is determined as the jackpot winning. Specify whether it is included in the set information.

  After step S3104 or step S3105, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination information grasped in step S3102 corresponds to the jackpot winning. In the case of corresponding to the big win, in step S3107, the type determination information among the hold information acquired in step S3004 based on the current winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34, that is, the big hit The information acquired from the information updated by the type counter C2 is grasped.

  In subsequent step S3108, with reference to the distribution table shown in FIG. 51 (b), information for determining the jackpot type determined in step S3107 is information set as a normal jackpot result or information set as a probable change jackpot result. To identify which of them are included. Thereafter, in step S3109, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type information grasped in step S3107 corresponds to the normal jackpot result. If it corresponds to the normal jackpot result, the normal jackpot information is stored in the MPU 202 register in step S3110, and if it corresponds to the probability change jackpot result, the MPU 202 register is definitely changed in step S3111. Remember the jackpot information.

  When a negative determination is made in step S3106, when the process of step S3110 is executed, or when the process of step S3111 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3112. In step S3112, it is acquired from the information for judging the reach reach out of the hold information acquired in step S3004 based on the current winning to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, that is, the information updated by the reach random number counter C3. Know the information.

  In subsequent step S3113, the reach determination table (reach determination information group) stored in the reach determination table storage area (reach determination information group storage means) of ROM 203 is referred to, and the reach grasped in step S3112 is determined. It is specified whether the information for determination is included in the information set as the reach winning. Thereafter, in step S3114, it is determined whether or not the reach determination information grasped in step S3112 corresponds to the occurrence of reach. If it corresponds to the occurrence of reach, in step S3115, the reach generation information is stored in the register of the MPU 202, and then this confirmation process is terminated. If it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, the confirmation process is terminated as it is.

  Next, the hold command setting process of step S3006 in the winning prize process for the operation opening (FIG. 54) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the hold command setting process, it is determined in step S3201 whether or not either the normal jackpot information or the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202, thereby confirming the immediately preceding hold notice (FIG. 55). ), It is determined whether or not the jackpot determination information is identified as corresponding to the jackpot winning. If either the normal jackpot information or the probable change jackpot information is stored, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not it is the probable change jackpot information, so that the confirmation process for the previous hold notice (FIG. 55), it is determined whether or not the type determination information is identified as corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result.

  If it is probability variation jackpot information, a probability variation corresponding hold command is set in step S3203, and if it is normal jackpot information, a normal correspondence hold command is set in step S3204. Note that the setting of the command and various commands described later are performed by storing command information in a command setting area provided in the RAM 204.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3201 that both the normal jackpot information and the probability variation jackpot information are not stored, the process advances to step S3205 to determine whether or not the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 202. Thus, it is determined whether or not the information for reach determination is identified as corresponding to the occurrence of reach in the confirmation process for the previous hold notice (FIG. 55). If the reach occurrence information is stored, a detach reach hold command is set in step S3206. If the reach occurrence information is not stored, a complete detach hold command is set in step S3207. To do.

  After executing any of the processes of step S3203, step S3204, step S3206, or step S3207, in step S3208, a process of setting information on the number of hold for the hold command is executed. Specifically, as the processing, the hold command information set as described above is configured as information of a plurality of bytes, and information indicating that the command is a hold command or a hold command for some of the bits. Are included, and information on the number of holds can be set. In this case, in step S3208, the information on the number of holds stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S3101 in the confirmation process for the previous notice of hold (FIG. 55) is first read, and then the hold command already set is set. The read information on the number of reserved information is stored by an arithmetic process such as a logical sum for the information on the number of reserved information in FIG. As a result, for the hold command set in any of the processes of step S3203, step S3204, step S3206, or step S3207, the number of hold information corresponding to the hold command is specified. Information for is included.

  After executing the process of step S3208, the present setting process is terminated. The hold command including the hold number information in step S3208 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 by the external output process in step S501 in the next normal process (FIG. 17). The voice lamp control device 82 receives the hold command and specifies that the hold information has increased. In addition, the voice lamp control device 82 transmits the hold command to the display control device 212 as it is. The display control device 212 executes a hold notice process based on the received hold command. This process will be described in detail later.

  As for the setting method of the hold command, the display control device 212 uses the hold command to specify whether or not the jackpot is won, if the jackpot is won, the type of jackpot at that time, and if the jackpot is not won, specify whether or not the reach occurs If it is possible, it is arbitrary. For example, a combination of a hold command for probability change, a hold command for normal response, a hold command for release reach and a hold command for complete release is set individually for each hold number. One pending command may be selected according to the confirmation result in the confirmation process (FIG. 55).

<Game times control processing>
The game times control process will be described below. The game times control process is executed in the normal process (FIG. 17) in the MPU 202, as in the first embodiment.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 57, first, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect. When in the open / close execution mode, the process after step S3302, ie, the game times starting process at steps S3303 to S3305 and the game time progression process at steps S3306 to S3309 are not executed. The control process ends.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S3302 whether or not the main display unit 301 is in a variable display. If the main display unit 301 is not in a variable display, the process proceeds to a game turn start process in steps S3303 to S3305. In the game round start process, first, in step S3303, it is determined whether or not the number N of starting reserved balls is “0”. The case where the starting reserved ball number N is “0” means that the hold information is not stored in the hold ball storage area 302. Accordingly, the game turn control process is terminated as it is.

  If the number N of starting reserved balls is not “0”, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 302 for variable display is executed in step S3304, Further, in step S3305, the game start control process is terminated after executing the fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display on the main display unit 301 and the fluctuation display on the symbol display device 41.

  Here, the data setting process in step S3304 and the change start process in step S3305 will be described in detail below.

  First, the data setting process in step S3304 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the data setting process, first, at step S3401, the number N of starting reserved balls is decremented by one. In subsequent step S3402, the data stored in first holding area RE1 of holding area RE is moved to execution area AE.

Thereafter, in step S3403, a process of shifting data (that is, holding information) stored in each holding area RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first reservation area RE1 and the second The data in each area is shifted such as the reserved area RE2 → the first reserved area RE1, the third reserved area RE3 → the second reserved area RE2, and the fourth reserved area RE4 → the third reserved area RE3.
In the subsequent step S3404, a command at the time of shifting, which is information for making the audio lamp control device 82 recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted, is set. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated. The shift command set in step S3404 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). The voice lamp control device 82 receives the shift command, and executes a process for changing the display on the first hold lamp unit 45 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

  Next, the variation start process in step S3305 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the change start process, first, in step S3501, a success / failure determination process for determining whether or not the hold information corresponding to the current change start process corresponds to the big win is executed. Specifically, the information acquired from the information for jackpot determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped. Then, when the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the grasped information is included in the information corresponding to the jackpot winning with reference to the winning table for the low probability mode in the ROM 203. When the lottery mode is the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the grasped information is included in the information corresponding to the jackpot winning with reference to the high probability mode success / failure table in the ROM 203.

  In the following step S3502, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination process in step S3501 is a result corresponding to the big win. If the result corresponds to the big win, the type determination process is executed in step S3503.

  In the type determination process, the information acquired from the information for type determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the information updated by the big hit type counter C2 is grasped. Further, the distribution table in the ROM 203 is referred to, and it is specified whether or not the above-described grasped type determination information is included in the information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result.

  In a succeeding step S3504, it is determined whether or not the type of the big hit winning in this case is a probable big hit result based on the information specified in the type determining process in the step S3503. If it is a probability variation jackpot result, stop result setting processing for probability variation jackpot is executed in step S3505, and if it is not a probability variation jackpot result, stop result setting processing for normal jackpot is executed in step S3506. If it is determined in step S3502 that it is not a big win, a stop result setting process for losing is executed in step S3507.

  In each stop result setting process of step S3505 to step S3507, information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 301 is specified from information stored in advance in the ROM 203, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 204. Remember. Further, in step S3505 and step S3506, information for specifying in the MPU 202 that the determination result of whether or not this game is successful is a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result is stored in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 ( The information “1” is stored in the corresponding area). Specifically, in step S3505, a probability variation jackpot flag is stored, and in step S3506, a normal jackpot flag is stored.

  After executing any one of steps S3505 to S3507, a variable display time setting process is executed in step S3508.

  In the variation display time setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 60, first, in step S3601, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 231 of the RAM 204 is acquired. , And stored in the register of the MPU 202.

  In the subsequent step S3602, it is determined whether or not reach display is generated in the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. If any flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S3602 as the occurrence of reach display. Even if none of the above flags is stored, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, the occurrence of reach display is generated. In step S3602, an affirmative determination is made. Note that the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 203 is referred to when the presence / absence of reach occurrence is determined using the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3602, the value of the current variation type counter CS is referred to with reference to the reach generation variation display time table stored in the variation display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 in step S3603. In step S3604, the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area (variable display time measuring means) provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3602, the current variation type counter CS of the current variation type counter CS is referred to by referring to the reach non-occurrence variation display time table stored in the variation display time table storage area 223 in step S3605. The variable display time corresponding to the value is acquired, and the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area in step S3606. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  Note that the variable display time information when no reach occurs is set so that the variable display time is shortened as the number N of starting reserved balls increases. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration that does not depend on the number of starting reserved balls N may be used. The smaller the number of starting reserved balls N, the shorter the variation display time is. Also good. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the non-reach time is selected so that the shorter variable display time is selected compared to the situation where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode. Although the generation variation display time table is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variation display time may be the same, or may be opposite to the above relationship. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time at the time of reach occurrence, and the variable display time that is easily selected and the variable display time that is difficult to select are different at the time of jackpot winning and out of reach. It is good also as a structure. Also, a variation display time table for probability variation jackpot, a variation display time table for normal jackpot, a variation display time table for outreach, and a variation display time table for complete losing may be set individually.

  As described above, the variation display time of each game time is determined by using the presence / absence of reach, the number of hold information, and the value of the variation type counter as parameters. However, the variable display time of each game time is the content of other hold information, specifically, jackpot determination information, type determination information and reach determination information included in the other hold information as parameters. Decided without.

  Returning to the description of the change start process (FIG. 59), after the change display time setting process is executed in step S3508, a change start command and a type command are set in step S3509. The change start command includes information on presence / absence of reach and information on change display time. The type command includes game result information. That is, the type command includes, as game result information, information on probability variation jackpot results, information on normal jackpot results, information on miss results, and the like.

  The variation start command and type command set in step S3509 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). Based on the received variation start command and type command, the sound lamp control device 82 determines the light emission pattern of the display lamp unit 63 and the sound output pattern from the speaker unit 64 in the game time, and the content of the determined effect. The display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled so as to be executed. Further, the audio lamp control device 82 transmits the change start command and the type command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form. In the display control device 212, based on the received variation start command and type command, the symbol display device 41 determines the variation display pattern in the symbol display device 41 in the game time and executes the determined variation display pattern. 41 is displayed. Thereafter, in step S3510, the variation display of the pattern is started on the main display unit 301, and then the variation start process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 57), when the main display unit 301 is in the variable display mode, the game times advancing process in steps S3306 to S3309 is executed. In the process for advancing game times, first, in step S3306, it is determined whether or not the current game time fluctuation display time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204 is “0”. As described above, the value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (FIG. 60). The set value of the variable display time information is decremented (subtracted) every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is started.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S3307. In the variable display process, the display mode in the main display unit 301 is changed. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished.

  If the change display time has elapsed, change end processing is executed in step S3308. In the change end process, the information stored in the RAM 204 is specified in any one of the processes in steps S3505 to S3507, and the main display unit 301 displays the pattern corresponding to the information on the main display unit 301. The display of the unit 301 is controlled.

  In a succeeding step S3309, a change end command is set. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished. The change end command set in step S3309 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). The sound lamp control device 82 transmits the received change end command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 212 receives the change end command and displays the final stop symbol combination in the game round in a definitive display (final stop display).

<Game state transition processing>
The gaming state transition process will be described below. The gaming state transition process is executed in the normal process (FIG. 17) in the MPU 202, as in the first embodiment.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 61, first, in step S3701, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S3702, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern on the main display portion 301 of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is finished, it is determined in step S3703 whether or not the game result of the current game time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the normal jackpot flag or the probability variation jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. If none of the above flags is stored, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If any of the above flags is stored, “15” is set in the round counter area RC provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S3704. The round counter area RC is a counter area for counting the number of times that the special winning opening 32a is opened. Thereafter, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S3701, and the process proceeds to step S3705. In step S3705, a special winning opening / closing process is executed. In the big prize opening / closing process, when the big prize opening 32a is closed, the big prize opening is made by setting the variable prize winning device 32c to the drive state on condition that the round counter area RC is “1” or more. 32a is opened. In addition, when the big prize opening 32a is being opened, the variable prize winning device is provided on the condition that a predetermined time has elapsed since the opening of the big prize opening 32a or that a predetermined number of game balls have been won. The driving state of 32c is stopped and the special winning opening 32a is closed.

  In a succeeding step S3706, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is “0”. If the value of the round counter area RC is not “0”, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is. If the value of the round counter area RC is “0”, a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S3707.

  In the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, when the probability variation jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the high probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. Note that these high probability mode and high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big win is won. In addition, when the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode is terminated when the number of game times continues 100 times, and thereafter, the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode.

  Thereafter, in step S3708, after executing the opening / closing execution mode termination processing, the gaming state transition processing is terminated. In the opening / closing execution mode end processing, the stored flag is erased from the normal jackpot flag or the probability variation jackpot flag.

<Processing in MPU 252 of Display Control Device 212>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 252 of the display control apparatus 212 will be described. The processes executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 are roughly classified into a pending command handling process and a variable display control process. Therefore, these processes will be described below.

<Processing for pending command>
The pending command handling process will be described below. The pending command handling process is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec cycle). In the hold command handling process, when a hold command transmitted by the main control device 81 is received, a process corresponding to the information included in the received hold command is executed.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 62, in the hold command handling process, first, in step S3801, it is determined whether a probability change handling hold command or a normal handling hold command has been received. Here, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 receives a command from the sound lamp control device 82, and the received command is temporarily stored in the command storage area 321 of the work RAM 254. The command storage area 321 is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read out from the previously stored commands. Even when a plurality of commands are received at the same time, Processing corresponding to each command can be executed satisfactorily. In the determination in step S3801, it is determined whether or not a probability change corresponding hold command or a normal support hold command has been received in the current read target area in the command storage area 321. It should be noted that this command read configuration is the same for the following command read.

  When the probability change corresponding hold command or the normal response hold command is received, in step S3802, the information on the number of hold included in the command received this time is specified, and the information on the specified hold number is provided in the work RAM 254. Is set in the erase counter area 322. In the subsequent step S3803, it is determined whether or not the big hit hold flag (big hit hold information) is stored in the big hit hold flag storage area (big hit hold information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 333 of the work RAM 254. If the big hit hold flag is stored, the present processing is terminated as it is, and if the big hit hold flag is not stored, the big hit hold flag is stored in step S3804.

  Here, the jackpot holding flag is the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 when the holding information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in the holding information stored in the main control device 81. This is information for identification. If the jackpot hold flag is stored, affirmative determination is made in step S3803 even if a probability change corresponding hold command or a normal correspondence hold command is received, and various kinds of notices for holding a hold notice as a hold notification are made. The setting processing corresponding to jackpot corresponding to setting is not executed. Thereby, even if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is already stored in the main control device 81, even if the hold information acquired based on the new winnings to the operation ports 33 and 34 corresponds to the jackpot winning. Various settings are not made for the hold notice.

  Further, the erasure counter area 322 is a measuring means for specifying the timing for erasing the jackpot hold flag when the jackpot hold flag is stored. As will be described later, the information on the number of holdings set in the erasure counter area 322 is updated so that it is decremented every time a new game is started, and the erasure counter area 322 is updated after the update. When the stored information is the initial value “0”, the big hit hold flag erasing process is executed.

  After the jackpot hold flag is stored in step S3804, in step S3805, the advance notice condition establishment flag storage area (notification condition establishment information storage means or notification condition establishment information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 333 of the work RAM 254 is notified. It is determined whether a condition establishment flag (notification condition establishment information or notification condition establishment information) is stored. The notice condition establishment flag is information for specifying in the MPU 252 whether or not the situation is already set to perform the hold notice, and is stored when the condition for executing the hold notice is established, This information is deleted when a condition for terminating the hold notice is satisfied.

  If the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S3805, and the present response process is terminated. In other words, in a situation where a hold notice is already set, even if a new probability change hold command or a normal support hold command is received, various settings for making a hold notice are not performed.

  If the notice condition establishment flag is not stored, the big deal handling setting process is executed in step S3806, and then this handling process is terminated.

  Here, the jackpot correspondence setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the big hit correspondence setting process, first, in step S3901, a holding notice occurrence lottery process is executed. In the holding notice occurrence lottery process, the counter value (numerical information) for the holding notice occurrence lottery is read from the lottery counter area 323 of the work RAM 254. Here, the lottery counter area 323 is configured to be able to store a counter value of “0 to 99”, and is incremented by 1 every time the pending command handling process (FIG. 62) is started, that is, at a cycle of about 2 msec. In addition to the configuration, the configuration is initialized to “0” after reaching the maximum value. In the pending notice generation lottery process, the lottery table storage area (notice lottery information group storage means) 311 stored in the program ROM 253 is referred to, and the above-described reading is performed. It is determined whether or not the counter value for the hold notice occurrence lottery corresponds to the hold notice occurrence winning. Although the probability of winning the hold notice occurrence is arbitrary, in the pachinko machine 10, in the case of the big hit correspondence setting process, the lottery table is set so that the hold notice occurrence prize is won with a probability of 7/10. .

  In a succeeding step S3902, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in the above step S3901 is a holding notice occurrence winning. If it is not a holding advance notice winning, this setting process is terminated. If it is determined that the holding notice has been generated, the process proceeds to step S3903.

  In step S3903, it is determined whether or not the currently received hold command is a normal correspondence hold command. If it is a normal correspondence pending command, in step S3904, a notice symbol determination process corresponding to a normal jackpot is executed. In the process of determining the symbol for the notice corresponding to the normal jackpot, the type of the symbol used for performing the reservation notice this time is determined from among the symbols assigned with odd numbers which are the main symbols corresponding to the non-specific symbols. Execute the process.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the main control device 81 relates to the change display of symbols in each game time, whether or not there is a big win in each game time, and the type of the jackpot result in the case of a big win In the case of not winning the jackpot, the presence / absence of reach and the variable display time at each game round are determined, and the type of symbol that is finally stopped at the end of each game round and the final stop display are displayed. The display control device 212 determines the variation display pattern up to. In this case, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 uses the symbol update counter area 324 and the symbol information acquisition area 325 provided in the work RAM 254 to determine the type of symbol to be finally stopped and displayed. Yes.

  More specifically, the symbol update counter area 324 is provided with a counter area for the upper symbol row, a counter area for the middle symbol row, and a counter area for the lower symbol row. A counter value corresponding to the number of symbols set in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41 is set. That is, as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 correspond to the fact that 18 symbols are set as the total number of main symbols and sub symbols, and the counter for the upper symbol row is set. A numerical range of “0 to 17” is set in the area and the counter area for the lower symbol row. In addition, in the middle symbol row Z2, 20 counters are set as the total number of main symbols and sub-symbols. A range is set. In the counter area for each symbol row, the counter value is updated at different periods. All information updated in the counter area for each symbol row is acquired at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec), and the acquired information is stored in the symbol information acquisition area 325.

  In this case, in the symbol information acquisition area 325, a normal jackpot area, a probability variation jackpot area, a miss reach area, and a completely miss area are set. Then, it is determined whether or not the information acquired from all the counter areas for each symbol row corresponds to the normal jackpot result, the probability variation jackpot result, the outreach reach, or the complete outage, and the symbol information acquisition area Information on the corresponding area of 325 is updated. When determining the type of symbol to be finally stopped and displayed for game times that are not related to the pending notice, the area corresponding to the game result in each game time is referred to from among the above-mentioned areas of the symbol information acquisition area 325. The symbol display device 41 is controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the information stored in the referenced area is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line.

  Returning to the description of the determination process of the notice symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, in the determination process, the normal jackpot area in the symbol information acquisition area 325 is referred to. In subsequent step S3906, the symbol type information stored in the normal jackpot area is stored in the warning symbol type information storage area 326 provided in the work RAM 254 as the warning symbol type information. Let

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3903 that the hold command received this time is a probability change corresponding hold command, a notice symbol determination process corresponding to the probability change big hit is executed in step S3905. In this process, the probability variation big hit area in the symbol information acquisition area 325 is referred to. In subsequent step S3906, the symbol type information storage area 326 stores the symbol type information stored in the probability variation jackpot area as the symbol information for the warning symbol.

  After executing the process of step S3906, a notice condition satisfaction flag is stored in the work RAM 254 in step S3907. In the subsequent step S3908, information on the number of holds included in the hold command received this time is specified, and the specified information on the number of hold is set in the hold notice counter area 327 provided in the work RAM 254. The holding notice counter area 327 is a measuring means for specifying, in the game time, the holding information corresponding to the setting information that the holding information corresponding to the setting corresponds to the holding information in the MPU 252 when the setting is made so that the holding notice is made. . As will be described later, the information on the number of holdings set in the holding notice counter area 327 is updated to be decremented every time a new game is started, and the holding notice counter area after the update is updated. When the information stored in 327 is “0” which is the initial value, the notice condition establishment flag is erased, and the state set to perform the hold notice is canceled. After executing the process of step S3908, the present setting process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the pending command handling process (FIG. 62), if it is determined in step S3801 that neither the probability change handling pending command nor the normal handling pending command has been received, in step S3807, the outreach handling suspension is performed. Determine whether a command has been received. If the outreach correspondence hold command has not been received, the correspondence processing is terminated as it is. In other words, in the pending command handling process, when a probability change pending command, a normal handling pending command, or an outreach pending command is received among a plurality of types of pending commands, a setting is made to perform a pending notice. However, if the hold command for complete detachment is received, the setting for performing the advance notice is not performed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, when the hold notice is set, the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is acquired based on the winning at the operation ports 33 and 34, or the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is obtained. Even if it is not acquired, it is limited to the case where the hold information corresponding to the occurrence of reach is acquired, and when the hold information corresponding to complete losing is acquired, the setting for performing the hold notice is not performed.

  If it is determined in step S3807 that an outreach reach hold command has been received, it is determined in step S3808 whether a big hit hold flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If the big hit hold flag is stored, the corresponding processing is terminated as it is. As a result, in the situation where the hold information corresponding to the big win is already stored in the main control device 81, the hold information acquired based on the new winnings to the operation ports 33 and 34 corresponds to the reach occurrence winning. However, various settings are not made for the advance notice.

  Here, as already explained, even if a probability change-response hold command or a normal-response hold command is received, if the jackpot hold flag is stored, this hold command response processing is terminated as it is. . In other words, in the present pachinko machine 10, in the situation where the hold information corresponding to the big win is already stored in the main control device 81, regardless of whether or not the hold information is set to be held, Even when a new winning is generated at the operation ports 33 and 34, various settings for performing the advance notice are not performed.

  If it is determined in step S3808 that the big hit hold flag is not stored, it is determined in step S3809 whether a notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S3809, and the present response process is terminated. In other words, in a situation in which a hold advance notice is already set, various settings for making a hold advance notice are not performed even if a new release reach hold command is received.

  Here, as already described, even if the probability change-response hold command or the normal-response hold command is received, if the notice condition establishment flag is stored, the hold command response processing is terminated as it is. did. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10, in the situation where the setting for performing the advance notice is already made, various settings for making the advance notice are performed even if a new winning is generated for the operation ports 33 and 34. I will not.

  If the notice condition satisfaction flag is not stored, a negative determination is made in step S3809, and after the outreach reach setting process is executed in step S3810, the corresponding process is terminated.

  Here, the detachment reach setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the miss reach correspondence setting process, first, in step S4001, a holding notice occurrence lottery process is executed. The processing content of the pending notice generation lottery processing is the same as the processing content described in step S3901. However, in the lottery table stored in the lottery table storage area 311, the probability of winning the holding notice is lower in the case of the outreach correspondence setting process than in the case of the jackpot correspondence setting process (FIG. 63). It is set to be. In the case of such an outlier reach compatible setting process, the probability of winning a holding advance notice is arbitrary, but in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery table is set so that a holding notice occurrence winning is made with a probability of 1/10. Yes.

  In subsequent step S4002, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S4001 is a holding notice occurrence winning. If it is not a holding advance notice winning, this setting process is terminated. If it is determined that the holding notice has been generated, the process proceeds to step S4003.

  In step S4003, a notice symbol determination process corresponding to the detachment reach is executed. In this process, the outreach reach area in the symbol information acquisition area 325 is referred to. In the subsequent step S4004, the information on the type of reach symbol stored in the outlier reach area is stored in the type information storage area 326 of the symbol for warning as type information of the symbol for warning.

  Thereafter, in step S4005, a notice condition satisfaction flag is stored in the work RAM 254. In the subsequent step S4006, information on the number of holds included in the hold command received this time is specified, and the information on the specified number of holds is set in the hold notice counter area 327. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

<Variable display control processing>
The variable display control process will be described below. The variable display control process is started after the pending command handling process (FIG. 62) is executed. Then, in the variation display control process, when the variation start command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received, the symbol display device 41 starts the variation display of symbols for one game time, and from the main control device 81. When the transmitted change end command has been received, a process of displaying the symbol change display as a final stop is executed. Further, in the variable display control process, a process for appropriately correcting the variable display pattern is executed in accordance with the setting for performing the advance notice.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 65, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the symbol display for one game is executed on the symbol display device 41. If the change display of symbols for one game is not performed, it is determined in step S4102 whether or not a change start command transmitted from the main control device 81 has been received. If the fluctuation start command has not been received, the fluctuation display control process is terminated as it is. If the change start command has been received, the change start control process is terminated after the change start process is executed in step S4103.

  On the other hand, if the change display of symbols for one game is being performed, it is determined in step S4104 whether or not a change end command transmitted from the main control device 81 has been received. If the variation end command has not been received, the variation display control processing is terminated after executing the variation processing in step S4105. If the change end command has been received, the change display control process is terminated after executing the change end process in step S4106.

  Hereinafter, the variation start process in step S4103, the mid-variation process in step S4105, and the variation end process in step S4106 will be described in detail.

<Variation start processing>
First, the variation starting process in step S4103 will be described. The variation start process is a process for starting symbol variation display on the symbol display device 41 based on the reception of the variation start command transmitted from the main control device 81.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 66, in step S4201, the fluctuation start command received this time is read out, and information on presence / absence of reach occurrence and fluctuation display time information is specified from the command. Further, as already described, when the main control device 81 transmits a change start command, it also transmits a type command. Therefore, in step S4201, the type command received together with the variation start command received this time is read, and information on game results such as information on probability variation jackpot results, information on normal jackpot results, or information on miss results is specified from the commands. . In step S4201, information on the presence / absence of jackpot winning, information on the type of jackpot in the case of jackpot winning, information on the presence / absence of reach in the case of jackpot not winning, and the variable display time are determined from the identified information. Is stored in the register of the MPU 252.

  In a succeeding step S4202, it is determined whether or not a notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If the notice condition establishment flag is stored, stop result setting processing corresponding to the hold notice is executed in step S4203.

  The stop result setting process corresponding to the hold notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the stop result setting process corresponding to the hold notice, first, in step S4301, the notice symbol type information storage area 326 reads the notice symbol type information. In the subsequent step S4302, it is determined from the information stored in the register of the MPU 252 whether or not a big win is generated in the current game round.

  If a big win is generated, stop line determination processing is executed in step S4303. Here, in this pachinko machine 10, as already described, five effective lines L1 to L5 are set on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, and when a jackpot result is obtained, it is on any effective line. The combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, and even if the jackpot result is not reached, the reach symbol combination is stopped and displayed on any effective line. Furthermore, even when neither the jackpot result nor the reach display is made, when the hold notice is performed, the combination of symbols for the hold notice is stopped and displayed on any active line. In this case, in the stop line determination process, a process for determining an effective line for stopping and displaying the combination of the various symbols is executed.

  In the stop line determination process, a line information update area 328 provided in the work RAM 254 is used. Specifically, a numerical value range of “0 to 4” is set in the line information update area 328 in correspondence with the number of valid lines L1 to L5, and the counter value in the numerical value range is set at a predetermined cycle. Update is performed. In the stop line determination process, the numerical information stored in the line information update area 328 at that time is acquired.

  In the subsequent step S4304, a symbol combination determination process is executed. In this process, the combination information table in the combination information table storage area 313 provided in the program ROM 253 is referred to, and the jackpot symbol combination information corresponding to the notification symbol type information grasped in step S4301 is specified. In this case, information on the same symbol combination corresponding to the symbol information on the notice symbol is specified.

  In subsequent step S4305, stop information address information storage processing is executed. Specifically, the program ROM 253 is provided with a stop information table storage area 312 as stop information group storage means, and the stop information table storage area 312 stores a stop information table as a stop information group. . In the stop information table, information on the combination of each stop symbol with respect to the information on each active line is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the address information. In the storage process of the stop information address in step S4305, the address information corresponding to the stop line information specified in step S4303 and the jackpot symbol combination information specified in step S4304 is read from the stop information table. The read stop information address information is stored in a stop information address storage area 329 provided in the work RAM 254.

  If it is determined in step S4302 that the big win is not generated, it is determined in step S4306 whether or not a reach display is generated in the current game round from the information stored in the register of the MPU 252.

  If reach display occurs, stop line determination processing is executed in step S4307. That is, the numerical information stored in the line information update area 328 at that time is acquired.

  In the subsequent step S4308, a symbol combination determination process is executed. In this process, the combination information table in the combination information table storage area 313 is referred to, and the information on the reach symbol combination corresponding to the notice symbol type information grasped in step S4301 is specified. In this case, on the condition that the combination of jackpot symbols is not stopped on any active line, the final stop symbol sequence, that is, the symbol type of the middle symbol sequence Z2, is the effective line on which the reach line is formed. Reach symbol combination information is identified with reference to the stop line information identified in step S4307 so that symbols of the same type as symbols constituting the reach symbol combination are stopped at different stop display positions. . For example, when the type information of the notice symbol is “7” and the stop line is L1, the reach symbol combination is “7”, “6”, “7” from the top. Identify the combination information. In this case, the symbol “7” is stopped and displayed on the active line L3 in the middle symbol row Z2. In the combination information table of the combination information table storage area 313, the information on the combination of reach symbols is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the information on each active line and the information on the type of notice symbol.

  In subsequent step S4309, storage processing of address information of stop information is executed. That is, the address information corresponding to the stop line information specified in step S4307 and the reach symbol combination information specified in step S4308 is read from the stop information table in the stop information table storage area 312 and read. The stop information address information is stored in the stop information address storage area 329.

  If it is determined in step S4306 that reach display does not occur, stop line determination processing is executed in step S4310. That is, the numerical information stored in the line information update area 328 at that time is acquired.

  In a succeeding step S4311, a symbol combination determination process is executed. In this process, the combination information table in the combination information table storage area 313 is referred to, and the information on the combination of completely out-of-combination symbols corresponding to the notice symbol type information grasped in step S4301 is specified. In this case, on the condition that the combination of jackpot symbol and reach symbol is not stopped on all active lines, the symbols corresponding to the type information of the notice symbol are stopped in the display screen G in all symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In order to stop display at the display position, the information on the combination of completely deviated symbols is specified with reference to the information on the stop line specified in step S4310. For example, when the type information of the notice symbol is “7” and the stop line is L1, the combination of the completely deviated symbols is “7” from the top, and the sub symbols between “6” and “7”. , Information on the combination of completely out-of-line symbols is specified so as to be a sub symbol between “6” and “7”. In this case, the symbol “7” is stopped and displayed on the effective line L3 in the middle symbol row Z2, and the symbol “7” is stopped and displayed on the effective line L3 in the lower symbol row Z3. In the combination information table of the combination information table storage area 313, the information of the completely out of symbol combination is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the information on each active line and the information on the type of the notice symbol.

  In a succeeding step S4312, a storage process of the stop information address information is executed. That is, the address information corresponding to the information of the stop line specified in step S4310 and the information of the combination of completely out of symbol specified in step S4311 is read from the stop information table in the stop information table storage area 312 and read. The stop information address information is stored in the stop information address storage area 329.

  After executing the process of step S4305, step S4309, or step S4312, the process proceeds to step S4313. In step S 4313, the notice execution flag (notice execution information) is stored in the notice execution flag storage area (notice execution information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 333 of the work RAM 254. The advance notice flag is information for specifying in the MPU 252 that the symbol display device 41 is executing a hold advance notice. Thereafter, the stop result setting process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 66), if it is determined in step S4202 that the notice condition establishment flag is not stored, a stop result setting process not corresponding to the hold notice is executed in step S4204. . In this case, the information stored in the line information update area 328 at that time is read as stop line information, and the normal jackpot area in the symbol information acquisition area 325 and the probability variation jackpot are used as symbol combination information. Among the area, the outreach area, and the complete outage area, information stored at that time is read into an area corresponding to the game result of the current game round. Then, the address information corresponding to the specified stop line information and symbol combination information is read from the stop information table in the stop information table storage area 312 and the read address information is stored in the stop information address storage area 329. Store.

  After executing the process of step S4203 or step S4204, the variable display pattern setting process is executed in step S4205. In the variable display pattern setting process, referring to the variable display pattern table (variable display mode information group) 314 as the variable display pattern table storage area (variable display mode information group storage unit) 314 provided in the program ROM 253, step S4201 is performed. The variable display pattern information corresponding to both the variable display time information stored in the MPU 252 register and the information stored in the stop information address storage area 329 in step S4203 or step S4204 is specified.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, the variable display pattern table sets the variable display pattern information in one-to-one correspondence with any combination of the variable display time information and the stop information. In addition, address information is set corresponding to the information of each variable display pattern. In the variable display pattern setting process in step S4205, the address information corresponding to the combination of the variable display time information and the stop information already specified in the variable display pattern table is specified in the variable display pattern table. The data is stored in the pattern information address storage area 330 provided in the RAM 254.

  By storing the variable display pattern address information in the pattern information address storage area 330, the MPU 252 generates an internal command for the VDP 255 in an internal command output process (not shown) different from the process for starting the fluctuation. Then, the symbol display device 41 is driven so that the symbol variation display corresponding to the variation display pattern set this time is performed. In this case, the output process of the internal command is started repeatedly at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec), and in the output process of the internal command, the internal command corresponding to the information of the set variation display pattern is displayed as a symbol. Generated according to the elapsed time from the start of the variable display, and outputs the generated internal command to the VDP 255. The VDP 255 reads image data from the character ROM 256 according to the internal command, and writes the read image data to the video RAM 257. Thereby, the symbol display corresponding to the variable display pattern set this time is performed on the symbol display device 41.

  Note that the information on the variation display pattern stored in the variation display pattern table includes not only the contents of the variation display of the symbol, but also the background image information displayed together with the variation display of the symbol and the reach effect. Information on the image of reach production is also included. Therefore, when an internal command corresponding to the set variation sign pattern is output to the VDP 255, a background image is displayed together with a variation display of symbols, and further, when various effects such as reach effects are performed, An effect image is displayed.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and it is distinguished between symbol display pattern information (first display pattern information) and other display pattern information (second display pattern information). Only the information on the variable display mode is included, and the information on the other display pattern may include information on the background image and information on the image of reach when the reach effect is performed. In this case, at the time of correcting the variable display pattern, which will be described later, both the symbol display pattern information and the other display pattern information may be corrected, or only the symbol display pattern information may be corrected. Furthermore, the symbol display pattern information is individually provided for each of the upper symbol row Z1 as the first symbol row, the middle symbol row Z2 as the second symbol row, and the lower symbol row Z3 as the third symbol row. It is good also as the composition set up. In this case, at the time of correcting the later-described variable display pattern, only the symbol display pattern information of the symbol sequence to be corrected may be corrected.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 66), after the variation display pattern setting process is executed in step S4205, the flag deletion process is executed in step S4206, and then the variation start process is terminated. Note that the various information stored in the register of the MPU 252 in step S4201 is deleted when the variation start process is terminated.

  Here, the flag erasing process of step S4206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the flag erasing process, first, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not a big hit hold flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If the big hit hold flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S4405 without executing the processes in steps S4402 to S4404. If the big hit hold flag is stored, in step S4402, the information in the erasure counter area 322 is updated so that the value stored in the erasure counter area 322 is decremented by one.

  Thereafter, in step S4403, it is determined whether or not the value of the erasure counter area 322 is “0”. If it is “0”, the jackpot hold flag is erased in step S4404, and then the process proceeds to step S4405. If it is not “0”, step S4405 is not executed without executing the process of step S4404. Proceed to

  The jackpot hold flag is a flag that is stored when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in the hold information stored in the main controller 81 as described above, and is deleted. In the counter area 322, information for specifying the order in which the hold information is the start target of the game times when the hold information corresponding to the big win is stored is stored. Furthermore, in the hold command response process (FIG. 62), the process of step S3802 is executed at the timing before the process of step S3803 is executed, so that the hold information stored in the main controller 81 is stored. If there is a plurality of pieces of hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning, the information on the order of the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning in which the start target is the later order is stored in the erasing counter area 322. It becomes. Therefore, when the information in the erasure counter area 322 is “0” as an initial value, the hold information stored in the main control device 81 is held and the hold information corresponding to the big win is included. In this case, the jackpot hold flag is cleared.

  In the flag erasing process, in step S4405, it is determined whether or not a notice condition satisfaction flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If the notice condition satisfaction flag is not stored, the flag erasing process is terminated as it is. If the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored, the information in the hold advance notice counter area 327 is updated so that the value stored in the hold advance notice counter area 327 is decremented by 1 in step S4406. To do.

  Thereafter, in step S4407, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter area for holding notice 327 is “0”. If it is “0”, the notice condition establishment flag is erased in step S4408, and then the flag erasure process is terminated. If it is not “0”, the process of step S4408 is executed. This flag erasing process is terminated without any processing.

  As described above, the notice condition establishment flag is a flag stored when the condition for executing the hold notice is established, and the condition for executing the hold notice is established in the counter area for holding notice 327. In this case, information for specifying the order in which the hold information that is the cause of the establishment of the condition is the start order of the game times is stored. Therefore, when the information in the counter notice area 327 for holding notice becomes “0” as an initial value, the holding information that has caused the establishment of the condition for executing the notice of holding has already become a target for starting game times. In this case, the notice condition satisfaction flag is deleted.

<Variation processing>
Next, the mid-variation process in step S4105 in the variation display control process (FIG. 65) will be described. The variable processing is not a game time in which a hold notice is being executed, and a new winning is given to the operation ports 33 and 34 in the middle of a game time that is not a game time related to the hold information that causes the hold notice to be executed. This is a process for executing the hold notice at the current game number when the hold notice execution condition is established for the hold information acquired based on the winning.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 70, in step S4501, it is determined whether or not the current game time is a game game with a jackpot or reach occurrence. In the case of a big hit or reach game time, the mid-variation process is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit or reach game time, the notice execution flag is not stored in the work RAM 254 even though the notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254 in step S4502. It is determined whether or not. Here, in this pachinko machine 10, as described above, the notice execution flag is stored by executing the change start process (FIG. 66) in a situation where the notice condition establishment flag is stored. Therefore, the situation in which the notice execution flag is not stored even though the notice condition establishment flag is stored is the situation in which the change display of symbols in one game round is started after the change start process is executed. Later, a new winning is generated for the operation ports 33 and 34, which means that the condition for executing the holding notice for the holding information acquired based on the winning is established.

  If the notice condition establishment flag is stored and the notice execution flag is not stored, the mid-variation process is terminated as it is, the notice condition establishment flag is stored, and the notice execution flag is stored. If not, in step S4503, the notification symbol type information storage area 326 reads the notification symbol type information. In the subsequent step S4504, it is determined whether or not all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 are changing at high speed.

  Here, in this pachinko machine 10, when the symbol display is performed on the symbol display device 41, as shown in FIGS. 72 (a) to (c), first, the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and High-speed fluctuation display (or first speed display) is performed so that identification of each symbol displayed in the display screen G in all the symbol sequences in the lower symbol column Z3 is impossible or difficult in appearance. Thereafter, when the period of T1 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, first, with respect to the upper symbol row Z1, each symbol displayed in the display screen G in the upper symbol row Z1 is easily identified in appearance. The display is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display (or the second speed display slower than the first speed display), and the fluctuation display in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped when the period T2 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. In addition, when the period of T2 has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation in this way, for the lower symbol row Z3, identification of each symbol displayed in the display screen G in the lower symbol row Z3 is easy in appearance. Thus, the high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display, and the fluctuation display in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped when the period T3 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. In addition, when the period of T3 has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation in this way, in the middle symbol row Z2, it is easy to identify each symbol displayed in the display screen G in the middle symbol row Z2. Thus, the high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display. Then, when the period T4 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation display in the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped.

  In the above configuration, except for the case where predetermined reach display is performed, the period of T1, T2, T3, and T4 is more detailed in accordance with each variable display pattern stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 314. Are determined in a one-to-one correspondence with each variation display pattern. Then, the reach effect or the like is performed after the period T3 has elapsed and until the period T4 has elapsed.

  Note that it is not essential that the timing at which the symbol variation display in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and the timing at which the symbol variation display speed in the lower symbol row Z3 is switched at the same time. Good. Similarly, it is not essential that the timing at which the change display of the symbol in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and the timing at which the change display speed of the symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is switched are not the same. It may be. Further, T1, T2, and T3 correspond one-to-one with the number of holding information stored at the start of game times, more specifically, according to the number of holding information stored at the start of game times. It is good also as a structure defined as follows. Further, when the number of pieces of holding information stored at the start of the game round is the maximum number of holdings, any of T1, T2, and T3 may be set to “0”.

  The MPU 252 measures the time from the start of symbol variation display on the symbol display device 41 using an elapsed time counter area 331 as an elapsed time measuring means (or elapsed period measuring means) provided in the work RAM 254. Specifically, when the variable display is started, an addition process of the elapsed time counter area 331 is executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec). Further, in the elapsed time table of the elapsed time table storage area 315 provided in the program ROM 253, information on each counter value corresponding to the above T1, T2, T3 is information on the variable display pattern that can be set at the start of game times. And stored in a one-to-one correspondence with each other. In step S4504, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the current elapsed time counter area 331 is less than the counter value corresponding to T1 in the elapsed time table storage area 315. It is determined whether or not the columns Z1 to Z3 are changing at high speed.

  If it is determined in step S4504 that all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 are changing at high speed, the first stage correction table as the first stage correction information group is referred to in step S4505. The first stage correction table is stored in a correction table storage area 316 serving as a correction information group storage means provided in the program ROM 253. As shown in FIG. 71 (a), the first stage correction table is an arbitrary combination of the information of the original variable display pattern and the type information of the notice symbol, except when the jackpot result and reach display occur. The first correction variation display pattern information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each combination, and the address information is set in correspondence with each first correction variation display pattern information. Yes. In this case, all of the information on the first correction variation display pattern is set as information on the variation display pattern after the period T1 has elapsed from the start of the variation. However, the information of the first correction variation display pattern is set so as not to change the variation display time in the initially set variation display pattern.

  In subsequent step S4506, first correction address information (first correction information) corresponding to the combination of the type information of the notice symbol specified in step S4503 and the information stored in the storage area 330 of the pattern information address. ) Is specified from the first stage correction table, and the specified address information is stored in the correction information address storage area 332 provided in the work RAM 254.

  After the first correction address information is stored in the correction information address storage area 332, the MPU 252 determines that the period of T1 has elapsed from the start of fluctuation based on the information in the elapsed time counter area 331. Then, an internal command is generated and output to the VDP 255 so that the symbol variation display corresponding to the information of the first correction variation display pattern set this time is performed. As a result, when the variable display of symbols is stopped, all the symbols corresponding to the type information of the notice symbol are displayed on condition that the combination of jackpot symbols and reach symbols are not stopped on all active lines. The symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G.

  The information of the first correction variation display pattern stored in the first stage correction table includes not only the content of the symbol variation display but also the information of the background image displayed together with the symbol variation display, Information on the image of the reach effect when the reach effect is performed is also included. Therefore, by outputting an internal command corresponding to the set variation sign pattern for the first correction to the VDP 255, a background image is displayed together with a variation display of symbols, and various effects such as reach effects are performed. If it is displayed, the effect image is displayed. The same applies to information on the second correction variable display pattern and information on the third correction variable display pattern, which will be described later.

  Thereafter, after the advance notice flag is stored in the work RAM 254 in step S4507, the mid-variation process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S4504 that all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 are not changing at high speed, it is determined in step S4508 whether the lower symbol sequence Z3 is changing at high speed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current value stored in the elapsed time counter area 331 is less than the counter value corresponding to T2 in the elapsed time table storage area 315.

  If it is determined that the lower symbol row Z3 is changing at high speed, the stop symbol type information of the upper symbol row Z1 is obtained based on the information stored in the storage area 329 of the stop information address in step S4509. To grasp. In this case, there is a case where there are one main symbol and two cases as the type information of the stop symbol, but in the case of one, it is specified as a symbol to be determined. Both of them are specified as symbols to be determined.

  In a succeeding step S4510, it is determined whether or not a correction condition is established for the determination target symbol specified in the step S4509. The correction condition is set so that if the notice symbol type information is a specific symbol, that is, an odd-numbered symbol, it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied regardless of the symbol to be determined. In addition, when the type information of the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, an even-numbered symbol, it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied only when the determination target symbol is a non-specific symbol. Is set to

  By setting the correction conditions as described above, a jackpot result is generated or a reach display is generated due to a non-specific symbol in the game times related to the hold information that has caused the establishment of the condition for executing the hold notice. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the hold notice from being executed by the specific symbol in the game times related to the hold notice before the game times. If a hold notice is executed for a specific symbol, the player is expected to expect a probabilistic jackpot result that will eventually cause the same specific symbol combination to stop on the active line. However, if a combination of reach symbols or jackpot symbols is finally displayed by a non-specific symbol, there is a concern that the above feeling of expectation will be lost and the willingness to continue playing will be reduced. This can be prevented by the configuration in FIG. On the other hand, if a reach symbol combination or a jackpot symbol combination is finally displayed by a specific symbol, even if a hold notification is executed by a non-specific symbol in the game times related to the previous hold notification, For a player, it can be considered that the player has finally been promoted from a non-specific symbol to a specific symbol, and this is considered not to cause a decrease in the willingness to continue the game as described above.

  Note that if the type information of the notice symbol is a specific symbol, that is, an odd-numbered symbol, it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied only when the determination target symbol is a specific symbol. In addition, if the type information of the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, an even-numbered symbol, it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied only when the determination target symbol is a non-specific symbol. May be set. In this case, if a jackpot result is generated by a non-specific symbol or a reach display is generated in the game times related to the hold information that has caused the condition to execute the hold notification, the non-specific symbol is notified. If a jackpot result is generated by a specific symbol or a reach display is generated in the game times related to the holding information that causes the condition to execute the holding notification, the holding notification is performed by the specific symbol It will be.

  If it is determined in step S4510 that the correction condition is not satisfied, the mid-variation process is terminated, and if it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S4511.

  In step S4511, the second stage correction table as the second stage correction information group stored in the correction table storage area 316 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 71 (b), the second stage correction table includes information on the initial variable display pattern and the type information of the determination target symbol except when a jackpot result and reach display occur. Information on the second correction variation display pattern is set in correspondence with an arbitrary combination on a one-to-one basis, and address information is set in correspondence with information on each second correction variation display pattern. ing. In this case, all of the information on the second correction variation display pattern is set as information on the variation display pattern after the period T2 has elapsed from the start of the variation. However, the information of the variable display pattern for each second correction is set so as not to change the variable display time in the initially set variable display pattern.

  In the subsequent step S4512, the second correction purpose corresponding to the combination of the symbol type information of the determination target determined to satisfy the correction condition in step S4510 and the information stored in the pattern information address storage area 330. Address information (second correction information) is specified from the second-stage correction table, and the specified address information is stored in the correction information address storage area 332.

  If two symbols are subject to determination and the correction condition is satisfied for any of the symbols, the determination target for which the correction condition is satisfied for the symbol corresponding to the specific symbol It is comprised so that it may become a design of. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol corresponding to the non-specific symbol may be configured to be the symbol to be determined that the correction condition is satisfied. Moreover, you may comprise so that the symbol of the side with a small attached | subject number may be made into the symbol of the determination object determined that the said correction conditions are satisfied.

  By storing the second correction address information in the correction information address storage area 332, the MPU 252 determines that the period T2 has elapsed from the start of the change based on the information in the elapsed time counter area 331. An internal command is generated and output to the VDP 255 so that the symbol variation display corresponding to the information of the second correction variation display pattern set this time is performed. As a result, when the symbol variation display is stopped, it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied on the condition that the combination of the jackpot symbol and the reach symbol combination is not stopped on all active lines. The target symbol is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  Thereafter, after the notice execution flag is stored in the work RAM 254 in step S4513, the mid-variation process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S4508 that the lower symbol row Z3 is not changing at high speed, it is determined in step S4514 whether the middle symbol row Z2 is changing at high speed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current value stored in the elapsed time counter area 331 is less than the counter value corresponding to T3 in the elapsed time table storage area 315.

  When it is determined that the middle symbol row Z2 is not changing at high speed, the changing processing is ended as it is. If it is determined that the middle symbol row Z2 is changing at high speed, in step S4515, based on the information stored in the stop information address storage area 329, the stop symbol type information of the upper symbol row Z1 and And grasping the type information of the lower symbol row Z3. In this case, there are cases where there is one main symbol and two cases as the stop symbol type information of the upper symbol row Z1, but in the case of one, it is used as the symbol to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1. In the case of two, both are specified as symbols to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1. In addition, there are cases where there is one main symbol and two cases as stop symbol type information in the lower symbol row Z3, but in the case of one, it is specified as the symbol to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3. In the case of two, both are specified as the symbols to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3.

  In a succeeding step S4516, it is determined whether or not a correction condition is established for the determination target symbol specified in the step S4515. The correction condition is determined that the correction condition is satisfied when there is no common symbol of the same type in the symbols to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1 and the symbols to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3. It is set not to be. Even if there is a common symbol of the same type, if the type information of the notice symbol is a specific symbol, that is, an odd-numbered symbol, any of the common symbols of the same type If it is set so that the correction condition is satisfied even if it exists, and the type information of the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, an even-numbered symbol, It is set so that the correction condition is determined to be satisfied only when the symbol is a non-specific symbol.

  By determining that the correction condition is satisfied when there is a common symbol of the same type, it is possible to perform the hold notice in the already described mode. Further, by determining whether or not the correction condition is established in relation to the type information of the notice symbol as described above, the same function and effect as those described in step S4510 can be achieved. It should be noted that the correction condition related to the relationship with the type information of the notice symbol may be the other pattern described in step S4510.

  If it is determined in step S4516 that the correction condition is not satisfied, the mid-variation process is terminated, and if it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S4517.

  In step S4517, the third-stage correction table as the third-stage correction information group stored in the correction table storage area 316 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 71 (c), the third stage correction table includes information on the initial variable display pattern and the type information of the symbol to be determined except when a jackpot result and reach display occur. The information of the third correction variation display pattern is set in a one-to-one correspondence with an arbitrary combination, and the address information is set in correspondence with the information of the third correction variation display pattern. ing. In this case, all of the information on the third correction variation display pattern is set as information on the variation display pattern after the period T3 has elapsed from the start of the variation. However, the information of the variation display pattern for each third correction is set so as not to change the variation display time in the variation display pattern that was initially set.

  In the subsequent step S4518, the third correction use corresponding to the combination of the symbol type information of the determination target determined to satisfy the correction condition in step S4516 and the information stored in the pattern information address storage area 330. Address information (third correction information) is specified from the third-stage correction table, and the specified address information is stored in the correction information address storage area 332.

  After the third correction address information is stored in the correction information address storage area 332, the MPU 252 determines that the period T3 has elapsed from the start of fluctuation based on the information in the elapsed time counter area 331. An internal command is generated and output to the VDP 255 so that the symbol variation display corresponding to the information of the third correction variation display pattern set this time is performed. As a result, when the symbol variation display is stopped, it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied on the condition that the combination of the jackpot symbol and the reach symbol combination is not stopped on all active lines. The target symbol is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  Thereafter, after the advance notice flag is stored in the work RAM 254 in step S4519, the mid-variation process is terminated.

  In addition, it is not essential for the mid-variation processing to have a configuration in which the change display pattern for holding notice is not corrected in both the jackpot game number and the reach game number. Although the change display pattern for the hold notice is not corrected in the game, the change display pattern for the hold notice may be corrected in the game times where the reach has occurred. In addition, by executing the processing of step S4510 and step S4516, the type of the stop symbol and the type of the notification symbol of the symbol sequence for which the high-speed fluctuation display has already been completed are compared, and the notification symbol becomes the normal jackpot result. When the corresponding non-specific symbol and the stop symbol is a specific symbol corresponding to the probability change jackpot result, the change display pattern is not corrected, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if it is a non-specific symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot result and the stop symbol is a specific symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result, the variable display pattern may be corrected.

<Situation when the change display pattern is corrected and the hold notice is executed>
Here, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 72, a description will be given of a case where the change display pattern is corrected and the hold notice is executed.

  FIG. 72 (A) shows a case where the execution condition for the hold notice is satisfied when all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 are changing at high speed. In this case, the execution condition of the holding notice is established from the timing t1 which is the timing of the start of the change to the timing t2 when the period T1 elapses. In this situation, the symbol variation display is performed based on the original variation display pattern from the timing t1 to the timing t2, and the symbol variation display is performed based on the correction variation display pattern after the timing t2.

  FIG. 72 (B) shows a case where the execution condition of the hold notice is satisfied when high-speed fluctuation is not performed in the upper symbol row Z1, but high-speed fluctuation is performed in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3. Indicates. In this case, the execution condition of the hold notice is established from the timing t2 when the period T1 elapses to the timing t3 when the period T2 elapses. In such a situation, the symbol variation display is performed based on the original variation display pattern from the timing t1 to the timing t3, and the symbol variation display is performed based on the correction variation display pattern after the timing t3.

  FIG. 72 (C) shows a case where the execution condition of the hold notice is satisfied when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are not changed at high speed but the middle symbol row Z2 is changed at high speed. Indicates. In this case, the execution condition of the hold notice is established from the timing t3 when the period T2 elapses to the timing t4 when the period T3 elapses. In this situation, the symbol variation display is performed based on the original variation display pattern from the timing t1 to the timing t4, and the symbol variation display is performed based on the correction variation display pattern after the timing t4.

  72A to 72C exemplify the case where the initial variation display patterns are all the same, but in any of FIGS. 72A to 72C, the variation start (timing of t1). ) To the end of change (timing at t5), T4 is the same.

<Variation end processing>
Next, the variation end processing in step S4106 in the variation display control processing (FIG. 65) will be described.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 73, in step S4601, the final stop display command output process is executed. As a result, a final stop display command is output to the VDP 255, and a stop result symbol in the current game round is finally stopped and displayed.

  In a succeeding step S4602, it is determined whether or not a notice execution flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If the advance notice flag is not stored, the process for ending the change is terminated as it is. If the advance notice execution flag is stored, the notice execution flag is deleted in step S4603, and then the change end process is completed. The process ends.

<Specific mode of reservation notice>
Next, a specific aspect of the hold notice in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific mode of the hold notice. FIG. 74 shows a case where a jackpot result is generated by the symbol “7” of the specific symbol in the game times related to the holding information that has caused the establishment of the condition for executing the holding notice. This shows a case where there are two game times related to the pending notice until the game times.

  FIG. 74 (a) shows a case in which a variable display pattern for holding notice is set from the beginning of game times in all game times related to holding notice. In this case, the symbol suspension result in the first game shown in FIG. 74 (a-1) is that the jackpot symbol combination and reach symbol combination are not stopped on all active lines. The symbol “7” as a symbol is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  In addition, as for the symbol stop result in the next game round shown in FIG. 74 (a-2), the jackpot symbol combination and the reach symbol combination are not stopped on all the active lines, but the symbol for the preliminary announcement of this pending notice is not stopped. The symbol “7” is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3. However, the position where the symbol “7” is stopped and displayed is different between the first game time and the next game time. Thereby, the stop mode of the symbol in the hold notice is diversified.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the symbol for the hold notice is always stopped and displayed at the same stop display position in the case of the hold notice except for the final game times related to the hold notice. In this case, as shown in FIG. 74 (a-1), for the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, the symbols for holding notice may be stopped and displayed on the same active line. . The same applies to other patterns.

  Thereafter, in the final game round shown in FIG. 74 (a-3), the combination of jackpot symbols with the symbol of “7” is stopped and displayed on one active line. That is, in the pattern shown in FIG. 74 (a), the symbol for notice is unified to the symbol "7" in all game times related to the pending notice.

  FIG. 74 (b) shows a case in which a variable display pattern for holding notice is set from the middle of the game times in the first game times of each game time related to the holding notice. In this case, the symbol stop result in the first game shown in FIG. 74 (b-1) is that the combination of jackpot symbol and reach symbol is not stopped on all active lines, but the initial variation display pattern The symbol “3” corresponding to the stop symbol of the symbol row Z1 or the stop symbol of the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  In addition, the symbol stop result in the next game round shown in FIG. 74 (b-2) is that the jackpot symbol combination and the reach symbol combination are not stopped on all the active lines, but the notice symbol for the current hold notice. The symbol “7” is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  Thereafter, in the final game round shown in FIG. 74 (b-3), the combination of jackpot symbols based on the symbol “7” is stopped and displayed on one active line. That is, in the pattern shown in FIG. 74 (b), the notice symbol is unified with the specific symbol in all game times related to the pending notice.

  FIG. 74 (c) also shows a case where a change display pattern for holding notice is set from the middle of the game times in the first game time of each game time related to the notice of holding similarly to FIG. 74 (b). In this case, the symbol stop result in the first game round shown in FIG. 74 (c-1) is that the jackpot symbol combination and reach symbol combination are not stopped on all active lines, but the initial variation display pattern The symbol “6” corresponding to the stop symbol of the symbol row Z1 or the stop symbol of the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  In addition, the symbol stop result in the next game round shown in FIG. 74 (c-2) shows that the jackpot symbol combination and the reach symbol combination are not stopped on all the active lines, but the notice symbol for this pending notice is not stopped. The symbol “7” is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  Thereafter, in the final game round shown in FIG. 74 (c-3), the combination of jackpot symbols with the symbol “7” is stopped and displayed on one active line. In other words, in the pattern shown in FIG. 74 (c), the player can expect that the stop result is promoted from the non-specific symbol to the specific symbol in the next game cycle related to the reservation notice.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The hold notice corresponding to the hold information that is stored in the hold area RE of the hold ball storage area 302 and that is not the target of the determination is executed in the game times before the game times related to the hold information. Sometimes. As a result, for the player, a game that causes a game ball to be awarded to the operation ports 33 and 34, and a game that confirms whether or not the hold information obtained based on the win is determined in the game times related to the hold information. In addition, when a plurality of hold information is stored in the hold area RE, the content of the hold notice indicates the result when the turn determination target is the success / failure determination result for the subsequent hold information. The game of predicting according to the game is added, and the game is diversified. Thereby, the attention degree of a game can be raised.

  In addition, when a new winning to the operation ports 33 and 34 occurs during the game round, a pending notice regarding the pending information acquired based on the winning may be performed in the gaming round. As a result, when a hold notice is made, it becomes possible to shorten the time from when a winning is made to the operation ports 33 and 34 until the hold notice is made about it. The opportunity to confirm is increased.

  The reservation notice is made according to the display mode on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. As a result, if the player pays attention to the display screen G in an attempt to grasp the result of the determination of each game time, he / she can check the hold notice by itself, Is suppressed from being overlooked. In addition, since the holding notice is performed according to the change display pattern of each game time on the display screen G, the effect of preventing the holding notice from being overlooked is enhanced. In particular, since the advance notice of suspension is performed according to the mode of the stop result in the display of fluctuations in the symbols of each game time, the timing at which the advance notice is made becomes clear for the player, and the possibility of missing the advance notice is further reduced. The

  In the configuration in which the holding notice is made according to the mode of the stop result as described above, when a new winning occurs to the operation ports 33 and 34 during the game round as described above, it is acquired based on the winning. There is a case where a reservation notice about the hold information is made at the game round. For example, as compared with a configuration in which a stop notice stop result mode is always set at the start of a game, the timing at which a hold stop result result is set is irregular. Thereby, diversification of the mode of reservation notice is achieved.

  Furthermore, a new winning is generated in the operation ports 33 and 34 in the middle of the game round, and a reservation notice about the hold information acquired based on the winning is acquired based on the winning as a condition for the game round. The timing at which the held information is set as a trigger for execution of the holding notice is based on the condition that the elapsed time of the game times is within a predetermined period. As a result, when the mode of the stop result in the symbol display device 41 is changed to the mode of the stop result for holding notice during the game round, the change is made while adapting to the mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. It can be performed.

  Even if a change notice display of a symbol is made during the game round while the symbol fluctuation display is being performed, the symbol variable display time already determined in the game round is not changed. As a result, the time required to digest each game time may vary in a configuration in which a holding notice may be given at that game time even while the symbol display is changing. Is suppressed. In addition, if the game display where the hold notice is made is set with a variable display pattern for the hold notice from the beginning of the game time, the contents of the hold information set as the trigger for the hold notice will not be reflected. The variable display time was determined. As a result, in the configuration in which the hold notice can be performed, the time required to digest each game time varies depending on the content of the hold information set to trigger the hold notice. It is suppressed.

  For example, when a hold notice is made, if a variable display time longer than normal is selected or a variable display time shorter than normal is selected, each game time is digested in a situation where a hold notice is given. The time required for this becomes longer or shorter. Then, according to the adjustment method of the angle and direction of the nail provided in the game area, the game hole in which the winning to the operating ports 33 and 34 is relatively likely to occur, and the winning to the operating ports 33 and 34 are made. There is a possibility that a difference occurs in the digestion rate of the game times per unit time with the game hall where it is relatively difficult to generate. In other words, in the former game hall, there is a high possibility that a plurality of pieces of hold information are already stored at the timing when the hold information that triggers the execution of the hold notice is stored, while in the latter game hall, the possibility is high. Low. In this case, if a variable display time longer than normal is selected, the digestion rate of game times per unit time in the former game hole is lower than that of the latter game hole, and a variable display time shorter than normal is selected. If this is the case, the rate of game times per unit time in the former game hall will be higher than that in the latter game hall. On the other hand, by making the hold notice be made without affecting the variable display time, the hold notice was made without affecting the digestion rate of game times per unit time. An effect can be obtained.

  When displaying the suspension result for holding notice in the game round while the symbol variation display is being performed, the variation variation display for correction stored in advance in the correction table storage area 316 of the program ROM 253 This is done by setting pattern information. The information on the variable display pattern for correction is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the information on the variable display pattern that can be set at the start of the game times, and changes after a predetermined variable display time in each game time. It is set as a display pattern. As a result, the display control device 212 is used when changing the stop result mode that has already been set in the middle of the symbol variation display while the symbol variation display time that has already been determined is not changed. In the MPU 252, information on the correction display pattern for correction corresponding to the already set display pattern may be set. Therefore, it is not necessary for the MPU 252 to calculate the remaining time of the variable display and to generate information on the variable display pattern based on the calculation result, and the processing load can be reduced.

  When the symbol display is performed in the symbol display device 41, the change display is stopped after switching from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. In this case, when changing the mode of the stop result that has already been set in the middle of the symbol variation display, the variation display pattern after the switching timing to the low-speed variation display is displayed for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. This is done by changing to a variable display pattern for correction. Thereby, the mode of the stop result can be changed without giving the player an uncomfortable feeling as compared with the configuration in which the change display pattern is changed in a state where the low speed change display is performed.

  In particular, in the configuration in which the switching to the low-speed fluctuation display is sequentially performed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the information of the fluctuation display pattern for correction is set in accordance with the switching timing of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . As a result, compared to a configuration in which the information of the variable display pattern for correction corresponding to each switching timing is not set, when the decision to perform the hold notice is made in the middle of the game time, There will be more opportunities for the hold notice to start.

  When performing a reservation notice, the symbols constituting the jackpot symbol combination are stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 on condition that the jackpot symbol combination is not stopped and displayed on one active line. did. As a result, it becomes possible to resemble the stop result for suspension notice in the game result that is a jackpot result, and when the stop result for hold notice is displayed, it corresponds to the hold notice. It becomes easier for the player to understand.

  The types of symbols for holding notice are made to correspond to the types of symbols constituting the combination of jackpot symbols in the game times related to the holding information set as the trigger for execution of the holding notice or the types of symbols constituting the combination of reach symbols It was. As a result, it is possible to associate the mode of the stop result with the game times where the hold notice is performed and the game times related to the hold information set as the trigger of the hold notice, and the variable display of the symbols in these consecutive game times The pattern can be provided to the player as a series.

  In the game times in which the advance notice is held and the game times related to the hold information set as the trigger for the advance notice, the combination of the jackpot symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot result is stopped and displayed in the latter game time. The combination of symbols for holding advance notice is not stopped and displayed by the symbols corresponding to the probable jackpot result in the game times. As a result, even if the player who confirmed the pending notice expects the occurrence of a promising jackpot result, it can be prevented from actually causing a situation where a normal jackpot result will occur. While not inviting, the above-mentioned excellent effects can be achieved.

  In addition, when the holding notice is continuously performed in a plurality of game times, if the combination of the symbols for the holding notice is stopped and displayed by the symbol corresponding to the probable big hit result in the previous game times, the subsequent game times The combination of symbols for holding advance notice is not stopped by the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot result. As a result, it is possible to satisfactorily increase the player's expectation that a probabilistic jackpot result will occur when a pending notice is made continuously in a plurality of game times.

  In the situation where the hold information that has already been set as the trigger for executing the hold notice is stored, the hold information stored thereafter is not set as the trigger for executing the hold notice. As a result, there is no duplication of hold information that triggers the execution of the hold notice, and the hold information that triggers the execution of the hold notice becomes clear. If there is duplicated hold information that triggers a hold notice, it may be necessary to consider other hold information when executing the hold notice related to one hold information, which may complicate processing. By preventing the duplication from occurring, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

  In the situation where the hold information corresponding to the big win is stored in the hold area RE, the hold information stored thereafter is not set as the trigger for executing the hold notice. As a result, in a situation where a hold notice is being executed, it is possible to prevent a situation where a jackpot result is generated in the game times related to the hold information different from the hold information set as the trigger for the hold notice. .

  In addition, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 executes the hold notice generation lottery process (step S3901), and when the hold notice occurrence selection wins, the hold information targeted for the lottery process is triggered by the execution of the hold notice. Is set to be In this case, the hold information corresponding to the normal jackpot result and the hold information that does not trigger execution of the hold notice is stored, and the hold information corresponding to the probable jackpot result is newly stored and the hold information is May be set to trigger execution of a hold notice. In this case, the combination of the symbols for the holding notice is stopped and displayed as a holding notice triggered by the latter holding information in the game times prior to the gaming time related to the former holding information, with the pattern corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result. It is assumed that In other words, it is assumed that the combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result is stopped and displayed in the subsequent game rounds, even though the combination of symbols for holding notice corresponding to the probability jackpot result is stopped and displayed. . When such an event occurs, the player usually expects a jackpot result despite the expectation that a promising jackpot result will be generated by the hold notice, and the player's willingness to play is likely to occur. May cause decline. On the other hand, as described above, in the situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the hold area RE, the hold information stored thereafter is not set as a trigger for executing the hold notice. As a result, the effects already described can be achieved without causing a decrease in gaming motivation.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1, which is a jackpot winning in the winning lottery in the situation where the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, is a jackpot winning in the winning lottery in the situation in the high probability mode. Although it is configured to be included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1, in the present embodiment, the two values do not overlap.

  The contents of the success / failure table of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the success / failure table for the low probability mode, and FIG. 75B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the success / failure table for the high probability mode.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (a), the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, which is a jackpot winning in the winning lottery in the situation where the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode, is “7” and “307”. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, which is a jackpot winning in the winning lottery in the situation where the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode, is “36”, “67”, “100”, “131”, “164”, “195”, “223”, “241”, “272”, “335”, “362”, “395”, “423”, “468”, “493”, “525” ”,“ 557 ”,“ 572 ”, and“ 598 ”. In this case, when the two are compared, all the value groups of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the big win in the situation of the low probability mode wins the jackpot random counter that wins the jackpot in the situation of the high probability mode. It is not included in the value group of C1.

  Corresponding to the fact that the contents of the success / failure table are different from those of the first embodiment as described above, the mode of hold notification is also different from that of the first embodiment. Therefore, the difference in the mode of the hold notification will be described below.

  FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the hold notification table according to the present embodiment. FIG. 76 (a) shows the first table, and FIG. 76 (b) shows the second table.

  All of the value groups of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation in the low probability mode are included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the prize in the lottery in the situation of the high probability mode. As a result, as shown in FIG. 76 (a), the common jackpot result is not set as the notification target jackpot result, but instead the normal-time special jackpot result (low-probability dedicated jackpot result) is set. Has been. That is, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value that is a jackpot winning only in the low probability mode in the winning or failing lottery in the main control device 81, the first specific result is set so as to be a special bonus jackpot result. If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value that is a jackpot winning only in the high probability mode in the winning / losing lottery in the main controller 81, the first specific result is set to be a jackpot result dedicated to the probability change. Has been. Note that the second table is the same as that of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG.

  Next, the hold notification specific process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the hold notification specific process, first, in step S4701, information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the current operation winning command is grasped. In the subsequent step S4702, the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time with reference to the first table of the hold notification table stored in the hold notification table storage area 245 of the ROM 243 is the notification target jackpot. It is specified whether or not it corresponds to either the normal-time dedicated jackpot result or the probability-change dedicated jackpot result set as a result.

  In the subsequent step S4703, it is specified whether or not the result of referring to the first table in step S4702 is a normal special jackpot result. If it is a normal special jackpot result, in step S4704, the normal time special jackpot information (low probability special jackpot information) is temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 242. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4707.

  If it is not the normal special jackpot result, the process advances to step S4705 to determine whether or not the result of referring to the first table in step S4702 is the probability change dedicated jackpot result. If it is not a jackpot result dedicated to the probability change, this specific process is terminated as it is. If it is a jackpot result dedicated to the probability change, in step S4706, the jackpot information dedicated to the probability change is temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 242. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4707.

  Since each process of step S4707 to step S4712 is the same as each process of step S2107 to step S2112 in the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted here.

  By executing the hold notification specific process as described above, in the first corresponding process (FIG. 34) in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82, the information stored in the register of the MPU 242 as a result of the specific process. Is a 15R probability variation jackpot result and is information corresponding to the normal-time special jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2004 and step S2008, and a negative determination is made in step S2009. move on. In step S2011, the second hold increase command is transmitted to the display control device 212.

  In the hold display information setting process (FIG. 41) at the time of winning of the display control device 212, the process from step S2509 to step S2513 is executed by receiving the second hold increase command.

  Specifically, notification execution setting processing is executed in step S2509. Thereafter, an individual notification lottery process is executed in step S2510. In subsequent step S2511, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S2510 is an individual notification winning. If it is not the individual notification winning, in step S2512 the first notification information is set for the unit setting areas 292a to 292d corresponding to the display-side first reserved storage number IaN2 incremented by 1 in step S2403. The contents of the hold notification image when the first notification information is set are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  On the other hand, in the case of individual notification winning, in step S2513, third notification information is set for the unit setting areas 292a to 292d corresponding to the display-side first reserved storage number IaN2 incremented by 1 in step S2403. . The third notification information is output to the VDP 255 in the internal command output process (FIG. 42), so that the normal-time dedicated image data is set in the corresponding unit areas 272 to 275, and the correspondence of the first hold display area Ga. In the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 to be displayed, a “communication only” image, which is information indicating that it is a 15R probability variation jackpot result and a normal special jackpot result, is displayed.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained in addition to or in place of the effects in the first embodiment.

  In the special advantageous state, as the hold information related to the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 33, the hold information that is a big hit win only in the low probability mode is stored, and a hold notification to that effect is further provided for the hold information. When it is executed, the player recognizes that the jackpot winning will not occur unless the winning lottery mode becomes the low probability mode until the holding information related to the holding notification becomes the target of the winning lottery. Then, the player expects that a normal jackpot result will be generated by the hold information related to the winning to the lower operation port 34 until the hold information related to the hold notification becomes the target of the lottery determination, and the launch handle 54 Will be operated. Furthermore, the player will normally receive a jackpot result after as many probabilistic jackpot results have been generated by the hold information related to winning in the lower operating port 34 until the hold information related to the hold notification becomes the target of the lottery. The firing handle 54 is operated while expecting that the above will occur.

  On the other hand, in the special advantageous state, as the hold information related to the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 33, the hold information that is a big hit in the high probability mode is stored, and further hold notification is executed for the hold information If the winning lottery mode becomes the low probability mode before the hold information related to the hold notification becomes the target of the winning / failing lottery, the big hit winning will not occur. Then, the player stops the operation of the launch handle 54 so that no further winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 34 is generated so that the hold information related to the hold notification is the target of the lottery decision. It becomes.

  Even in the above configuration, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which the launch handle 54 is manually operated and a passive game in which the result of the success / failure lottery is confirmed are related to each other. It becomes possible to raise the attention degree to.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments.

  (1) In the first embodiment, the information transmitted from the main control device 81 to the sound lamp control device 82 specifies information for determining whether or not the jackpot is won and the distribution destination of the jackpot result However, the present invention is not limited to the information for the purpose, and may be configured to include information on whether or not reach has occurred. In this case, as the hold notification, not only the contents of the jackpot result but also the presence / absence of reach occurrence, the expectation level of reach occurrence, and the like may be displayed.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the notification is made only for the holding information related to the winning of the upper working port 33, but the holding information related to the winning of the lower working port 34 is used instead of or in addition to this. It is good also as a structure which performs pending | holding alert | reporting about. In this case, when the hold information related to the winning of the lower operating port 34 is newly stored in the second result display portion hold area Rb, the information of the big hit random number counter C1 and the information of the big hit type counter C2 of the hold information It is good also as a structure which transmits an operation | movement prize-winning command including the information of the result specified in the main control apparatus 81 like the said 2nd Embodiment.

  Here, in the first embodiment, the allocation destination of the jackpot result in the case of winning the jackpot by the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 34 is the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 33. Therefore, it is set to be more advantageous for the player than the distribution destination of the jackpot result when the jackpot is won. In addition, the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode in the open / close execution mode regardless of whether the support mode is the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode before shifting to the open / close execution mode. In this case, the occurrence of a large number of winnings in the lower operation port 34 in the opening / closing execution mode is suppressed, and accordingly, for example, the exit rate in the opening / closing execution mode depends on the winning frequency to the lower operation port 34. Fluctuation can be suppressed. However, in the case of this configuration, when the opening / closing execution mode occurs in the situation where the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the hold information related to winning in the lower operation port 34 is stored at the timing before the opening / closing execution mode occurs. Otherwise, it is difficult for a prize to be generated in the lower operation port 34 during the opening / closing execution mode, so even if the mode is shifted to the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode, There is a high possibility that a determination of success / failure is made for the hold information related to winning. On the other hand, the player who has confirmed the hold notification can perform the opening / closing execution mode based on the hold information related to the hold notification by performing the hold notification on the hold information related to the winning to the lower operating port 34 at least. It is considered that a large amount of hold information related to winning in the lower working port 34 is to be stored as much as possible before the start of. That is, according to this configuration, an active game in which the launch handle 54 is operated so as to generate a prize for the lower operating port 34 and an active game in which the result of the lottery determination is confirmed are related to each other. Thus, it is possible to provide a novel game and to increase the degree of attention to the game.

  (2) Although the advantage for the player to enter the hold notification allowable state is reduced as compared with the first embodiment, the configuration in which the hold notification can be performed in any gaming state The hold notification may be performed only in the normal gaming state. In this case, even in a configuration in which the hold notification can be performed in the normal gaming state, in the main control device 81 about the hold information that is the target of the determination of the success prior to the hold information that is the target of the hold notification. When determining the variable display time of the pattern of each result display part AS and BS, it is preferable that the variable display time is determined without referring to the content of the hold information related to the hold notification.

  For example, when the hold information related to the hold notification is information corresponding to the jackpot result of the notification target, the variable information that is longer than usual is displayed for the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination prior to the hold information related to the hold notification If the time is selected or the variable display time shorter than normal is selected, the time required to digest each game time becomes longer or shorter in the situation where the hold notification is performed. Then, according to the adjustment method of the angle and direction of the nail provided in the game area, a game hall in which the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 33 is relatively likely to occur, There may be a difference in the digestion rate of game times per unit time with a game hall in which winning of game balls is relatively difficult to occur. That is, in the former game hall, there are many occasions where the hold information that is the target of the hold notification as described above is stored in a situation where a plurality of hold information is already stored, while in the latter game hall, the opportunity is Few. In this case, if a variable display time longer than normal is selected, the digestion rate of game times per unit time in the former game hole is lower than that of the latter game hole, and a variable display time shorter than normal is selected. If this is the case, the rate of game times per unit time in the former game hall will be higher than that in the latter game hall. On the other hand, it is possible to hold without affecting the digestion rate of game times per unit time by determining the variable display time without referring to the content of the hold information related to the hold notification. The effect by performing notification can be obtained.

  (3) In the first embodiment or the like, as a pending notification, it is a 15R probability variation jackpot result and is not a jackpot result only when certain changes are made, a 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result only when certain changes are made, Although it is set as the structure which alert | reports that it is a jackpot result and a normal jackpot result, it is not limited to this, It is good also as a structure which alert | reports that it is another jackpot result. For example, it is a normal jackpot result that is not a dedicated jackpot result at the time of probability change, a normal jackpot result that is a jackpot result for the time of probability change, an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, etc. It is good also as a structure which alert | reports.

  (4) In the first embodiment, even if the hold notification permissible state is set, the hold notification is not performed unless the winning is performed in the notification generation lottery process. Then, it is good also as a structure by which hold notification is performed about all the hold information. In this case, the advantage for the player of being set in the hold notification allowable state is higher than that in the above embodiments. Further, all of the jackpot results that may be generated in the winning / losing lottery and the distribution lottery relating to the winning of the game ball to the upper working port 33 may be set as the hold notification target. In this case, the amount of information that the player can obtain from the hold notification can be increased, and the advantage for the player in the hold notification allowed state is enhanced as compared to the above embodiment.

  (5) In the first embodiment or the like, when the hold notification is executed, the hold information related to the hold notification is the hold information that is the 15R probability variation jackpot result and the probability change dedicated jackpot result. In the case of individual notification winning in the individual notification lottery process in step S2504, a hold notification image indicating that it is a 15R probability variation jackpot result and a jackpot result dedicated to probability variation is displayed. Instead, the individual notification lottery process is not executed, and when the hold information related to the hold notification is the hold information that is the 15R probability variation jackpot result and the special jackpot result at the time of probability change, the 15R probability variation jackpot result is It may be configured to display a hold notification image indicating that it is a jackpot result dedicated to probability change.

  (6) In the first embodiment or the like, when the hold notification is executed, the hold information related to the hold notification is a hold information that is a 15R probability variable jackpot result and is not a jackpot result dedicated to probability change. In the case of individual notification winning in the individual notification lottery process in step S2510, a hold notification image indicating that it is a 15R probability variation jackpot result and not a probability variation dedicated jackpot result is displayed. Thus, when the individual notification lottery process is not executed and the hold information related to the hold notification is hold information that is a 15R probability variation jackpot result and is not a dedicated jackpot result at the time of probability change, the result is a 15R probability variation jackpot result. It is good also as a structure by which the image | video of the pending | holding notification which shows that it is not a time exclusive jackpot result is displayed.

  (7) In the configuration in which the individual notification lottery process in step S2504 is executed as in the first embodiment, the hold notification image when the individual notification is not won in the lottery process is The information may be information indicating that it is a 15R probability change jackpot result, and may be information indicating that the information may correspond to the jackpot result dedicated to probability change. Specifically, an image such as “Could?” May be displayed as a hold notification. Further, in this case, the hold notification image in the case where the individual notification lottery process in step S2510 is not selected corresponds to the dedicated jackpot result at the time of probability change with a predetermined probability (for example, one to one). It is good also as a structure by which the information which shows that there is possibility or the information which is not a jackpot result only at the time of probability change is displayed as a pending | holding alert | report. Specifically, either a “probable” or “probable” image may be displayed as a hold notification with a predetermined probability.

  (8) The display content of the hold notification image is not limited to that in the first embodiment and is arbitrary. For example, specific instruction information such as “stop operation of the firing handle 54” or “continue operation of the firing handle 54” may be displayed.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the hold notification is performed while clearly indicating the order of the lottery of the hold information related to the hold notification. For example, by displaying a predetermined notification image (for example, a notification character, a notification reach effect or a notification background) together with a variable display image of a symbol in a game round at a timing prior to the hold information related to the hold notification, It is good also as a structure which performs a pending | holding alert | report. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which outputs a predetermined sound and an audio | voice from the speaker part 64 instead of a predetermined alerting | reporting image.

  Here, in the first embodiment, an operation winning command is transmitted from the main control device 81 to the sound lamp control device 82 at the timing when a game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and the operation winning command is received. In this configuration, the hold notification is performed. Therefore, when a game ball is won in the upper working port 33 in a situation where the symbol variation display is performed at a predetermined game time on the symbol display device 41, the operation winning command is controlled by the main control during the symbol variation display. Sent from the device 81. In this case, when the predetermined notification image is displayed as the hold notification as described above, the predetermined notification image may be displayed during the change display of the symbol.

  (9) In the first embodiment, the predetermined notification means for performing the hold notification is not limited to the first hold display area Ga in the symbol display device 41, and the hold display is performed in a dedicated display device. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the hold notification is performed not by a display device having a display screen but by a light emitting unit, a movable decorative member, or a speaker unit.

(10) In the first embodiment, the type of the jackpot result by the winning lottery and the distribution lottery relating to the upper operating port 33 and the type of the jackpot result by the lottery lottery and the sorting lottery relating to the lower operating port 34 are complete. The configuration may be the same or completely different. Further, as a jackpot result, a jackpot result that causes a transition to the high probability mode or the high frequency support mode without generating the opening / closing execution mode may be set. In addition, a gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the normal gaming state may be set, and a success / failure result that may result in the above disadvantageous gaming state may be set as a success / failure result based on the success / failure lottery.
(11) In the first embodiment, the number of reservations is limited to a configuration in which the number of first result display area reservation areas Ra is four and the number of second result display area reservation areas Rb is four. There may be three or five or more each, and the number of both holdings may be different.

  Also in the third embodiment, the number of reservations is not limited to four, and may be three or five or more.

  (12) The method of measuring each time in each of the above embodiments is arbitrary, and the method of counting a predetermined value using the counter area may be an addition formula or a subtraction formula. Further, the method of monitoring a power failure in the main controller 81 or the like is also arbitrary. In the first embodiment, the number of rounds in each opening / closing execution mode is also arbitrary.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration of giving a game ball to the winning of a game ball to the variable winning device 32 or the like is not limited to the configuration of paying out the game ball directly, and the function of storing virtual game media In the configuration having the above, the virtual game medium may be provided.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the symbol display device 41 may be omitted, and a lottery result such as a success / failure lottery may be taught by a movable decorative member.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, as the support mode of the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower operation port 34, a non-supportable mode in which the electric accessory 34a is not in an open state is set instead of the low frequency support mode. Also good. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can win | win the game ball | bowl to the lower operation port 34, even if it is the condition where the electric accessory 34a is a closed state.

  In the first embodiment, the contents of the result display in the result display section AS of the main display section 43 are the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 for a predetermined jackpot result and special outlier result. And may be set in a one-to-one correspondence.

  (13) In the first embodiment, the reservation ball storage area 232 provided in the RAM 204 of the main control device 81 includes a first result display area reservation area Ra as a reservation area for the upper working port 33, and The holding area for the second result display unit Rb is provided as a holding area for the lower working port 34, but instead of this, an area in which the holding information can be stored is an upper working port 33 and a lower working port 34. It is also possible to provide a total reserved number, and each area may include a common reserved area in which a partial area in which information indicating which of the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 is stored is set. As each area of the common reserved area, for example, each area is configured as a storage area such as 1 byte, and a predetermined bit portion of the storage area corresponds to either the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 A configuration is possible in which the information is set as a partial area that can be stored. Even in this case, the pachinko machine 10 includes the first acquisition information storage unit and the second acquisition information storage unit.

  (14) In the first embodiment, the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the result of the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the result of the special loss result are the same. Although the opening / closing execution mode related to a certain low-frequency winning mode is executed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as a structure from which the opening restriction | limiting period of one big winning opening 32a differs in both opening / closing execution modes. Specifically, the opening restriction period in the former opening / closing execution mode may be 0.20 sec, and the opening restriction period in the latter opening / closing execution mode may be 0.19 sec. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the open limit number of one big winning opening 32a is different in both opening / closing execution modes. Specifically, the opening limit number in the former opening / closing execution mode may be set to ten, and the opening limit number in the latter opening / closing execution mode may be set to six.

  (15) In the first embodiment, in the winning lottery using the jackpot random number counter C1 in the main control device 81, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired for lottery is a predetermined value that does not become a jackpot winning prize. Although a configuration that results in a special outage when the value is reached is not limited to this. For example, as a special loss occurrence lottery means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to make a special loss result, a special loss lottery counter and a special loss lottery table are provided, and the jackpot random number counter C1 earned for the winning lottery If the value of the special off-lottery counter acquired when it is determined that the value is not a big hit win is a value that is set as a special off-winning value in the special off-lottery table, the special off A resulting configuration may be used.

  (16) In the first embodiment, the big hit random number counter or the big hit type includes the hold information relating to the winning of the game ball to the upper working port 33 and the hold information relating to the winning of the game ball to the lower working port 34. A different counter may be used for each counter.

  (17) In each of the above embodiments, the lower working port 34 is provided with the electric accessory 34a, and the ease of winning a game ball to the lower working port 34 varies according to the gaming state. However, this may be changed. For example, it may be configured such that the ease of winning a game ball to the lower working port 34 does not vary depending on the gaming state, without the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 being provided.

  In this configuration, by applying the configuration in which the lower operating port 34 side is prioritized and the configuration related to the hold notification in the digestion of the hold information in the first embodiment, for the player, depending on the content of the hold notification. A mode in which the firing handle 54 is operated with the expectation that the hold information related to winning in the lower operating port 34 is maintained so that the hold information related to the hold notification is not subject to the determination of success or failure. A mode in which the operation of the firing handle 54 is stopped so that further winning to the lower operating port 34 does not occur so that the hold information related to the hold notification becomes the target of the determination of success or failure. You can choose. In particular, since the winning frequency does not depend on the game state in both the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34, the game can be provided to the player regardless of the game state.

  Further, in this configuration, the plurality of operation ports are not arranged in the vertical direction, but the first operation port corresponding to the upper operation port 33 and the second operation port corresponding to the lower operation port 34 are arranged on the left and right. It is good also as a structure arranged in parallel, It is good also as a structure in which these both operation ports were arranged in parallel diagonally. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which arrange | positions both operation openings apart so that only the winning to the 1st operation opening or the winning to the 2nd operation opening can be aimed according to the operation mode of the launching handle 54. In this case, it becomes possible for the player to aim for only one winning of the first operating port or the second operating port according to the hold notification.

  However, in order to positively provide a state in which a winning of a game ball to the lower working port 34 is likely to occur, it is preferable to provide an electric accessory 34a or the like in the lower working port 34.

  In addition, the configuration for switching the lower operating port 34 between the open state and the closed state is not limited to that by the electric accessory 34a, and the lower operating port 34 can be moved from the game board 24 to the game area. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a game ball can be won in the lower operation port 34 in a state protruding from the game area, and it is difficult to win a game ball in the lower operation port 34 in a state where the game ball is sunk from the game area.

  (18) In the first embodiment, when the symbol variation display is performed on the symbol display device 41, the symbol variation display is related to the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 33. Alternatively, a start corresponding display area for displaying whether the game ball is won in the lower operation port 34 may be set on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. In this case, the start corresponding display area may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each of the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34, and is common to the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34. It is good also as a structure which sets an area | region and displays whether it is based on the display content in the said area | region which concerns on the winning opening.

  (19) In the first embodiment described above, the number of times that the special winning opening 32a is opened based on the result of the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is not limited to two times, and is a special loss result. As long as it is the same as the number of times the special winning opening 32a is opened based on this, it is arbitrary. In addition, the big winning opening 32a is opened based on the number of times the big winning opening 32a is opened based on the result of the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, or the 15R special big hit result and the normal big winning result. The number of times is also arbitrary.

  In addition, it is not essential that the reach display is generated in the game times corresponding to the special loss result or the game times corresponding to the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and the reach display may not be generated.

  Also, a variable winning device that is opened and closed in an opening / closing execution mode corresponding to a special outage result and an opening / closing execution mode corresponding to an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, an opening / closing execution mode corresponding to a 15R probability variation jackpot result, and a normal jackpot result A variable winning device that is opened and closed in the opening and closing execution mode may be provided separately.

  Further, the probability of a special failure result in the winning / losing lottery relating to the winning of the game ball to the upper working port 33 is different from the probability of the special winning result in the winning / failing lottery relating to the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 34. May be.

  Also, the type of jackpot result to be distributed when the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode and the case of the low probability mode may be different when the winning lottery wins.

  (20) The timing at which the operation winning command is transmitted from the main control device 81 to the sound lamp control device 82 may be delayed from the timing in the first embodiment. In this case, for example, an operation winning command may be transmitted after the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated a predetermined number of times after a winning is generated at the upper operating port 33. In this case, in the configuration in which the operation winning command is transmitted as a command including the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the signal line that electrically connects the main controller 81 and the sound lamp controller 82 is illegal. Even if the information of the operation winning command is illegally acquired, it is possible to make it difficult to specify the current value of the jackpot random number counter C1 from the information of the operating winning command. However, the configuration in the second embodiment is preferable in that it is more difficult to perform such specification.

  (21) In the first embodiment, the hold notification disabled state in which the hold notification is not reliably executed is set as the hold notification state. Instead, the hold notification can be executed, but the probability May be set to a low frequency state of the hold notification set low.

  (22) In each of the above-described embodiments, the transition between the high probability mode and the low probability mode of the success / failure lottery mode is performed when the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result is generated. For example, it may be configured to shift to the low-probability mode when a predetermined number of game times are consumed in the high-probability mode. In addition, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a high probability mode is entered when a predetermined number of game times are consumed in the low probability mode.

  In addition, when a lottery opportunity different from the jackpot lottery is established, the winning lottery mode transition lottery is performed, and when the winning lottery is promoted in the transition lottery, the low probability mode is changed to the high probability mode. In this case, the high probability mode may be switched to the low probability mode.

  (23) In the second embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot result may correspond to the operation winning command on a one-to-one basis. However, the configuration in the second embodiment is preferable in that it is difficult to specify the current value of the jackpot random number counter C1 even if the information of the operation winning command is illegally acquired.

  (24) In the second embodiment, information on the first specifying result specified by the first table of the hold notification table and information on the second specifying result specified by the second table of the hold notification table. The main controller 81 may transmit the command to the sound lamp controller 82 as separate commands.

  (25) In the second embodiment, the main control device 81 executes the notification generation lottery processing or the individual notification lottery processing, and the information based on the lottery result is sub-control device such as the voice lamp control device 82. It is good also as a structure which transmits to. Further, the content of the specific hold notification may be determined by the main control device 81, and information corresponding to the content of the hold notification may be transmitted to a sub-control device such as the audio lamp control device 82.

  (26) In the fourth embodiment, the hold notification may be performed even if the success / failure lottery mode is the low-probability mode. It is good also as a structure which can perform the pending | holding alerting which will be a jackpot result if it is alerting | reporting or high probability mode.

  (27) In the fourth embodiment, as the pending notification, at least one of the normal jackpot result or the probability change dedicated jackpot result is reported, and the 15R probability variation jackpot result is not notified. It is good also as a structure.

  (28) In each of the above embodiments, the distribution table is set so that the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that is the probability variation jackpot result overlaps between the low probability mode and the high probability mode. Instead, the probability variation jackpot The distribution table may be set so that the value of the jackpot type counter C2 as a result and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 as a normal jackpot result do not overlap in the low probability mode and the high probability mode, and at least 15R probability variable jackpot result The allocation table may be set so that the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that becomes and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that is the normal jackpot result do not overlap in the low probability mode and the high probability mode.

  The configuration of the distribution table is applied to the first embodiment in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot result in the low probability mode is included in the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot result in the high probability mode. In this case, as in the fourth embodiment, the types of jackpot results include normal jackpot results dedicated to normal time (that is, low probability mode), probability variation jackpot results dedicated to normal time (that is, low probability mode) ( Or 15R probability variation jackpot result), there is a regular jackpot result dedicated to probability variation (ie, high probability mode) and a probability jackpot result (or 15R probability variation jackpot result) dedicated to probability variation (ie, high probability mode). That is, both in low probability mode) and in probability variation (ie, in high probability mode) Jackpot result (or 15R probability variation jackpot result) is not present. In this case, these jackpot results can be set as the subject of the hold notification. Note that the jackpot result type setting may be realized by differentiating the combination of the jackpot type counter C2 and the distribution table between the low probability mode and the high probability mode.

  In addition, although the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that is the normal jackpot result is duplicated, the distribution table is set so that the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that is the probability variation jackpot result is not duplicated in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. Although the value of the big hit type counter C2 that is usually the big jackpot result overlaps, the distribution table is set so that the value of the big hit type counter C2 that is at least the 15R probability variation big hit result does not overlap in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. It may be set.

  Also, although the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that is a probable jackpot result is duplicated, a distribution table is set so that the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that is usually a jackpot result does not overlap in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. However, although the value of the jackpot type counter C2 which is at least the 15R probability variation jackpot result overlaps, the distribution table is set so that the value of the jackpot type counter C2 which is the normal jackpot result does not overlap between the low probability mode and the high probability mode. It may be set.

  Further, in the configuration of each of the above-described distribution tables, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result in the low probability mode is not included in the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot result in the high probability mode. You may apply to a form.

  (29) In the third embodiment, the holding notice is made depending on the mode of the stop result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notice for holding notice is used in the middle of the symbol display on the symbol display device 41. It is good also as a structure which performs a reservation advance notice by making it display. For example, it may be configured such that the speed of symbol variation display is changed to a speed for holding notice on the way. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which at least one part of the symbol under fluctuation display is changed into the symbol for a reservation notice.

  Further, the symbol display device 41 may be configured such that a hold notice is performed as a display different from the symbol variation display. For example, it may be configured to perform a hold notice by displaying a predetermined hold notice image such as a hold notice character on the background screen or the reach effect effect screen in a situation where the symbol display is changed.

  In addition, the notification means for which the hold notice is to be performed is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and the hold notice may be performed on a display screen of a display device provided separately from the symbol display device 41. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a hold notice is made by setting a movable decorative member in a predetermined notice form, or a structure in which a hold notice is made by turning on a predetermined light emitting part. A configuration may be adopted in which a pending notice is performed by output of sound from the above, or a construction in which a pending notice is performed by a combination of all or a part of the above aspects.

  In the configuration in which the holding notice is given by a display device different from the symbol display device 41 or the structure in which the holding notice is given by a movable decorative member, the display device or the movable decorative member is used as the symbol display device. It is preferable to arrange around 41 display screens. Thereby, even when the player is viewing the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, it is difficult for the player to miss the hold notice on the display device or the movable decorative member.

  In any of the above configurations, if information indicating that a hold notice is to be executed in the middle of a game round is set, the set timing is still within a period during which the hold notice can still be given in that game round. If so, it is preferable to make a reservation notice in the game round. As a result, similar to the third embodiment, it is possible to increase the number of occasions where a reservation notice is made.

  (30) In the third embodiment, when the information to execute the hold notice is set (specifically, when the notice condition establishment flag is stored), the notice of hold is executed. Until the game times for the hold information related to the setting are made, the hold notice is always made at each game time. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even in a situation where information to execute a hold notice is set, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a hold notice is to be executed at the start of each game round, and the game times won in the lottery It is good also as a structure by which a hold notice is performed. In this case, more diversification is made with respect to the hold notice mode than the third embodiment. However, in order to increase the continuity of the hold notice when the situation in which the information to execute the hold notice is set is continued over a plurality of game times, the configuration in the third embodiment described above is used. preferable.

  (31) In the third embodiment, when a hold notice is continuously performed over a plurality of game times, after the hold notice is performed using a specific symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result, Although it is set as the structure which does not perform a reservation notice using the non-specific symbol corresponding to a jackpot result, it is good also as a structure which can generate | occur | produce such a condition. In addition, if the game times related to the hold information that triggered the execution of the hold notice result in a jackpot result or reach display due to a non-specific symbol, a hold notice will be issued using a specific symbol in the game times where the hold notice is given It is good also as a structure which can be performed. In the case of each of these configurations, diversification of the pending notice mode is achieved more than in the third embodiment.

  (32) In the third embodiment described above, the stop result in the case where the hold notice is made is the same as that for the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3. The upper symbol row Z1 may be in a mode in which the symbol for holding notice is shifted from the effective line. Alternatively, for the upper symbol row Z1 and the middle symbol row Z2, the symbol for holding notice stops on the same effective line, and for the lower symbol row Z3, the symbol for holding notice from the effective line. It is good also as an aspect used as a shifted position. In other words, in a configuration in which the variable display of symbols is performed in each of three or more symbol display areas, one of the two symbol display areas to be stopped first and the one symbol display area to be stopped thereafter are suspended. The design for the symbol stops on the same active line, and in the other of the two symbol display areas that stop first, the symbol for holding notice stops on the display screen while preventing it from stopping on the valid line. It may be configured to be displayed. By performing the hold notice in such a manner, the form of the hold notice is unified in each game round, and it is possible for the player to clearly recognize that the hold notice is being performed.

  By the way, in the above configuration, it is not necessary to select the effective line when setting the stop result for the hold notice because the two hold notice symbols are always stopped on the same active line. The load can be reduced.

  (33) In the third embodiment, when changing to a suspension notice stop notification result during a game round, the period during which the change can be made is set in three stages. There is no limitation, and there may be one or two stages, or four or more stages. For example, in the case of one stage, the suspension notice is suspended during the game round only when information indicating that the notice of suspension is executed in a situation where high-speed fluctuation is performed in all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3. It is good also as a structure changed into a result.

  In addition, the reference period is not limited to the period from switching from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and may be a period until symbol fluctuation display is stopped in a predetermined symbol row. The reference period may be set regardless of the display mode.

  (34) In the third embodiment, the fluctuation display speed of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is not in two stages but in three stages such as high speed fluctuation → medium speed fluctuation → low speed fluctuation. It is good also as a structure changed. In this case, when the change display pattern is changed to be a stop result for the hold notice, it is preferable that the change is performed at a timing before the low speed change, more preferably before the medium speed change. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the change is performed at the timing.

  Moreover, the method of setting the low identification display mode (first identification display mode) and the high identification display mode (second identification display mode easier to identify than the first identification display mode) for the variable display of the symbols is the third method. The present invention is not limited to the configuration for setting the high speed fluctuation and the low speed fluctuation as in the embodiment. For example, a configuration in which a part of the original mode is not displayed or difficult to identify such as making the symbol translucent is set as a low identification display mode, and all information of the pattern is displayed as a high identification display mode. Also good. Further, the low identification display mode and the high identification display mode may be set by both the change of the display mode of the symbol and the change of the variable display speed of the symbol.

  (35) In the above third embodiment, when changing to the suspension notice for holding notice in the middle of the game round, the change display time of the already set symbols is not changed. The variable display time of the already set symbols may be changed. In this case, the variable display pattern may be added so that the variable display time of the symbols is extended for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, instead of replacing the variable display patterns in order to make the advance notice. Moreover, when setting the stop result for the hold notice from the beginning of the game times, the variable display time of the symbol may be determined with reference to the contents of the hold information that triggered the execution of the hold notice. However, the configuration according to the third embodiment is preferable in order to make a reservation notice without affecting the change display time of the symbols of each game time.

  (36) In the third embodiment, when the mode of the stop result is changed to the one for holding notice during the game round, the change display pattern after a predetermined period is changed to the change display pattern for correction. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the stop result may be changed.

  (37) In the third embodiment, the display control device 212 determines the type of symbol of the stop result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of symbol of the stop result is the main control device. It is good also as a structure determined in 81. FIG. In this case, the main control device 81 determines whether or not to hold the hold notice, and when the condition for executing the hold notice is satisfied, the main control device 81 has a stop result corresponding to the hold notice. It is good also as a structure which determines. Moreover, when changing to the stop result for a hold notice in the middle of game times, it is good also as a structure which performs the determination of the variable display pattern for making the change in the main controller 81. FIG.

  (38) In the third embodiment, the hold information corresponding to the miss reach is configured to trigger execution of the hold notice. However, the hold information corresponding to the miss reach does not trigger the execution of the hold notice. Only the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning may be configured to trigger execution of the hold notice. In this case, when the player confirms the occurrence of the pending notice, the player can grasp that the big win is generated in the subsequent game times.

  In addition, when the hold information corresponding to the miss reach is configured to trigger execution of the hold notice, before and after the symbol corresponding to the combination of reach symbols is stopped on an effective line different from the reach line in the final stop symbol row The hold information corresponding to the missed reach can trigger the execution of the hold notice, but the hold information corresponding to the missed reach other than the preceding and following miss reach may not trigger the execution of the hold notice.

  (39) The mode of the stop result in performing the hold notice is not limited to the form in the third embodiment as long as the player can recognize that it is the hold notice. For example, the mode of the suspension result for holding notice may be a mode in which a combination of symbols is established in ascending or descending order of numbers on one effective line, and a combination of predetermined symbols instead of the same symbol is one effective line It is good also as an aspect established above.

  (40) In the third embodiment, the main control device 81 determines whether or not the hold information corresponds to the jackpot winning in the confirmation processing for holding notice (FIG. 55). It is also possible to refer to only a part of the numerical information as the migration information set as. Further, all transition information is referred to in the low probability mode, but only a part of the transition information may be referred to in the high probability mode. In this case, in the configuration in which the hold notice is executed, the time required for one processing time of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is shortened in the main controller 81, and the timer interrupt process start cycle is conventionally set. Even if the timer interrupt processing is not secured for a long time, it is possible to sufficiently prevent the timer interrupt processing from being newly started in a situation where the timer interrupt processing of one processing is executed. In addition, the main control device 81 performs a process for executing a confirmation process for holding notice (FIG. 55) for a normal process (FIG. 17) for executing various processes for starting game times. Even if the timer interrupt processing is interrupted, it is possible to prevent the time required for completing the normal processing of the processing times from becoming unnecessarily long.

  Incidentally, in this configuration, when a hold command corresponding to the big win is transmitted from the main control device 81 in a situation where hold information that triggers execution of the hold notice is not stored, the hold notice is always executed. It is good also as a structure to which the effect is made. Even in this case, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the configuration in which only the part of the transition information set as the jackpot winning is referred to in the confirmation process for the holding notice as described above, Is set to execute the hold notice with a predetermined probability.

  (41) In the third embodiment, the main control device 81 determines whether or not to hold a hold notice, and the hold command is issued from the main control device 81 only when the decision to make the hold notice is made. It is good also as a structure transmitted. In this configuration, in the situation where the hold information has already been set, even if the hold information is newly stored, a process for preventing the hold information from being set for a new hold notice is performed. The main control device 81 may be used instead of the display control device 212. Specifically, the main controller 81 has a processing configuration related to the advance notice condition establishment flag and the hold advance notice counter area 327 in the third embodiment. Note that this configuration may be applied to the first embodiment.

  (42) In the third embodiment, in the situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored and stored, even if the hold information is newly stored, the setting for performing the hold notice for the hold information is performed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the main control device 81 performs the processing to prevent this from being performed instead of the display control device 212. Specifically, the main control device 81 may determine whether or not the big hit winning is included in the hold information, and when the big win is included, the hold command may not be transmitted. Note that this configuration may be applied to the first embodiment.

  (43) In the third embodiment, when new hold information is stored in a situation where it is already set to make a hold notice, a setting is made to make a hold notice for the hold information. It is good also as a structure to obtain. In this case, in the situation where a plurality of hold information that is the trigger of the hold notice is stored at the same time, if a game result related to the hold information that was the start target earlier, It may be configured to delete the setting to execute the hold notice set for the hold information to be started. The timing for erasing the setting indicating that the advance notice should be executed is the timing when the game round that results in the jackpot is completed, the timing when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is started, and the transition to the opening / closing execution mode are performed The timing at which the opening effect is performed or the timing at which the opening / closing execution mode ends may be used. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to initialize the setting to execute the hold notice that has been set up until then when the jackpot result occurs. Such a configuration may be applied to the first embodiment.

  (44) In each of the above embodiments, the effective line is not limited to a straight line, and may be set as a line having a bend. Moreover, the aspect of a design is not limited to the thing of the said embodiment, and is arbitrary.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, a state corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is set as a relatively advantageous predetermined gaming state, and a state corresponding to the normal jackpot result is set as a relatively disadvantageous predetermined gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a relatively advantageous predetermined gaming state and an unfavorable predetermined gaming state may be set depending on the number of games in which the high frequency support mode is continued in the electric accessory 34a after the opening / closing execution mode. . Also, a relatively advantageous predetermined game state and an unfavorable predetermined game state may be set depending on the number of games in which the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode is continued. In addition, a relatively advantageous predetermined game state and an unfavorable predetermined game state may be set depending on whether or not the electric accessory 34a enters the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode.

  (45) Special notification (hold notification in the first embodiment and hold notification in the third embodiment) can be performed while suppressing the time required to digest each game round. Focusing on this remarkable effect, if you decide to make a configuration that does not refer to the content of the hold information that triggers the execution of the special notification when determining the variable display time at the start of the game times to perform the hold notice Well, in the situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning has already been stored, even if the hold information is newly stored, it is necessary to make a configuration that does not set the special notification for the hold information There is no. For example, in the third embodiment, the display controller 212 uses the processing configuration in the case of determining the variable display time at the start of the game times in the main controller 81 and the display controller 212 as it is. A configuration may be adopted in which the processes in steps S3802 to S3804 and step S3808 and the flag deletion process (FIG. 69) in the pending command handling process (FIG. 62) are not executed.

  (46) It is possible to speed up the start timing when special notification (hold notification in the first embodiment and hold notification in the third embodiment) is performed while suppressing complication of processing. When paying attention to the remarkable effect of the above, the configuration is made such that the special notification is performed by the end timing of the game times based on the setting that the special notification should be executed in a predetermined period during the game times. In the situation where the hold information corresponding to the big win is already stored and stored, even if the hold information is newly stored, the setting for performing the special notification is not performed for the hold information. Is not required. For example, in the third embodiment, steps S3802 to S3804 in the pending command response processing (FIG. 62) in the display control device 212 while directly adopting the processing for change in the display control device 212 (FIG. 70). The process of step S3808 and the flag erasure process (FIG. 69) may not be executed.

  (47) The remarkable effect that special notification can be performed while suppressing complication of processing in performing special notification (hold notification in the first embodiment, hold notification in the third embodiment). When attention is paid, in a situation where special notification is already set, even if hold information is newly stored as special information, a setting for newly performing special notification is not performed for the hold information In the situation where the hold information corresponding to the big win is already stored and stored, even if the hold information is newly stored, the setting for performing the special notification is not performed for the hold information. Is not required. For example, in the third embodiment, the display control device 212 adopts the processing in steps S3805 and S3809 and the flag deletion processing (FIG. 69) in the pending command handling processing (FIG. 62) in the display control device 212 as they are. A configuration may be adopted in which the processes in steps S3802 to S3804 and step S3808 and the flag deletion process (FIG. 69) in the pending command handling process 212 (FIG. 62) are not executed.

  In addition, in the situation where the hold notification is already set, even if the hold information is newly stored, the configuration in which the setting for newly holding the hold notification is not performed for the hold information is configured as the first In the embodiment and the fourth embodiment, the hold information relating to the winning to the lower working port 34 may be applied to the configuration in which the hold notification is performed, and the first embodiment or the fourth embodiment. In the embodiment of the present invention, it may be applied to a configuration in which the hold information related to winning in the upper operating port 33 is prioritized instead of the hold information related to winning in the lower operating port 34, and is subject to determination of success or failure. In the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment, as in the third embodiment, the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 33 and the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 34 May apply to indistinguishable configurations .

  (48) In the situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is already stored and stored, even if the hold information is newly stored, the configuration for performing the special notification on the hold information is not performed. In the first embodiment or the fourth embodiment, the hold information related to the winning to the lower working port 34 may be applied to the configuration for performing the hold notification, and the first embodiment or the above. In the fourth embodiment, it may be applied to a configuration in which the hold information related to winning in the upper operating port 33 is prioritized instead of the hold information related to winning in the lower operating port 34 and is subject to the determination of success / failure. In the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment, the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 33 and the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 34 as in the third embodiment. For configurations not distinguished by It may be use.

  (49) In the third embodiment, the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 33 and the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 34 are stored separately as in the first embodiment. In addition, a configuration in which the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 34 is preferentially digested may be applied. On the contrary, the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 33 is given priority. A digested composition may be applied.

  (50) In each of the above-described embodiments, one game turn is started in the main display units 43 and 301 based on the determination of whether or not the main control device 81 has made a determination. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In other words, when the conditions for determining whether or not the main control device 81 is determined are satisfied, the game times are started at a timing before the timing at which the determination is actually made, and the determination is made after that. The subsequent variation display pattern, variation display time, and stop result in the game times may be determined based on the above. In this case, the main control device 81 first transmits a change start command when the game turn start timing is reached, and then determines whether or not the game is correct, determines the change display time, and determines the type. The type command may be transmitted, and the transmission timing of the variable time command and the type command may be shifted. However, the timing at which the variation time command and the type command are transmitted needs to be the timing until the symbol variation display is switched from the high-speed variation to the low-speed variation in the symbol display device 41.

  (51) In the third embodiment, the mid-variation process (FIG. 70) in the display control device 212 may not be executed.

  (52) In each of the above embodiments, the display control device 212 is controlled by the sound lamp control device 82 based on the command output from the main control device 81. Instead, the main control device is used. The display control device 212 may be configured to control the sound lamp control device 82 based on the command output from 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212 are separately provided, the control devices 82 and 212 may be provided as a single sub-side control device. Moreover, in each embodiment except the said 2nd Embodiment, it is good also as a structure by which the function of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 82 or the display control apparatus 212 was integrated by the main control apparatus 81, and the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 82. In addition, a configuration in which both functions of the display control device 212 are integrated in the main control device 81 may be adopted.

  (53) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines that release a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or games in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a big hit when a ball enters, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  (54) If the characteristic configuration of the first to fourth embodiments and the configuration of the other embodiments described above have the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game, Any combination may be applied to each other.

<Invention Group Extracted from the Embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

Feature A1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting entrance portion (upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34) provided in the gaming area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the gaming area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the start ball entrance unit;
Acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
When the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the predetermined transfer information and determines whether or not a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means Includes a transition determination unit (a function for executing a determination process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the transition determination on the plurality of special information,
The game state is shifted to a predetermined game state based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the transition information. State transition means (function for executing game state transition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
Prior to the transition determination being performed by the transition determination means or based on the transition determination being performed by the transition determination means, a game turn operation is started, corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means. The game turn operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game result operation being terminated as a stop result as one game time. Game time control means for controlling predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) (function to execute variation start processing in MPU 81 of main control device 81, function to execute variation display control processing in MPU 252 of display control device 212) ,
In gaming machines equipped with
The information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the shift determination, the information before the predetermined special information is the target of the shift determination A destination specifying means (a function for executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) specified at timing;
The special notification corresponding to the information specified by the destination specifying means is executed by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means at a timing before the predetermined special information is subject to the transition determination. Special notification control means (a function for executing a stop result setting process corresponding to a holding notice in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 and a function for executing a process for changing);
With
The special notification control means is specified based on the fact that the specification is performed by the first specifying means in a predetermined period during the game turning operation when the game turning action is being performed. Provided with a period corresponding execution means (a function for executing the processing for changing in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) so that the special notification corresponding to the information is performed by the end timing of the game turning operation. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the feature A1, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage unit and is not the target of the transition determination is a timing before the special information is the target of the transition determination. May be executed in As a result, for the player, not only a game that causes a game ball to enter the starting pitching part and a game that confirms the transition determination result of the special information acquired based on the pitch, but also a plurality of special If the information is stored in the acquired information storage means, confirm or predict the result when the transition determination target is the target of transition determination according to the content of the special notification for the special information whose transition determination target is later. The game of doing is added, and the game is diversified. Thereby, the attention degree of a game can be raised.

  In addition, when a new entry to the starting entry part occurs in a situation where a game turning operation is being performed, a special notification about the special information acquired based on the entry will be issued It may be performed before the end timing of the operation. As a result, when special notification is performed, it is possible to speed up the time from when the starting ball enters the starting ball entering section until the special notification is performed, and for the player, the special notification is made. The opportunity to confirm is increased.

  Furthermore, a new entry to the starting entry part occurs in a situation where a game turning action is being performed, and a special notification about the special information acquired based on the entry is completed. When it is performed by the timing, the special notification is performed during a predetermined period during the game replay operation. Thereby, in the case where the setting for executing the special notification is performed in a situation where the game turning operation is being performed while the game turning operation is being performed, the complication of the processing can be suppressed.

Feature A2. The predetermined notification means is a pattern display means for variably displaying a pattern on a display screen (display screen G),
The game time control means starts displaying the variation of the picture on the picture display means before the transition judgment is made by the transition judgment means or based on the transition judgment being made by the transition judgment means. In accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination is displayed and the variation display of the pattern is terminated as one game time. It is intended to display a variation display of the game times,
The special notification control means is in a state in which a variation display of the game times related to the special information subject to the transition determination is performed before the special information set as a trigger for the execution of the special notification. The display mode of the display screen is a special mode corresponding to the content of the special information set as a trigger for the execution of the special notification, and the special notification is performed.
The period corresponding execution means is based on the fact that the specification is performed by the first specifying means in the predetermined period during the display of the change of the pattern in a situation where the display of the change of the pattern is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein the display mode of the display screen is the special mode in a situation where the variable display is performed.

  In the gaming machine of feature A2, the player grasps the transition determination result of each game time by visually recognizing the variation display mode of the pattern on the pattern display means. In this case, the special notification is performed by setting the display mode of the display screen during the variable display of the pattern as a special mode. As a result, for the player, if he / she pays attention to the display screen of the picture display means in an attempt to grasp the transition determination result of each game time, he / she can confirm the special notification, and even though the special notification has been performed. Therefore, it is suppressed that it is missed.

  In such a configuration, a new entry to the starting entry part occurs in a situation where the change display of the picture is being performed, and a special notification about the special information acquired based on the entry is displayed as a change display of the picture. When it is performed before the end timing, a special notification is performed during a predetermined period during the display of the variation of the pattern. As a result, it is possible to achieve the above-described effect while preventing the contents of the variable display of the pattern from becoming complicated.

Feature A3. The game time control means is a variable display time determination means for determining a variable display time when the picture is displayed in a variable manner at each game time (function for executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81). ), And when the variation display of the pattern of each game time is performed, the variation display of the pattern is finally stopped after the variation display time determined by the variation display time determination means has elapsed,
The period corresponding execution means is based on the fact that the specification is performed by the first specifying means in the predetermined period during the display of the change of the pattern in a situation where the display of the change of the pattern is performed. When the display mode of the display screen is set to the special mode in the situation where the variable display is performed, the variable display time determined by the variable display time determining means for the game times is not changed. The gaming machine according to Feature A2, wherein the display mode of the display screen is the special mode.

  According to the feature A3, even if a special notification is given during the game time while the variable display of the pattern is being performed, the variable display time of the pattern already determined at the game time is changed. There is nothing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for digesting each game time from being varied in a configuration in which special notification can be performed even while the variable display of the pattern is being performed.

  In addition, the “game time control means” stores in advance information on the variable display time when the graphic display is changed, instead of the “variable display time determination means”, and the variable display times are different. In this way, the variable display time information storage means (variable display time table storage area 223) that stores a plurality of types of information of the variable display time, and the transition determination means prior to the transition determination being performed by the transition determination means Is stored in the variable display time information storage means based on the contents of the special information to be subjected to the transition determination, when the variation display of the pattern is started based on the transition determination performed by the Fluctuation display time selection means (MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for selecting information of a predetermined variation display time from the plurality of types of information of the variation display time. The function of executing the setting process of the fluctuation display time in the above) and the variation of the picture prior to the shift determination being performed by the shift determination means or based on the shift determination being performed by the shift determination means An operation control unit (of the display control device 212) that starts display and finally stops the variable display of the pattern when the variable display time corresponding to the information of the variable display time selected by the variable display time selection unit elapses. And a function of executing a variable display control process in the MPU 252 ”.

  Feature A4. The variable display time determining means determines the variable display without reflecting the contents of the special information set as a trigger for execution of the special notification when determining the variable display time for the game times for which the special notification is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature A3, which determines time.

  According to the feature A4, since the variable display time in each game time is determined without reflecting the contents of the special information set to trigger the execution of the special notification, the special notification can be performed. In the configuration described above, it is possible to suppress the time required for digesting each game time depending on the content of the special information set as a trigger for executing the special notification.

  Note that a more specific configuration of the feature A4 is “whether or not to perform the special notification on the special information that is specified by the destination specifying unit based on the specification by the destination specifying unit. Notification execution determining means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212), and the special notification control means determines that the special notification is performed by the notification execution determination means. The variable display time determining means determines the variable display time in a situation where the notification execution determining means determines that the special notification is to be performed. In this case, the variable display time is determined without reflecting the content of the special information that has been determined to perform the special notification. " Configuration is conceivable to say.

  Further, the following configuration may be applied in place of the feature A3 and the feature A4. That is, the game time control means includes a variable display time determining means for determining a variable display time when the display of the picture is changed at each game time, and the display of the change of the picture at each game time is performed. The variation display time determined by the variation display time determination means is finally stopped so that the variation display of the pattern is stopped, and the variation display time determination means determines the variation for the game times for performing the special notification. The gaming machine according to Feature A2, wherein when the display time is determined, the variable display time is determined without reflecting the content of the special information that triggered the execution of the special notification. In this case, the function and effect described in the feature A4 can be achieved with respect to the configuration of the feature A2.

Feature A5. The game time control means is a display mode determination means for determining a series of display modes on the display screen when the display of the pattern is changed in each game time (the variable display pattern setting process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212). A function to be executed), and when the variation display of the pattern at each game time is performed, the variation display of the pattern is finally stopped by executing a series of display modes determined by the display mode determination means And
The period corresponding execution means is based on the fact that the specification is performed by the first specifying means in the predetermined period during the display of the change of the pattern in a situation where the display of the change of the pattern is performed. When the display mode of the display screen is set to the special mode in the situation where the variable display is performed, the variable display time corresponding to a series of display modes determined by the display mode determining means for the game times The gaming machine according to Feature A2, wherein the display mode of the display screen is changed to the special mode without changing the game mode.

  According to the feature A5, even if a special notification is given at the game time while the variable display of the pattern is being performed, the variable display time of the pattern already determined at the game time is changed. There is nothing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for digesting each game time from being varied in a configuration in which special notification can be performed even while the variable display of the pattern is being performed.

  In addition, the “game mode control means” stores in advance information on a series of display modes in the case where the variation display of the pattern is performed, instead of the “display mode determination unit”, and the contents of the display modes are respectively Prior to the transition determination being performed by the transition determination means or the display determination information storage means (variable display pattern table storage area 314) that stores a plurality of types of display mode information differently, or by the transition determination means A plurality of information stored in the display mode information storage means based on the contents of the special information to be subjected to the transition determination when the display of the variation of the pattern is started based on the transition determination being performed. Display mode selection means (variable display in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for selecting information of a predetermined display mode from among the types of display mode information A function for executing a setting process of a turn), and before the transition determination unit performs the transition determination, or based on the transition determination unit having started the transition determination And when the execution of a series of display modes corresponding to the information of the display mode selected by the display mode selection unit is completed, the motion control unit (MPU 252 of the display control device 212 and the display control unit 212) And a function of executing a process for displaying a variation of the symbol in the VDP 255).

  Feature A6. The display mode determination means, when determining the display mode for the game times for which the special notification is performed, does not have a variable display time reflecting the content of the special information set when the special notification is executed. The game machine according to Feature A5, wherein the display mode is determined.

  According to the feature A6, the variable display time in each game time is determined without reflecting the contents of the special information set to trigger the execution of the special notification. As a result, in the configuration in which the special notification can be performed, the time required to digest each game time varies depending on the content of the special information set to trigger the execution of the special notification. It is suppressed.

  In addition, as a more specific configuration of the feature A6, “whether or not to perform the special notification on the special information that is specified by the destination specifying unit based on the specification by the destination specifying unit is set. Notification execution determining means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212), and the special notification control means determines that the special notification is performed by the notification execution determination means. The special notification is performed when the notification is performed, and the display mode determination unit determines the display mode in a situation where the notification execution determination unit determines to perform the special notification. The display mode is determined while avoiding the variable display time reflecting the contents of the special information that has been determined to perform the special notification. Configuration that shall is ", can be considered.

  Further, the following configuration may be applied in place of the feature A5 and the feature A6. In other words, the game times control means includes display mode determination means for determining a series of display modes on a display screen when the display of the design is changed in each game time, and the display of the change of the design of each game time is displayed. When performed, the display variation determining display is finally stopped by executing a series of display modes determined by the display mode determining unit, and the display mode determining unit is configured to play the special notification. When determining the display mode, the display mode is determined while avoiding the variable display time reflecting the content of the special information that triggered the execution of the special notification. A gaming machine according to A2. In this case, with respect to the configuration of the feature A2, the effects described in the feature A6 can be achieved.

Feature A7. Notification execution determining means (MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for determining whether or not to perform the special notification on the special information targeted by the destination specifying means based on the fact that the destination specifying means has performed the specification. Function to execute the pending command handling process in)
The special notification control unit is configured to cause the special notification to be performed when the notification execution determination unit determines that the special notification is performed.
The period corresponding execution means is
Progress determination means for determining whether or not the notification execution determination means has determined that the special notification is performed during the period from the start of the variable display of the pattern until a predetermined reference period elapses ( The function of executing the processing of step S4505, step S4508, and step S4514 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212);
Correction information storage means (correction table storage area 316) for storing a plurality of types of information of display modes for correction after the reference period;
The reference period in the current game round based on the fact that the progress determination means determines that the notification execution determination means has performed the special notification until the reference period elapses. Display mode changing means for changing subsequent display mode information to the display mode information for correction corresponding to the display mode information (the processing of steps S4506, S4512, and S4518 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212). Function to execute)
With
The display mode information is changed to the display mode information for correction by the display mode changing means, so that the display mode of the display screen is the special mode in the game times related to the change.
The information on the display mode for correction is determined in such a manner that even if the display mode changing unit changes the information on the display mode for correction, the change display time in the game times is not changed. The gaming machine according to feature A5 or A6, characterized in that it is set in correspondence with information on a display mode that can be determined by means.

  According to the feature A7, when a special notification is made in the game times while the variation display of the pattern is being performed while the variation display time of the already determined pattern is not changed, the display mode is This information is changed to display mode information for correction. Therefore, it is not necessary for the subject executing the process to calculate the remaining time of the variable display and to generate the display mode information based on the calculation result, thereby reducing the processing load.

Feature A8. The special notification control means is in a state in which a variation display of the game times related to the special information subject to the transition determination is performed before the special information set as a trigger for the execution of the special notification. In the above, the special notification is performed by causing the variation display mode of the pattern to be a special mode according to the content of the special information set as the trigger of the execution of the special notification.
The period corresponding execution means is based on the fact that the specification is performed by the first specifying means in the predetermined period during the display of the change of the pattern in a situation where the display of the change of the pattern is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature A7, wherein the variation display mode of the pattern is the special mode in a situation where the variable display is performed.

  According to the feature A8, the special notification is performed by setting the variation display mode during the variation display of the pattern as a special mode. As a result, if the player pays attention to the variation display mode of the pattern in an attempt to grasp the judgment result of transition of each game time, the special notification can be confirmed by itself and the special notification is performed. , It is suppressed from being overlooked.

Feature A9. As a display mode of the pattern in the variable display of the pattern, a high identification display mode and a low identification display mode in which the distinguishability of the pattern by appearance is relatively high and low are set, and as a mode of the variable display of the pattern And a state in which a predetermined pattern is displayed in the high identification display mode after the state in which all the patterns are displayed in the low identification display mode continues for a predetermined period,
As the reference period, a special reference period from the state in which all the patterns are displayed in the low identification display mode to the timing when the predetermined pattern is switched to the state in which the high identification display mode is displayed is set,
As the information on the display mode for correction, it comprises information for special correction that is information on the display variation of the pattern after the special reference period,
The display mode changing means is based on the fact that the progress determining means determines that the special notification is performed by the notification execution determining means until the special reference period elapses. Special reference period response means (step S4505 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for changing the information of the variable display mode after the special reference period in the current game times to the special correction information corresponding to the information of the variable display mode. Function to execute the processing of)
The special correction information can be determined by the display mode determining means so that even if the special reference period handling means is changed to the special correction information, the variable display time in the game times is not changed. The gaming machine according to Feature A8, wherein the gaming machine is set in correspondence with display mode information.

  According to the feature A9, when the special notification is performed at the game time while the variation display of the pattern is being performed, the variation display mode of the pattern after the special reference period in the variation display mode of the pattern that is initially set. This information is changed to information for special correction. In this case, the special reference period is set as a period from the state in which all the patterns are displayed in the low identification display mode to the timing at which at least a part of the patterns are switched to the state in which the high identification display mode is displayed. . As a result, it is possible to change the variation display mode of the pattern without giving the player a sense of incompatibility compared to a configuration in which the variation display mode of the pattern is changed to correction information in a state where the high identification display mode is displayed. it can.

  In addition, as “high discrimination display mode and low discrimination display mode in which the distinctiveness of the pattern by appearance is relatively high and low”, “high-speed fluctuation display and low-speed fluctuation display in which the fluctuation display speed of the pattern is relatively high” is It is good also as the composition set up.

Feature A10. The pattern display means is configured to variably display a plurality of types of patterns in a predetermined order in each of a plurality of pattern display areas (symbol rows Z1 to Z3) on the display screen as the variation display of the patterns. ,
A first pattern display area (symbol line Z1) and a second pattern display area (symbol line Z2) as the plurality of pattern display areas;
As the display mode of the pattern in the variable display of the pattern, a high identification display mode and a low identification display mode in which the distinctiveness of the pattern by appearance is relatively high and low are set,
As a variation display mode of the pattern, a pattern that is variably displayed in the low identification display mode in the first pattern display area when a first reference period has elapsed from the start of the variation display of the pattern is the high identification. The display mode is switched to the state displayed in the display mode, and when the second reference period longer than the first reference period has elapsed since the start of the display of the variation of the pattern, the low identification display mode is set in the second pattern display area. The pattern that is variably displayed is provided with a mode that switches to a state displayed in the high identification display mode,
As information on the display mode for correction, information excluding the first pattern information after the first reference period and the first pattern display area after the second reference period. Second correction information that is information on the fluctuation display mode of
The display mode changing means includes
Based on the determination that the special notification is performed by the notification execution determination unit by the progress determination unit until the first reference period elapses, the current game times First reference period handling means for changing the information of the variable display mode after the first reference period to the first correction information corresponding to the information of the variable display mode (the process of step S4506 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212). Function to execute)
The progress determining means determines that the notification execution determining means determines that the special notification is to be performed after the first reference period has elapsed and before the second reference period has elapsed. Based on this, the second reference period corresponding means (display) for changing the information of the change display mode after the second reference period in the current game times to the second correction information corresponding to the information of the change display mode. The function of executing the process of step S4512 in the MPU 252 of the control device 212);
With
The first modification information and the second modification information are displayed in such a manner that even if the modification to the modification information is performed by the display aspect changing means, the variation display time in the game times is not changed. The gaming machine according to Feature A8, wherein the gaming machine is set in association with display mode information that can be determined by the determining means.

  According to the feature A10, when the special notification is performed in the game times while the variation display of the pattern is being performed, when it is determined that the special notification is performed before the first reference period elapses, This is performed by changing the information of the pattern variation display mode after the first reference period in the pattern variation display mode set initially to the first correction information. In addition, when it is determined that the special notification is to be made before the second reference period elapses, information on the variation display mode of the pattern after the second reference period in the variation display mode of the pattern that was initially set is displayed. This is done by changing to the second correction information. In this case, the first reference period is a period from the start of the variation display of the pattern until the state in which the pattern variably displayed in the low identification mode is displayed in the high identification display mode in the first pattern display area. Is set. In addition, the second reference period is a period from the start of the variable display of the pattern until the pattern that is variably displayed in the low identification display mode in the second pattern display area is switched to a state in which the pattern is displayed in the high identification display mode. Is set. Furthermore, the second correction information is set as information on the variable display mode of the pattern excluding the first pattern display area after the second reference period. As a result, it is possible to change the variation display mode of the pattern without giving the player a sense of incompatibility compared to a configuration in which the variation display mode of the pattern is changed to correction information in a state where the high identification display mode is displayed. it can.

  In particular, in the present configuration, the timing for switching from the state that is variably displayed in the low identification display mode to the state that is variably displayed in the high identification display mode is different between the first pattern display region and the second pattern display region. Corresponding to the above, the first correction information is set for the first reference period and the second correction information is set for the second reference period. As a result, compared with the configuration in which only one of the first correction information and the second correction information is set, when the decision to perform the special notification is made during the game round, There are many opportunities for special notifications to be started at game times.

Feature A11. The special notification control means is configured to trigger execution of the special notification based on a stop result of the game times related to the special information subjected to the transition determination before the special information set as an execution timing of the special notification. The special notification is made to be a special mode corresponding to the content of the special information set as:
The period corresponding execution means is based on the fact that the specification is performed by the first specifying means in the predetermined period in which the variation display of the pattern is being performed and the variation display of the pattern is being performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A10, characterized in that the result of the stop of the turn becomes the special mode.

  According to the feature A11, since the special notification is performed in the form of the stop result in each game round, the timing at which the special notification is performed becomes clear for the player, and the possibility of missing the special notification is reduced.

  Here, in the configuration provided with the feature A8, a configuration in which a part of the variation display mode of the pattern is changed to correction information when the mode of the initial stop result is changed to a special mode during the game round. Therefore, the mode of the stop result can be changed to a special mode in a series of flows in the display of the variation of the pattern.

  Further, in the configuration including the feature A9 or the feature A10, when changing the stop result mode to a special mode in a series of flows in the pattern display, the player changes the mode of the change display. It is possible not to give a sense of incongruity. In particular, in the configuration including the feature A10, the first correction is performed in accordance with the timing at which the first pattern display area is switched to the high identification display mode and the timing at which the second pattern display area is switched to the high identification display area. Since the usage information and the second correction information are set, it is possible to satisfactorily change the mode of the initial stop result during the game round to the special mode.

Feature A12. The pattern display means is configured to variably display a plurality of types of patterns in a predetermined order in each of a plurality of pattern display areas (symbol rows Z1 to Z3) on the display screen as the variation display of the patterns. ,
The game times control means is configured to display a game result stop result performed when special information corresponding to the transfer information is subject to transfer determination on a predetermined effective line on the display screen. In addition, a mode in which a combination of transition target patterns formed by patterns variably displayed in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped and displayed,
The special notification control means, as a special mode, a mode of a game result stoppage related to the special information subject to the transition determination before the special information set as a trigger for execution of the special notification, A combination formed by a pattern that is variably displayed in a plurality of pattern display areas, and a combination of a special notification target pattern different from the combination of the transition target patterns stops at the position different from the effective line or the effective line The gaming machine according to Feature A11, wherein the gaming machine is displayed.

  Since the combination of patterns to be transferred is stopped and displayed in the game times that shift to the predetermined game state, the player can clearly grasp that the game state shifts to the predetermined game state. In this case, according to the feature A12, since the combination of the special notification target pattern is stopped and displayed in the game times in which the special notification is performed, it is possible for the player to clearly understand that the game state shifts to the predetermined game state. .

  In the configuration provided with the feature A10, a plurality of combinations of the special notification target pictures are set, and the second reference correspondence unit grasps the stop picture grasping the stop picture in the first picture display area. Second correction information capable of stopping and displaying a combination of the means and the special notification target pattern including the picture grasped by the stop picture grasping means from the information stored in the correction information storage means A correction information specifying means for specifying, a configuration for changing the information of the variable display mode after the second reference period in the current game times to the second correction information specified by the correction information specifying means It is good. Thereby, even if it is a situation which cannot change change display mode already about the 1st picture display field, change of a stop result can be performed. Furthermore, according to the present configuration, since the type of the combination of the pattern to be specially notified may be determined based on the stop pattern initially set in the first pattern display area, the determination of the combination of the pattern Irregularity occurs, and diversification of stopping modes is achieved.

  Incidentally, in the above configuration, the correction information specifying unit can stop display of the combination of the special notification target pattern including the pattern grasped by the stop pattern grasping unit, and the variation display according to the original variation display mode. The second correction information that does not change time may be specified from the information stored in the correction information storage unit. In this case, the above-described excellent effect can be achieved while not changing the variation display time of each game time.

  Feature A13. The special notification target picture combination is such that the pattern constituting the transition target picture combination is stopped in each of the plurality of picture display areas while preventing the transition target picture combination from being stopped and displayed on one active line. The gaming machine according to Feature A12, wherein the gaming machine is set as a display mode.

  According to the feature A13, it is possible to resemble the combination mode of the special notification target picture pattern to the transition target pattern combination mode, and when the special notification target pattern combination is stopped and displayed, it corresponds to the special notification. It becomes easier for the player to understand.

  Feature A14. The special notification control means is configured to cause the special notification to be performed when it is determined that the special notification is performed based on the fact that the identification is performed by the destination specifying means, and the special notification is further performed. The combination of the special notification target picture as a result of stopping the game times in which the special notification is performed based on the result of stopping the game times related to the special information specified by the destination specifying unit when the decision to perform is made Type selection means (function to execute the processing of step S3906, step S4303 to step S4305, step S4307 to step S4309, step S4310 to step S4312 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212). A gaming machine according to feature A12 or A13.

  According to the feature A14, it is possible to relate the mode of the stop result with the game times in which the special notification is performed and the game times that have caused the special notification, and the display of the variation display mode of the pattern in these consecutive game times It can be provided to the player as a product.

Feature A15. Transition information storage means (presence / absence table storage area 221) for preliminarily storing the transition information is provided, and the transition information storage means stores first transition information (a jackpot winning prize stored in the success / failure table for the low probability mode) as the transition information. Information) and second transition information (information on winning the jackpot stored in the success / failure table for the high probability mode),
The state transition means includes
A first predetermined game which is a kind of the predetermined game state based on a result of the first transition correspondence that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means corresponds to the first transition information. A first state transition means (a function for executing various transition processes after a normal jackpot result in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) to transition to a state;
The gaming state is a kind of the predetermined gaming state based on the fact that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the second transition correspondence result that corresponds to the second transition information. Second state transition means for shifting to a second predetermined gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state (a function for executing various transition processes after a probable big hit result in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
With
The game times control means is configured such that a game result stop result performed when special information corresponding to the first transfer information is subjected to a transfer determination is displayed on one active line, the plurality of pictures. In a mode in which the combination of the first transition target pattern formed by the pattern that is variably displayed in the display area is stopped and displayed, and the special information corresponding to the second transition information is subject to transition determination. The mode of the result of stopping the game times to be performed is a mode in which the combination of the second transition target symbols formed by the symbols that are variably displayed in the plurality of symbol display areas is stopped and displayed on one active line. And
The special notification target picture combination is such that the pattern constituting the transition target picture combination is stopped in each of the plurality of pattern display areas while preventing the transition target picture combination from being stopped and displayed on one effective line. It ’s set as a display mode,
When the special information determined to perform the special notification corresponds to the first transition information, the type selection unit, the special notification target design corresponding to the combination of the second transition target design The game machine according to Feature A14, wherein the combination is not selected.

  According to the feature A15, when the stop result is compared between the game times in which the special notification is performed and the game times that have caused the special notification, the special notification target pattern corresponding to the combination of the second transition target patterns in the former Although the combination is stopped and displayed, the combination of the first transition target pattern is not stopped and displayed in the latter case. When such an event occurs, the player actually transitions to the first predetermined gaming state despite expecting the transition to the second predetermined gaming state through a special notification. May cause a decline in the player's willingness to play. On the other hand, according to the configuration of the feature A15, the above-described excellent effect can be achieved without causing a decrease in game motivation.

  The first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state may be the following gaming states. That is, the transition determination unit includes a high-probability transition determination unit (a function for executing the process of step S803 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) and a low-probability transition determination unit. (The function of executing the process of step S802 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81), and when the transition determination is performed, the first predetermined gaming state includes the high probability transition determination means and the low probability transition Among the determination means, the game state in which the transition determination is performed by the low probability transition determination unit, and the second predetermined gaming state is the high probability transition determination unit and the low probability transition when the transition determination is performed. Among the determination means, the first predetermined gaming state and the second state are configured such that the transition determination is performed by the high probability transition determination unit. It may be provided a difference in advantage between Teiyugi state.

  Also, a variable ball entry means (variable winning device 32) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is easy to enter and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the ball, Variable entry control means (a function for executing a big prize opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for executing variable entry control for switching to a closed state after the variable entry means is opened, and the variable entry Providing means (payout device 96, payout control device 97) for giving a game ball to the player based on the game ball entering the means, and the first predetermined game state by the first state transition means When the game state transitions to the state, the variable entry control by the variable entry control means until the number of times of switching between the open state and the closed state in the variable entry means reaches a predetermined number. And when the transition to the first predetermined gaming state is performed and the transition of the gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state by the second state transition means occurs, The variable entry control by the variable entry control means may be performed and the transition to the second predetermined gaming state may be performed until the number of times of switching to the closed state reaches a predetermined number.

  Feature A16. When a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit at the timing when the special notification is made based on the fact that the specification is performed by the destination specifying unit, the plurality of special information If the combination of the special notification target picture corresponding to the combination of the second transition target picture is selected by the type selection means in the previous game round, the game having the next order Restriction means (steps S4301, S4304, S4308, and S4308 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) that restricts the combination of the special notification target pattern corresponding to the first transition target pattern combination from being selected by the type selection unit A function of executing the processing of step S4311) The gaming machine according to 5.

  According to the feature A16, when the game times in which the special notification is performed are continued over a plurality of times, the combination of the special notification target design corresponding to the combination of the second transition target design is stopped and displayed in the previous game times. Nevertheless, the combination of the special notification target picture corresponding to the first transition target picture combination in the subsequent game round is restricted from being stopped and displayed. Thereby, when a special notification is performed over a plurality of game times, it is possible to favorably increase the player's expectation to shift to the second predetermined gaming state.

Feature A17. Provided with an opportunity information storage means (a function for storing a notice condition establishment flag in the work RAM 254 of the display control device 212) that stores the opportunity information based on the fact that the identification result by the destination identification means is a predetermined identification result;
In the situation where the trigger information is stored, the special notification control means stores a special notification corresponding to the information specified by the destination specifying means when the trigger information is stored. In this case, the special information that becomes the specific target of the destination specifying means and triggers the execution of the special notification is executed at a timing before the target of the transition determination,
Furthermore, an opportunity information determination means for determining whether or not the opportunity information is stored (a function of executing the processes of steps S3805 and S3809 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212);
While it is determined that the trigger information is stored, the special information acquired by the information acquisition means after the special information that triggers the execution of the special notification is the trigger for the execution of the special notification. Trigger information restricting means for restricting not to be set as information (function of executing an affirmative determination in step S3805 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212, executing a process after an affirmative determination in step S3809 Function)
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A16, comprising:

  According to the feature A17, even if special information is newly stored in a situation where special notification is already set, the special information is not set to be newly notified. As a result, the special information that triggers the execution of the special notification is not duplicated in the acquired information storage means, and the special information that triggers the execution of the special notification becomes clear. If the special information that triggers the execution of the special notification is duplicated, for example, it is necessary to consider the other special information when executing the special notification related to one of the special information, so the processing becomes complicated. Although there is a possibility, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring by preventing the above-described duplication from occurring.

Feature A18. Notification execution determining means (MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for determining whether or not to perform the special notification on the special information targeted by the destination specifying means based on the fact that the destination specifying means has performed the specification. Function to execute the pending command handling process in)
The gaming machine according to Feature A17, wherein the trigger information is stored in the trigger information storage means when the notification execution determining means determines to perform the special notification.

  According to the feature A18, the effect of the feature A17 can be achieved without restricting the specific execution in the first specifying means. As a result, for example, when the control entity that performs the process related to the first specifying unit is different from the control entity that performs the process related to the special notification, information on the latter control entity is determined to execute the special notification. There is no need for the subject to recognize it.

Feature A19. A transition information correspondence determination unit (a function for executing the processes of steps S3803 and S3808 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for determining whether or not special information corresponding to the transition information is stored in the acquired information storage unit; ,
While it is determined that special information corresponding to the migration information is stored in the acquired information storage unit, the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit after the special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit Transition information corresponding restriction means for restricting information not to be set as information that triggers execution of the special notification (function to execute processing after affirmative determination is made in step S3803 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212, step S3808) Function to execute processing after making an affirmative determination in),
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A18, comprising:

  According to feature A19, in a situation where a special notification is being executed, a transition of a predetermined gaming state is prevented from occurring in the game times related to the special information different from the special information that triggers the execution of the special notification. Can do.

  In the configuration including the feature A15 and the feature A16, even if the special information corresponding to the transition information is not set to trigger the execution of the special notification, the first transition information Special information corresponding to the second transition information is stored in a situation where special information that does not trigger the execution of the special notification is stored, and the special information is a trigger for the execution of the special notification. May be set to be. In this case, the special notification target picture combination corresponding to the second transition target picture combination is stopped and displayed as a special notification triggered by the latter special information in the game times before the game time related to the former special information. It is assumed that That is, it is assumed that the combination of the first transition target pattern is stopped and displayed in the subsequent game times, even though the combination of the special notification target pattern corresponding to the combination of the second transition target pattern is stopped and displayed. . When such an event occurs, the player actually transitions to the first predetermined gaming state despite expecting the transition to the second predetermined gaming state through a special notification. May cause a decline in the player's willingness to play. On the other hand, by providing the configuration of the feature A19, the above-described situation does not occur, and the above-described excellent effect can be achieved while preventing a decrease in game motivation.

Feature A20. Notification execution determining means (MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for determining whether or not to perform the special notification on the special information targeted by the destination specifying means based on the fact that the destination specifying means has performed the specification. Function to execute the pending command handling process in)
When it is determined by the notification execution determination means that the special notification is to be performed, the special information that is the target of the determination is set as a trigger for the execution of the special notification, so that the special notification control means The special notification is performed,
While it is determined that the special information corresponding to the migration information is stored in the acquired information storage unit, the migration information correspondence regulation unit is configured to perform the identification even if the identification is performed by the destination identification unit. The gaming machine according to Feature A19, characterized in that the determination is made so that the determination by the notification execution determination means is not performed.

  According to the feature A20, the function and effect of the feature A19 can be achieved without restricting specific execution by the first specifying unit.

Feature A21. Main control means (main control device 81) having at least the transition determination means and the destination specifying means and sub control means (display control device 212) provided separately from the first control means and having at least the notification control means And comprising
The main control means includes a specific result output means (function for executing a hold command setting process and an external output process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for outputting information on the specific result of the destination specifying means to the sub-control means. Has
The notification control unit is configured so that the special notification corresponding to the information specified by the destination specifying unit is a timing before the predetermined special information that is specified by the destination specifying unit is the target of the transition determination. Any one of features A1 to A20, wherein the predetermined notification unit or a different notification unit is controlled based on the information output from the determination result output unit. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature A21, the main control unit does not directly output the special information to the sub-control unit when causing the sub-control unit to execute the control for performing the special notification. In this case, the determination result is specified, and information on the specified result is output to the sub-control means. Therefore, even if information necessary for causing the sub-control unit to execute the control for performing the special notification is illegally acquired in the middle of output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, for example, The acquired information is not the special information itself but information of the identified result. In gaming machines that perform transition determination using numerical information, an act of illegally attempting to shift to a predetermined gaming state by illegally acquiring updated numerical information at present is assumed. In this case, in the configuration in which the special information is output as it is, when the special information is illegally acquired, the currently updated numerical information is illegally specified based on the acquired special information. There is a concern that On the other hand, as described above, since the information of the identified result is output instead of the special information itself, the above-described excellent effect can be achieved while suppressing the possibility of the fraud.

Feature B1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting entrance portion (upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34) provided in the gaming area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the gaming area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the start ball entrance unit;
Acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
When the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the predetermined transfer information and determines whether or not a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means Includes a transition determination unit (a function for executing a determination process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the transition determination on the plurality of special information,
The game state is shifted to a predetermined game state based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the transition information. State transition means (function for executing game state transition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
Prior to the transition determination being performed by the transition determination means or based on the transition determination being performed by the transition determination means, a game turn operation is started, corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means. The game turn operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game result operation being terminated as a stop result as one game time. Game time control means for controlling predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) (function to execute variation start processing in MPU 81 of main control device 81, function to execute variation display control processing in MPU 252 of display control device 212) ,
With
The game time control means is an operation continuation time determining means for determining an operation continuation time when the game turn operation is performed in each game time (function for executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81). ), And the game turning operation is finally stopped when the operation continuation time determined by the operation continuation time determining means has elapsed when the game turning operation of each game is performed. In
The information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the shift determination, the information before the predetermined special information is the target of the shift determination A destination specifying means (a function for executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) specified at timing;
The special notification corresponding to the information specified by the destination specifying means is executed by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means at a timing before the predetermined special information is subject to the transition determination. Special notification control means (a function for executing a stop result setting process corresponding to a holding notice in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 and a function for executing a process for changing);
With
The operation continuation time determining means determines the operation continuation time for game times related to other special information in a state where the special information set as a trigger for execution of the special notification is stored in the acquired information storage means In this case, the operation duration time is determined without reflecting the contents of the special information set as a trigger for the execution of the special notification.

  According to the characteristic B1, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage unit and is not the target of the transition determination is a timing before the special information is the target of the transition determination. May be executed in As a result, for the player, not only a game that causes a game ball to enter the starting pitching part and a game that confirms the transition determination result of the special information acquired based on the pitch, but also a plurality of special If the information is stored in the acquired information storage means, confirm or predict the result when the transition determination target is the target of transition determination according to the content of the special notification for the special information whose transition determination target is later. The game of doing is added, and the game is diversified. Thereby, the attention degree of a game can be raised.

  In addition, in the configuration that the special notification can be performed because the operation continuation time in each game time is determined without reflecting the content of the special information set to trigger the execution of the special notification It is possible to prevent the time required for digesting each game time from varying according to the content of the special information set to trigger the execution of the special notification.

  The configuration limited in any one of the features A1 to A21 may be applied to the feature B1.

Feature C1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting entrance portion (upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34) provided in the gaming area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the gaming area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the start ball entrance unit;
Acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
When the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the predetermined transfer information and determines whether or not a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means Includes a transition determination unit (a function for executing a determination process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the transition determination on the plurality of special information,
The game state is shifted to a predetermined game state based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the transition information. State transition means (function for executing game state transition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
In gaming machines equipped with
The information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the shift determination, the information before the predetermined special information is the target of the shift determination A destination specifying means (a function for executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) specified at timing;
An opportunity information storage means (a function for storing a notice condition establishment flag in the work RAM 254 of the display control device 212) for storing the opportunity information based on the fact that the identification result by the destination identification means is a predetermined identification result;
In the situation where the opportunity information is stored, a special notification corresponding to the information specified by the destination specifying means when the opportunity information is stored, and when the opportunity information is stored, Special notification control means (display control device 212) that causes special information that becomes a specific target and triggers execution of the special notification to be executed by a predetermined notification means at a timing prior to the transition determination target. A function for executing a stop result setting process corresponding to a pending notice in the MPU 252 and a function for executing a process for changing),
Trigger information determination means for determining whether or not the trigger information is stored (function to execute the processing of step S3805 and step S3809 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212);
While it is determined that the trigger information is stored, the special information acquired by the information acquisition means after the special information that triggers the execution of the special notification is the trigger for the execution of the special notification. Trigger information restricting means for restricting not to be set as information (function of executing an affirmative determination in step S3805 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212, executing a process after an affirmative determination in step S3809 Function)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic C1, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage unit and is not the target of the transition determination is a timing before the special information is the target of the transition determination. May be executed in As a result, for the player, not only a game that causes a game ball to enter the starting pitching part and a game that confirms the transition determination result of the special information acquired based on the pitch, but also a plurality of special If the information is stored in the acquired information storage means, confirm or predict the result when the transition determination target is the target of transition determination according to the content of the special notification for the special information whose transition determination target is later. The game of doing is added, and the game is diversified. Thereby, the attention degree of a game can be raised.

  Moreover, even if special information is newly stored in a situation where the special notification is already set, the special information is not set to be newly notified. Thereby, the special information that triggers the special notification is not redundantly stored in the acquired information storage means, and the special information that triggers the special notification becomes clear. If special information that triggers special notification is stored redundantly in the acquired information storage means, for example, it is necessary to consider other special information when executing special notification related to one special information. Although it may be complicated, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring by preventing the duplication from occurring.

Feature C2. Notification execution determining means (MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for determining whether or not to perform the special notification on the special information targeted by the destination specifying means based on the fact that the destination specifying means has performed the specification. Function to execute the pending command handling process in)
The gaming machine according to Feature C1, wherein the trigger information is stored in the trigger information storage means when the notification execution determining means determines to perform the special notification.

  According to the feature C2, the effect of the feature C1 can be achieved without restricting the specific execution in the first specifying unit. As a result, for example, when the control entity that performs the process related to the first specifying unit is different from the control entity that performs the process related to the special notification, information on the latter control entity is determined to execute the special notification. There is no need for the subject to recognize it.

Feature C3. Prior to the transition determination being performed by the transition determination means or based on the transition determination being performed by the transition determination means, a game turn operation is started, corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means. The game turn operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game result operation being terminated as a stop result as one game time. Game time control means for controlling the predetermined notification means or a different notification means (function for executing variation start processing in the MPU 81 of the main control device 81, function for executing change display control processing in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) With
The special notification control means causes the special notification to be performed in the game times related to the special information subject to the transition determination before the special information set as a trigger for the execution of the special notification. Further, on the basis of the content of the special information set as a trigger for the execution of the special notification, the mode determination means for determining the mode of the special notification for each game time when the special notification is performed (of the display control device 212) The gaming machine according to Feature C1 or C2, including a function of executing the processing of Step S3906, Step S4303 to Step S4305, Step S4307 to Step S4309, and Step S4310 to Step S4312 in the MPU 252.

  According to the feature C3, since the special notification mode is determined for each game time in which the special notification is performed, the special notification mode can be diversified. In addition, in the situation where the configuration of the feature C1 is provided and special information is already set, even if new special information is stored, the special information is set to be newly notified. There is no. Thereby, it is not necessary to refer to the contents of a plurality of special information when determining the special notification mode for each game, and the processing complexity when determining the special notification mode is suppressed.

Feature C4. A configuration in which special information corresponding to the transition information can be set as a trigger for execution of the special notification, and even special information not corresponding to the transition information can be set as a trigger for execution of the special notification And
The special notification control means determines, by the mode determination means, the result of stopping the game times related to the special information subject to the transition determination before the special information set as a trigger for the execution of the special notification. The game machine according to Feature C3, wherein the special notification is performed by using the special mode.

  According to the feature C4, the special information corresponding to the transition information can be set as a trigger for executing the special notification, and even the special information not corresponding to the transition information is set as a trigger for executing the special notification. Therefore, the opportunity for the special notification to be executed is increased. Further, when a special notification is made, it is possible to make the player predict whether or not it is triggered by special information corresponding to the transition information.

  In addition, since special notification is performed in the form of a stop result in each game round, if the player pays attention to the operation for game round in order to grasp the transition determination result of each game round, the special notification is confirmed automatically. Even if a special notification is made, it is suppressed that it is missed. In particular, the timing at which the special notification is performed becomes clear for the player, and the possibility of missing the special notification is reduced.

  However, in the configuration in which there are a plurality of special information set as triggers for executing special notifications in this configuration at the same time, the game times related to the special information that is the start target of the game times and the special information among the plurality of special information. Game times related to special notification triggered by information, game times related to special information to be started later, and game times related to special notification triggered by the special information among the plurality of special information The possibility of being continuous increases. If it does so, there exists a possibility that the uniformity of the aspect in the case of performing special alerting | reporting may be impaired. On the other hand, in the situation where the configuration of the feature C1 is provided and special information is already set, even if new special information is stored, the special information is set to be newly notified. It will never be done. Therefore, the above situation is less likely to occur.

Feature C5. Transition information storage means (presence / absence table storage area 221) for preliminarily storing the transition information is provided, and the transition information storage means stores first transition information (a jackpot winning prize stored in the success / failure table for the low probability mode) as the transition information. Information) and second transition information (information on winning the jackpot stored in the success / failure table for the high probability mode),
The state transition means includes
A first predetermined game which is a kind of the predetermined game state based on a result of the first transition correspondence that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means corresponds to the first transition information. A first state transition means (a function for executing various transition processes after a normal jackpot result in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) to transition to a state;
The gaming state is a kind of the predetermined gaming state based on the fact that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the second transition correspondence result that corresponds to the second transition information. Second state transition means for shifting to a second predetermined gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state (a function for executing various transition processes after a probable big hit result in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
With
As the predetermined notification means, a picture display means having a display screen and variably displaying a plurality of types of pictures in a predetermined order in each of a plurality of picture display areas (symbol rows Z1 to Z3) on the display screen. (Design display device 41)
The game times control means may display a variation of the pattern in the plurality of picture display areas prior to the transition determination being performed by the transition determination means or based on the transition determination being performed by the transition determination means. In response to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination is displayed and the variation display of the pattern is terminated as one game time. In addition, the display of the variation of the pattern of each game time is performed, and furthermore, the result of the stop of the game times performed when the special information corresponding to the first transition information is subject to the transition determination. The mode is a mode in which the combination of the first transition target designs formed by the designs that are variably displayed in the plurality of design display areas is stopped and displayed on one effective line. The aspect of the result of the stoppage of the game times performed when the special information corresponding to the second transition information is subject to transition determination is variably displayed in the plurality of types of picture display areas on one active line. The combination of the second transition target pattern formed by the pattern to be stopped is displayed,
The mode of the stop result determined by the mode determination means in the game round in which the special notification is performed is that the combination of the transition target patterns is not displayed on the one active line while the combination of the transition target patterns is not stopped and displayed. The pattern to be configured is set as an aspect that is stopped and displayed in each of the plurality of pattern display areas,
When the special information set as a trigger for the execution of the special notification corresponds to the first transition information, the aspect determination means sets a stop result aspect corresponding to the combination of the second transition target pictures. The gaming machine according to Feature C4, which is not selected.

  According to the feature C5, the special notification is set as a trigger for execution of the special notification in spite of the special notification being performed in the form of the stop result corresponding to the combination of the second transition target patterns in the game times in which the special notification is performed. In the game times related to the special information, there is no possibility that the combination of the first transition target pattern is stopped and displayed. When such an event occurs, the player actually transitions to the first predetermined gaming state despite expecting the transition to the second predetermined gaming state through a special notification. May cause a decline in the player's willingness to play. On the other hand, according to the configuration of the present feature C5, the above-described excellent effect can be achieved without causing a decrease in game motivation.

  In addition, in the situation where the configuration of the feature C1 is provided and special information is already set, even if new special information is stored, the special information is set to be newly notified. There is no. As a result, it is difficult for a situation in which game times related to special notifications triggered by different special information occur continuously. For example, if such a situation occurs, the first game target group in the subsequent game times group will receive a special notification in the form of a stop result corresponding to the combination of the second pattern to be transferred in the previous game times group. Although an event that the combination of pictures is stopped and displayed may occur, according to the present configuration, it is difficult to generate such an event.

  The first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state may be the following gaming states. That is, the transition determination unit includes a high-probability transition determination unit (a function for executing the process of step S803 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) and a low-probability transition determination unit. (The function of executing the process of step S802 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81), and when the transition determination is performed, the first predetermined gaming state includes the high probability transition determination means and the low probability transition Among the determination means, the game state in which the transition determination is performed by the low probability transition determination unit, and the second predetermined gaming state is the high probability transition determination unit and the low probability transition when the transition determination is performed. Among the determination means, the first predetermined gaming state and the second state are configured such that the transition determination is performed by the high probability transition determination unit. It may be provided a difference in advantage between Teiyugi state.

  Also, a variable ball entry means (variable winning device 32) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is easy to enter and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the ball, Variable entry control means (a function for executing a big prize opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for executing variable entry control for switching to a closed state after the variable entry means is opened, and the variable entry Providing means (payout device 96, payout control device 97) for giving a game ball to the player based on the game ball entering the means, and the first predetermined game state by the first state transition means When the game state transitions to the state, the variable entry control by the variable entry control means until the number of times of switching between the open state and the closed state in the variable entry means reaches a predetermined number. And when the transition to the first predetermined gaming state is performed and the transition of the gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state by the second state transition means occurs, The variable entry control by the variable entry control means may be performed and the transition to the second predetermined gaming state may be performed until the number of times of switching to the closed state reaches a predetermined number.

  Feature C6. In the case where a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit at a timing when the special notification is made based on the fact that the specification is performed by the destination specifying unit. In the game times related to the plurality of special information, if the order of the stop result corresponding to the combination of the second transition target patterns is selected in the previous game time, the order is in the later game time. The gaming machine according to Feature C5, wherein a stop result mode corresponding to the combination of the first transition target pictures is not selected.

  According to the feature C6, when the game times in which the special notification is performed are continued for a plurality of times, the special notification is performed in the previous game times in the form of the stop result corresponding to the second transition target pattern combination. Nevertheless, the special notification is restricted from being performed in the form of the stop result corresponding to the combination of the first transition target pattern in the subsequent game round. Thereby, when a special notification is performed over a plurality of game times, it is possible to favorably increase the player's expectation to shift to the second predetermined gaming state.

  In addition, in the situation where the configuration of the feature C1 is provided and special information is already set, even if new special information is stored, the special information is set to be newly notified. There is no. As a result, it is difficult for a situation in which game times related to special notifications triggered by different special information occur continuously. For example, if such a situation occurs, the first game target group in the subsequent game times group will receive a special notification in the form of a stop result corresponding to the combination of the second pattern to be transferred in the previous game times group. Although an event that the combination of pictures is stopped and displayed may occur, according to the present configuration, it is difficult to generate such an event.

Feature C7. The predetermined notification means includes individual display areas corresponding to the specified number (first to fourth unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 in the first hold display area Ga, and first to fourth units in the second hold display area Gb. It is provided with the hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4) and corresponds to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means and not subject to the transition determination among the prescribed number of individual display areas. Individual display in a number of individual display areas,
The special notification control means causes the individual display mode in the individual display region corresponding to the special information set as a trigger for the execution of the special notification to be a special mode among the plurality of individual display regions. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein the special notification is performed.

  According to feature C7, the number of special information is taught through the display in the individual display area. In this case, since special notification is performed by setting the individual display mode in the individual display area to be a special mode, the special information set as a trigger for the execution of the special notification becomes the target of the transition determination. The player can clearly grasp the timing.

  In addition, in the situation where the configuration of the feature C1 is provided and special information is already set, even if new special information is stored, the special information is set to be newly notified. There is no. As a result, a plurality of individual display areas that are in a special mode are not simultaneously present. Therefore, for example, according to the transition determination result of the special information that is the target of the special mode and the target of the transition determination first, the special mode related to the special information that is the target of the transition determination after that There is no need to perform processing such as changing to the normal individual display mode or changing the content of the special mode.

Feature C8. The transition determination means includes a high-probability transition determination means (function to execute the processing of step S803 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) and a low-probability transition determination means (main A function of executing the process of step S802 in the MPU 202 of the control device 81), and based on the transition of the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state by the state transition unit, the high probability transition determination unit and The low-probability transition determination unit is configured to switch from a state where the transition determination is performed on one side to a state where the transition determination is performed on the other side,
At least a part of the transition information in the high probability transition determination unit is set not to overlap with the transition information in the low probability transition determination unit,
The special notification control means determines that the individual display area in the individual display area corresponding to the special information is based on the fact that the special information targeted for identification corresponds to the transition information and is specified by the destination specifying means. The gaming machine according to Feature C7, further comprising transition information correspondence setting means (a function of executing a hold notification control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) that causes the mode to be the special mode.

  According to the feature C8, since the individual display area corresponding to the special information corresponding to the transition information may be in a special mode, the player can confirm or predict that the transition correspondence result will be obtained, The resulting timing can be ascertained.

  However, in the configuration in which a plurality of special information set as triggers for executing the special notification in the present configuration is present at the same time and there are a plurality of individual display areas that are in a special mode at the same time, Among the plurality of special information that has been set, the transition to the predetermined gaming state is caused by the special information that is subject to the transition determination first, and the transition determination is performed in the high probability transition determination means in the low probability transition determination means It is possible to switch to a state where a transition determination is made. In this case, if the special information to be subjected to the transition determination later among the plurality of special information set as the trigger for the execution of the special notification is transferred in the high probability transition determination unit, the transition is performed. If the transition determination is performed in the low probability transition determination means, the special mode already performed for the special information is changed to the normal individual display mode. It becomes necessary to perform processing such as changing or changing the contents of the special mode. On the other hand, in the situation where the configuration of the feature C1 is provided and special information is already set, even if new special information is stored, the special information is set to be newly notified. Since this is not done, the above situation does not occur.

Feature C9. The transition determination means includes a high-probability transition determination means (function to execute the processing of step S803 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) and a low-probability transition determination means (main A function of executing the process of step S802 in the MPU 202 of the control device 81), and based on the transition of the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state by the state transition unit, the high probability transition determination unit and The low-probability transition determination unit is configured to switch from a state where the transition determination is performed on one side to a state where the transition determination is performed on the other side,
The transition information in the low probability transition determination means and the transition information in the high probability transition determination means are set so as not to overlap each other.
The special notification control means determines that the individual display area in the individual display area corresponding to the special information is based on the fact that the special information as a determination target corresponds to the transition information and is specified by the destination specifying means. The gaming machine according to Feature C7, further comprising transition information correspondence setting means (a function of executing a hold notification control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) that causes the mode to be the special mode.

  According to the feature C9, since the individual display area corresponding to the special information corresponding to the transition information may be in a special mode, the player can confirm or predict that the transition correspondence result will be obtained, The resulting timing can be ascertained.

  However, in the configuration in which a plurality of special information set as triggers for executing the special notification in the present configuration is present at the same time and there are a plurality of individual display areas that are in a special mode at the same time, Of the plurality of special information that has been set, the transition to the predetermined gaming state occurs due to the special information that is subject to the transition determination first, and the transition determination is performed in one of the high probability transition determination means and the low probability transition determination means. It is possible to switch from one state to the other to a state where a transition determination is made on the other side. In this case, the special mode that has already been performed for the special information that is the target of the migration determination later among the plurality of special information that is set as the trigger for the execution of the special notification is changed to a normal individual display mode, or It is necessary to perform processing such as changing the contents of the special mode. On the other hand, in the situation where the configuration of the feature C1 is provided and special information is already set, even if new special information is stored, the special information is set to be newly notified. Since this is not done, the above situation does not occur.

  The configuration limited in any one of the features A1 to A21 may be applied to any one of the features C1 to C9.

Feature D1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting entrance portion (upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34) provided in the gaming area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the gaming area;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the start ball entrance unit;
Acquisition information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
When the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the predetermined transfer information and determines whether or not a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means Includes a transition determination unit (a function for executing a determination process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the transition determination on the plurality of special information,
The game state is shifted to a predetermined game state based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the transition information. State transition means (function for executing game state transition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
In gaming machines equipped with
The information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the shift determination, the information before the predetermined special information is the target of the shift determination A destination specifying means (a function for executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) specified at timing;
Special notification control is performed so that the special notification corresponding to the information specified by the destination specifying unit is executed by the predetermined notification unit at a timing before the predetermined special information becomes the target of the transition determination. Means (a function for executing a stop result setting process corresponding to a hold notice in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 and a function for executing a process for changing);
Transition information determination means for determining whether or not special information corresponding to the transition information is stored in the acquired information storage means (a function for executing the processes of steps S3803 and S3808 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212);
While it is determined that special information corresponding to the migration information is stored in the acquired information storage unit, the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit after the special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit Transition information corresponding restriction means for restricting information not to be set as information that triggers execution of the special notification (function to execute processing after affirmative determination is made in step S3803 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212, step S3808) Function to execute processing after making an affirmative determination in),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D1, a special notification corresponding to predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage unit and is not subject to transition determination is a timing before the special information is subject to transition determination. May be executed in As a result, for the player, not only a game that causes a game ball to enter the starting pitching part and a game that confirms the transition determination result of the special information acquired based on the pitch, but also a plurality of special If the information is stored in the acquired information storage means, confirm or predict the result when the transition determination target is the target of transition determination according to the content of the special notification for the special information whose transition determination target is later. The game of doing is added, and the game is diversified. Thereby, the attention degree of a game can be raised.

  Further, in a situation where special information corresponding to the migration information is stored, even if special information is newly stored, the special information is not set to be notified. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the transition of the predetermined game state from occurring in the game times related to the special information different from the special information that triggers the execution of the special notification in a situation where the special notification is being executed.

Feature D2. Notification execution determining means (MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for determining whether or not to perform the special notification on the special information targeted by the destination specifying means based on the fact that the destination specifying means has performed the specification. Function to execute the pending command handling process in)
When it is determined by the notification execution determination means that the special notification is to be performed, the special information that is the target of the determination is set as a trigger for the execution of the special notification, so that the special notification control means The special notification is performed,
While it is determined that the special information corresponding to the migration information is stored in the acquired information storage unit, the migration information correspondence regulation unit is configured to perform the identification even if the identification is performed by the destination identification unit. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, characterized in that the determination is made so that the determination by the notification execution determination unit is not performed.

  According to the feature D2, the effect of the feature D1 can be achieved without restricting the specific execution in the first specifying means.

  Feature D3. The notification execution determining means is configured so as not to determine whether to perform the special notification for the special information even if it is special information corresponding to the transition information. A gaming machine according to Feature D2.

  According to the feature D3, even the special information corresponding to the transition information may not be set as a trigger for the execution of the special notification. Therefore, irregularity occurs in the execution of the special notification, and the special notification is not performed. Diversification of the situation to be done

  However, in the situation where special information corresponding to the transition information in this configuration is stored and special information that is not set as a trigger for executing the special notification is stored, the newly acquired special information is a trigger for the execution of the special notification. If the special information of the latter is given before the special information of the former is subject to transition determination and the special information is being made, or the special information After the notification is performed, it may happen that the transition determination is performed on the former special information not related to the special notification and a transition correspondence result is obtained. If it does so, the content of the special alert already performed and the subsequent game result will not correspond, and there is a possibility that a player may be confused. On the other hand, in the situation where the configuration of the feature D1 is provided and special information corresponding to the transition information is stored, even if new special information is stored, the special information is set to be notified specially. Therefore, the above situation does not occur.

Feature D4. Transition information storage means (presence / absence table storage area 221) for preliminarily storing the transition information is provided, and the transition information storage means stores first transition information (a jackpot winning prize stored in the success / failure table for the low probability mode) as the transition information. Information) and second transition information (information on winning the jackpot stored in the success / failure table for the high probability mode),
The state transition means includes
A first predetermined game which is a kind of the predetermined game state based on a result of the first transition correspondence that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means corresponds to the first transition information. A first state transition means (a function for executing various transition processes after a normal jackpot result in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) to transition to a state;
The gaming state is a kind of the predetermined gaming state based on the fact that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the second transition correspondence result that corresponds to the second transition information. Second state transition means for shifting to a second predetermined gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state (a function for executing various transition processes after a probable big hit result in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
With
As the predetermined notification means, a picture display means having a display screen and variably displaying a plurality of types of pictures in a predetermined order in each of a plurality of picture display areas (symbol rows Z1 to Z3) on the display screen. (Design display device 41)
Prior to the transition determination being performed by the transition determination means or based on the transition determination being performed by the transition determination means, the variation display of the pattern is started in the plurality of pattern display areas, and the transition determination The stop result corresponding to the determination result is displayed and the display of the variation of the pattern is terminated as one game time, and the pattern of each game time is determined according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The picture display means is controlled so that the variable display is performed, and the aspect of the result of stopping the game times that is performed when the special information corresponding to the first transition information is subject to transition determination is On the active line, the combination of the first transition target patterns formed by the patterns variably displayed in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped and displayed, and the second transition is performed. Form of the result of the stoppage of the game times performed when the special information corresponding to the information is subject to transition determination is formed on the one active line by a pattern variably displayed in the plurality of types of pattern display areas Game turn control means (a function of executing variation start processing in the MPU 81 of the main control device 81, and variation display control processing in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) in which the combination of the second transition target patterns to be displayed is stopped and displayed Function)
The special notification control means is configured to change the state of the result of stopping the game times related to the special information subject to the transition determination before the special information set as a trigger for execution of the special notification. Mode determining means for determining based on the content of the special information set as an execution trigger (the processing of step S3906, step S4303 to step S4305, step S4307 to step S4309, step S4310 to step S4312 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) A function to be executed), and the special notification is performed by becoming a mode of the stop result determined by the mode determination unit.
The mode of the stop result determined by the mode determination means in the game round in which the special notification is performed is that the combination of the transition target patterns is not displayed on the one active line while the combination of the transition target patterns is not stopped and displayed. The pattern to be configured is set as an aspect that is stopped and displayed in each of the plurality of pattern display areas,
When the special information set as a trigger for the execution of the special notification corresponds to the first transition information, the aspect determination means sets a stop result aspect corresponding to the combination of the second transition target pictures. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, which is not selected.

  According to the feature D4, since the mode of the special notification is determined for each game time in which the special notification is performed, the special notification mode can be diversified. In addition, since special notification is performed in the form of a stop result in each game round, if the player pays attention to the change display of the pattern in order to grasp the transition determination result of each game round, the special notification is automatically confirmed. Even if a special notification is made, it is suppressed that it is missed. In particular, the timing at which the special notification is performed becomes clear for the player, and the possibility of missing the special notification is reduced.

  In addition, the special information set as the trigger for executing the special notification is provided in spite of the special notification being performed in the form of the stop result corresponding to the combination of the second transition target patterns in the game times in which the special notification is performed. In such a game round, the event that the combination of the first transition target picture is stopped and displayed does not occur. When such an event occurs, the player actually transitions to the first predetermined gaming state despite expecting the transition to the second predetermined gaming state through a special notification. May cause a decline in the player's willingness to play. On the other hand, according to the configuration of the feature D4, the above-described excellent effect can be achieved without causing a decrease in game motivation.

  Further, for example, assuming a configuration in which special notification is newly performed for special information newly stored in a situation in which special information corresponding to the transition information is stored, the former special information becomes the first transition information. When the latter special information corresponds to the second transition information, the special notification is performed in the form of the stop result corresponding to the combination of the second transition target pictures as the special notification about the latter special information. After that, there may occur an event that the combination of the first transition target pattern is stopped and displayed. In this case, there is a risk of reducing the player's willingness to play. On the other hand, in the situation where the configuration of the feature D1 is provided and special information corresponding to the transition information is stored, even if new special information is stored, the special information is set to be notified specially. Therefore, the occurrence of the above event can be suppressed.

  The first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state may be the following gaming states. That is, the transition determination unit includes a high-probability transition determination unit (a function for executing the process of step S803 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) and a low-probability transition determination unit. (The function of executing the process of step S802 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81), and when the transition determination is performed, the first predetermined gaming state includes the high probability transition determination means and the low probability transition Among the determination means, the game state in which the transition determination is performed by the low probability transition determination unit, and the second predetermined gaming state is the high probability transition determination unit and the low probability transition when the transition determination is performed. Among the determination means, the first predetermined gaming state and the second state are configured such that the transition determination is performed by the high probability transition determination unit. It may be provided a difference in advantage between Teiyugi state.

  Also, a variable ball entry means (variable winning device 32) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is easy to enter and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the ball, Variable entry control means (a function for executing a big prize opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for executing variable entry control for switching to a closed state after the variable entry means is opened, and the variable entry Providing means (payout device 96, payout control device 97) for giving a game ball to the player based on the game ball entering the means, and the first predetermined game state by the first state transition means When the game state transitions to the state, the variable entry control by the variable entry control means until the number of times of switching between the open state and the closed state in the variable entry means reaches a predetermined number. And when the transition to the first predetermined gaming state is performed and the transition of the gaming state to the second predetermined gaming state by the second state transition means occurs, The variable entry control by the variable entry control means may be performed and the transition to the second predetermined gaming state may be performed until the number of times of switching to the closed state reaches a predetermined number.

  Feature D5. In the case where a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit at a timing when the special notification is made based on the fact that the specification is performed by the destination specifying unit. In the game times related to the plurality of special information, if the order of the stop result corresponding to the combination of the second transition target patterns is selected in the previous game time, the order is in the later game time. The gaming machine according to Feature D4, wherein a mode of a stop result corresponding to the combination of the first transition target pictures is not selected.

  According to the feature D5, when the game times in which the special notification is performed continue for a plurality of times, the combination of the special notification target design corresponding to the combination of the second transition target design is stopped and displayed in the previous game times. Nevertheless, the combination of the special notification target picture corresponding to the first transition target picture combination in the subsequent game round is restricted from being stopped and displayed. Thereby, when a special notification is performed over a plurality of game times, it is possible to favorably increase the player's expectation to shift to the second predetermined gaming state.

  Further, for example, assuming a configuration in which special notification is newly performed for special information newly stored in a situation in which special information corresponding to the transition information is stored, the former special information becomes the first transition information. When the latter special information corresponds to the second transition information, the special notification is performed in the form of the stop result corresponding to the combination of the second transition target pictures as the special notification about the latter special information. After that, there may occur an event that the combination of the first transition target pattern is stopped and displayed. In this case, there is a risk of reducing the player's willingness to play. On the other hand, in the situation where the configuration of the feature D1 is provided and special information corresponding to the transition information is stored, even if new special information is stored, the special information is set to be notified specially. Therefore, the occurrence of the above event can be suppressed.

Feature D6. The predetermined notification means includes individual display areas corresponding to the specified number (first to fourth unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 in the first hold display area Ga, and first to fourth units in the second hold display area Gb. It is provided with the hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4) and corresponds to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means and not subject to the transition determination among the prescribed number of individual display areas. Individual display in a number of individual display areas,
The special notification control means causes the individual display mode in the individual display region corresponding to the special information set as a trigger for the execution of the special notification to be a special mode among the plurality of individual display regions. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the special notification is performed.

  According to feature D6, the number of special information is taught through the display in the individual display area. In this case, since special notification is performed by setting the individual display mode in the individual display area to be a special mode, the special information set as a trigger for the execution of the special notification becomes the target of the transition determination. The player can clearly grasp the timing.

  Moreover, even if special information is newly stored in the situation where the special information corresponding to the transition information is stored with the configuration of the feature D1, the special information is set so as to perform special notification. Absent. As a result, a plurality of individual display areas that are in a special mode based on the special information corresponding to the migration information do not exist at the same time. Therefore, for example, according to the transition determination result of the special information that is the target of the special mode and the target of the transition determination first, the special mode related to the special information that is the target of the transition determination after that There is no need to perform processing such as changing to the normal individual display mode or changing the content of the special mode.

Feature D7. The transition determination means includes a high-probability transition determination means (function to execute the processing of step S803 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) and a low-probability transition determination means (main A function of executing the process of step S802 in the MPU 202 of the control device 81), and based on the transition of the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state by the state transition unit, the high probability transition determination unit and The low-probability transition determination unit is configured to switch from a state where the transition determination is performed on one side to a state where the transition determination is performed on the other side,
At least a part of the transition information in the high probability transition determination unit is set not to overlap with the transition information in the low probability transition determination unit,
The special notification control means determines that the individual display area in the individual display area corresponding to the special information is based on the fact that the special information targeted for identification corresponds to the transition information and is specified by the destination specifying means. The gaming machine according to feature D6, further comprising transition information correspondence setting means (a function of executing a hold notification control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) that causes the mode to be the special mode.

  According to the feature D7, for the special information corresponding to the transition information, the corresponding individual display area may be in a special mode, so that the player can confirm or predict that the transition correspondence result will be obtained, The resulting timing can be ascertained.

  However, in the configuration in which a plurality of special information set as triggers for executing the special notification in the present configuration is present at the same time and there are a plurality of individual display areas that are in a special mode at the same time, Among the plurality of special information that has been set, the transition to the predetermined gaming state is caused by the special information that is subject to the transition determination first, and the transition determination is performed in the high probability transition determination means in the low probability transition determination means It is possible to switch to a state where a transition determination is made. In this case, if the special information to be subjected to the transition determination later among the plurality of special information set as the trigger for the execution of the special notification is transferred in the high probability transition determination unit, the transition is performed. If the transition determination is performed in the low probability transition determination means, the special mode already performed for the special information is changed to the normal individual display mode. It becomes necessary to perform processing such as changing or changing the contents of the special mode. On the other hand, in the situation where the configuration of the feature D1 is provided and special information corresponding to the transition information is stored, even if new special information is stored, the special information is set to be notified specially. The above situation does not occur.

Feature D8. The transition determination means includes a high-probability transition determination means (function to execute the processing of step S803 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) and a low-probability transition determination means (main A function of executing the process of step S802 in the MPU 202 of the control device 81), and based on the transition of the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state by the state transition unit, the high probability transition determination unit and The low-probability transition determination unit is configured to switch from a state where the transition determination is performed on one side to a state where the transition determination is performed on the other side,
The transition information in the low probability transition determination means and the transition information in the high probability transition determination means are set so as not to overlap each other.
The special notification control means determines that the individual display area in the individual display area corresponding to the special information is based on the fact that the special information as a determination target corresponds to the transition information and is specified by the destination specifying means. The gaming machine according to feature D6, further comprising transition information correspondence setting means (a function of executing a hold notification control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) that causes the mode to be the special mode.

  According to the feature D8, for the special information corresponding to the transition information, the corresponding individual display area may be in a special mode, so that it can be confirmed or predicted that a transition correspondence result will be obtained for the player, The resulting timing can be ascertained.

  However, in the configuration in which a plurality of special information set as triggers for executing the special notification in the present configuration is present at the same time and there are a plurality of individual display areas that are in a special mode at the same time, Of the plurality of special information that has been set, the transition to the predetermined gaming state occurs due to the special information that is subject to the transition determination first, and the transition determination is performed in one of the high probability transition determination means and the low probability transition determination means. It is possible to switch from one state to the other to a state where a transition determination is made on the other side. In this case, the special mode that has already been performed for the special information that is the target of the migration determination later among the plurality of special information that is set as the trigger for the execution of the special notification is changed to a normal individual display mode, or It is necessary to perform processing such as changing the contents of the special mode. On the other hand, in the situation where the configuration of the feature D1 is provided and special information corresponding to the transition information is stored, even if new special information is stored, the special information is set to be notified specially. The above situation does not occur.

  The configuration limited in any one of the features A1 to A21 may be applied to any one of the features D1 to D8.

Feature E1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting entrance portion (upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34) provided in the gaming area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the gaming area;
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the starting entrance part, a determination is made as to whether or not the game state is to be shifted to a predetermined game state, and a game is determined based on the result of the determination. Main control means (main control device 81) for shifting the state to the predetermined gaming state;
Sub-control means (voice lamp control device 82, display control device 212) for controlling predetermined notification means (first hold display area Ga in the symbol display device 41) based on the information output from the main control means,
In gaming machines equipped with
The game area is provided with at least a first starting ball entering portion (upper working port 33) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 34) as the starting ball entering portion.
The main control means includes
Random number information updating means for updating predetermined random number information (function of executing the process of step S103 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
Information acquisition means for acquiring, as special information, random number information updated by the random number information update means based on the game ball entering the first starting entrance part or the second starting entrance part A function of executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
First acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means when a game ball has entered the first starting entrance part as a plurality of numbers, with a first predetermined number set as an upper limit. (Holding area Ra for the first result display section),
Second acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when a game ball enters the second starting entrance section as a plurality of numbers, with a second predetermined number set in advance as an upper limit. (Second result display area reservation area Rb),
It is determined whether or not one special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means or the second acquisition information storage means corresponds to predetermined transfer information, and the first acquisition When a plurality of special information is stored in the information storage unit or the second acquired information storage unit, a transition determination unit that sequentially performs the transition determination on the plurality of special information (variation in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) Function to execute the start process), and
State transition for shifting the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determining means that the transition target result indicates that the special information to be determined corresponds to the transition information. Means (function for executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
When special information is stored in the second acquired information storage means, the special information acquired by the information acquisition means at an earlier timing than the stored special information is stored in the first acquired information storage means. Priority means (data setting process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that makes the transition determination by the transition determination means to the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means even if stored Function to execute)
The determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means is the target of the shift determination is specified at a timing before the predetermined special information is the target of the shift determination. Determination result specifying means (function for executing confirmation processing for hold notification in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
Determination result output means for outputting information on the result specified by the determination result specifying means to the sub-control means (function for executing the operation winning command setting process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
With
Based on the information output from the determination result output unit, the sub-control unit performs a special notification reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the transition determination, and the predetermined special information Is executed at a timing prior to the transition determination target, notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means (function for executing command response processing in the MPU 242 of the audio lamp control device 82, display control) A game machine having a function of executing a hold notification control process in the MPU 252 of the device 212).

  In the gaming machine of feature E1, a transition determination is performed on the special information that is acquired by the entry to the starting pitching unit and stored in the acquired information storage unit, and the special information is the transition information. Based on the determination, the gaming state shifts to a predetermined gaming state.

  In this case, a first starting ball entering portion and a second starting ball entering portion are provided as the starting ball entering portions, and the first acquisition information storage device and the second acquisition information storage device correspond to each of them. Is provided. Then, the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage unit is prioritized over the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit regardless of the acquisition timing of the special information at the time of transition determination. As a result, the launch operation is performed in anticipation of entering the first starting entrance section in accordance with the game situation or the like, and the launch operation is performed in expectation of entering the second start entrance section. Diversification of expectations for operations.

  In particular, in the configuration in which the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage unit as described above is given priority over the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit, the first acquisition information The special notification corresponding to the special information that is stored in the storage means and is not subject to transition determination is sent to the predetermined notification means at a timing before the special information is subject to transition determination. May be executed. When such a special notification is made, the player expects that no entry into the second starting entry portion will occur so that a transition determination is made for the special information subject to the special notification. Expected to enter the second starting entrance part so that the transition operation is not performed for the special information subject to special notification. The consciousness may change depending on the content of the special notification such as performing a launch operation. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which a launch operation is performed and a passive game in which a result of a transition determination is confirmed is related to each other, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It becomes possible.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the main control unit has a function for executing the transition determination and the like, and the sub-control unit has a function for controlling the predetermined notification unit so as to perform the special notification, the function to each control unit And the processing load of the main control means can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which the main control means has all functions.

  Furthermore, the main control means does not directly output the special information to the sub-control means when causing the sub-control means to execute the control for performing the special notification, but the special information is subjected to the transition determination. The determination result in the case is specified, and information on the specified result is output to the sub-control means. Therefore, even if information necessary for causing the sub-control unit to execute the control for performing the special notification is illegally acquired in the middle of output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, for example, The acquired information is not the special information itself but information of the identified result. In gaming machines that perform lottery using random number information, an act of attempting to illegally shift to a predetermined gaming state by illegally acquiring updated random number information is assumed. In this case, in the configuration in which the special information is output as it is, if the special information is illegally acquired, the currently updated random number information is illegally specified based on the acquired special information. There is a concern that On the other hand, as described above, since the information of the identified result is output instead of the special information itself, the above-described excellent effect can be achieved while suppressing the possibility of the fraud.

  The “predetermined gaming state” is not limited to one type of gaming state, and includes a configuration in which a plurality of types of gaming states are set as the predetermined gaming state. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of gaming states are set as the predetermined gaming state, a plurality of types of “transition information” are set, and the “transition determination means” determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to one of the predetermined gaming states. It is set as the structure which performs transfer determination of.

  In addition, a dispersion member that disperses the flow direction of the game ball when the game ball flowing down the game area collides is disposed around the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion. A plurality of configurations may be provided. In this case, in response to the special notification, even if a launch operation is performed in expectation of entering the first start entry part or the second start entry part, entry is difficult to occur as expected. It becomes possible to increase the sense of superiority when the irregularity such as the above occurs and the game situation expected by the player is achieved.

  Further, in the feature E1, with respect to the special information stored in the game acquisition operation device provided at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine and the first acquisition information storage unit or the second acquisition information storage unit Prior to the transition determination being performed by the transition determination means, or based on the transition determination being performed by the transition determination means, the game rotation operation is started, and the determination result of the transition determination is handled. As a result of the stop, the game turn operation is terminated as one game time, and the game turn operation of each game time is performed according to the special information that is the target of the transition determination in each game time. In the configuration including the game turn control means for controlling the game turn motion device, the “notification control means” is based on the information output from the determination result output means. The predetermined notification so that the special notification reflecting the determination result when the information is the target of the transition determination is executed at a timing before the predetermined special information is the target of the transition determination. Instead of the configuration of “control means”, based on the information output from the determination result output means, a special notification reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information is the target of the transition determination, The predetermined notification means may be controlled so as to be executed at a timing before the game times corresponding to the predetermined special information are started.

  Feature E2. The determination result specifying means is stored or stored when the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters the first start ball entering part is stored in the first acquisition information storage means. In this case, the gaming machine according to the feature E1, characterized in that the determination result is specified.

  According to the feature E2, when the control for performing the special notification is executed by the sub-control unit, the information output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit is specified. It is performed when the special information acquired by this is stored or stored in the first acquired information storage means. As a result, information necessary for causing the sub-control means to execute the control for performing the special notification is sent to the sub-control means at a relatively early timing after the game ball has entered the first starting ball-introducing section. When a special notification is made along with it, it can be started at a relatively early timing. Further, when special notification is performed, it is possible to start the special notification at a timing before the special information related to the special notification becomes the target of transition determination.

Feature E3. A gaming operation device (main display unit 43) provided at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
Prior to the transition determination unit performing the transition determination on the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit or the second acquisition information storage unit, or by the transition determination unit, the transition determination At each game time, the game turn operation is started based on the fact that the game has been performed, and the game turn operation is terminated as a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination. A game turn control means for controlling the game turn operation device so that a game turn operation of each game turn is performed according to the special information subject to the transition determination (game turn control processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81). Function to execute)
With
The determination result specifying means is stored or stored when the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters the first start ball entering part is stored in the first acquisition information storage means. In this case, the gaming machine according to the feature E1, characterized in that the determination result is specified.

  According to the characteristic E3, when the control for performing the special notification is executed by the sub-control unit, the information output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit is specified. It is performed when the special information acquired by this is stored or stored in the first acquired information storage means. As a result, information necessary for causing the sub-control means to execute the control for performing the special notification is sent to the sub-control means at a relatively early timing after the game ball has entered the first starting ball-introducing section. When a special notification is made along with it, it can be started at a relatively early timing. Further, when the special notification is performed, the special notification can be started at a timing before the game times corresponding to the special information related to the special notification are started.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the “game turning operation device” is “a picture display means for performing a variable display of a picture”, the “game turning control means” is stored in the “first acquisition information storage means or the second acquisition information storage means”. Prior to the transition determination being performed by the transition determination unit for the stored special information, or based on the transition determination being performed by the transition determination unit, the variation display of the pattern is started, Each game is displayed in accordance with the special information subject to the transition determination in each game round, with the stop result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment being displayed and the display of the variation of the pattern being ended as one game round. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the design display means is controlled so that the display of changes in the design is performed once.

Feature E4. The game time control means is an operation continuation time determining means (function for executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for determining an operation continuation time when the game turn operation is performed in each game time. ), And when the operation for the game times of each game time is performed, the operation for the game times is finally stopped when the operation duration time determined by the operation duration determination means elapses.
The operation continuation time determination means continues the operation of the game times corresponding to special information different from the special information subject to the special notification in the situation where the special notification is being executed by the predetermined notification means. When determining the time, the operation continuation time is determined without reflecting the determination result when the special information that is the target of the special notification is the target of the transition determination. The gaming machine according to feature E3.

  According to the feature E4, since the operation continuation time in each game time is determined without reflecting the determination result when the special information related to the special notification is the target of the transition determination, the special notification may be performed. In the configuration described above, it is possible to suppress fluctuations in the time required to digest each game time according to the content of the special information related to the special notification.

Feature E5. The game times control means includes:
Information of operation duration when a game turning operation is performed in the game operation device is stored in advance, and operation duration information is stored in which a plurality of types of information of the operation duration are stored so that each operation duration is different. Means (variable display time table storage area 223 in the ROM 203 of the main controller 81);
Prior to the transition determination unit performing the transition determination on the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit or the second acquisition information storage unit, or by the transition determination unit, the transition determination When the game turning action is started on the basis of the fact that the action has been performed, a plurality of types of information stored in the action duration information storage means are based on the contents of the special information that is the subject of the transition determination. An operation continuation time selection means (a function for executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for selecting one operation continuation time information from the operation continuation time information;
Prior to the transition determination unit performing the transition determination on the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit or the second acquisition information storage unit, or by the transition determination unit, the transition determination The game turning action is started based on the fact that the action continuation time has elapsed, and the action continuation time corresponding to the information of the action continuation time selected by the action continuation time selection means has elapsed. Operation control means for final stop (function to execute the process of step S815 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, function to execute the variation end process, etc.),
With
The operation continuation time selection means determines when the special information that is the target of the transition determination becomes the target of the transition determination at a timing later than the special information that is the target of selection of the information of the operation continuation time. The gaming machine according to Feature E3, wherein information on the operation duration time is selected without reflecting a result.

  According to the feature E5, since the operation continuation time in each game time is determined without reflecting the determination result when the special information related to the special notification is the target of the shift determination, the special notification can be performed. In the configuration described above, it is possible to suppress fluctuations in the time required to digest each game time according to the content of the special information related to the special notification.

Feature E6. The transition information corresponds to random number information that can be updated by the random number information update means, and a plurality of types of random number information correspond to the transition information,
The determination result specifying unit specifies that the predetermined special information is a special determination result when the predetermined special information is the first predetermined transfer information of the transfer information, and the predetermined special information is included in the transfer information. Even if it is the second predetermined transition information, the special determination result is specified,
The determination result output means outputs information of the special determination result to the sub-control means when the determination result specifying means specifies the special determination result. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature E6, the transition information and the special determination result information do not correspond one-to-one, but the special determination result information is set for a plurality of types of predetermined transition information. Even if the resulting information is illegally acquired in the middle of output from the main control means to the sub-control means, it is difficult to specify which random number information corresponds to the illegally acquired information It becomes possible.

Feature E7. The random number information updating means updates the random number information so that the random number information circulates within a predetermined numerical range.
The plurality of pieces of migration information identified as the special judgment result by the judgment result identifying unit is always when the random number information updating unit performs updating a specific number of times from random number information corresponding to any one piece of migration information. The gaming machine according to Feature E6, wherein the game machine is set so as not to generate a situation in which random number information corresponding to other migration information is generated.

  According to the feature E7, even if the information of the special determination result is illegally acquired during the output from the main control means to the sub-control means, the illegally acquired information corresponds to any random number information. It is possible to make it difficult to identify whether or not

  Note that the configuration limited in any one of the features E1 to E7 may be applied to the feature group related to the feature A1, the feature group related to the feature B1, and the feature group related to the feature C1.

Feature F1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting entrance portion (upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34) provided in the gaming area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the gaming area;
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the starting pitching section;
Acquisition information storage means (first result display area reservation area Ra, second result display area reservation area Rb) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers with a predetermined number as an upper limit. )When,
A determination is made as to whether or not one special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transfer information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. Transition determination means (function to execute fluctuation start processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the transition determination on the plurality of special information if there is,
The game state is shifted to a predetermined game state based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the transition information. State transition means (function for executing game state transition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
In gaming machines equipped with
The game area is provided with at least a first starting ball entering portion (upper working port 33) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 34) as the starting ball entering portion.
The acquired information storage means includes
First acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters the first starting entrance part with the first prescribed number as the upper limit (first result display part hold) Area Ra)
Second acquisition information storage means (second result display section on-hold) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters the second starting entrance part with the second prescribed number as an upper limit Area Rb)
With
The transition determination means performs the transition determination for each of the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means or the second acquisition information storage means,
When special information is stored in the second acquired information storage means, the special information acquired by the information acquisition means at an earlier timing than the stored special information is stored in the first acquired information storage means. Priority means (data setting process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that makes the transition determination by the transition determination means to the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means even if stored Function to execute)
The special notification reflecting the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means is the target of the shift determination is more than the predetermined special information is the target of the shift determination. Notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means (function for executing command response processing in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82, MPU 252 of the display control device 212) so that the predetermined notification means is executed at the previous timing. Function for executing the hold notification control process in the
With
Further, the transition determination means includes a high probability transition determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S803 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) and a low probability transition determination means in which the probability of the transition correspondence result is relatively high or low. (The function of executing the processing of step S802 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
The transition information that is the transition correspondence result in the high probability transition determination means and the transition information that is the transition correspondence result in the low probability transition determination means are set to be different from each other,
The notification control means includes
Whether the predetermined special information is the target of transition determination by the high probability transition determination means, whether or not the transition correspondence result is obtained, or whether the predetermined special information is the target of transition determination by the low probability transition determination means Notification side determination means for determining at least one of whether or not the transition response result is obtained (function for executing the first response processing in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82, step S2502 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) , The function of executing the processing of step S2508 and step S2514),
Based on the determination result of the notification side determination means, the special notification is notified as to whether or not the special information determined by the notification side determination means corresponds to the transition of the predetermined gaming state. Special notification executing means for controlling the predetermined notification means (function of executing the processing of step S2506, step S2507, step S2512, step S2513, step S2516 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine having the feature F1, a transition determination is performed on the special information that is acquired when the starting ball is generated and stored in the acquired information storage unit, and the special information is the transition information. Based on the determination, the gaming state shifts to a predetermined gaming state.

  In this case, a first starting ball entering portion and a second starting ball entering portion are provided as the starting ball entering portions, and the first acquisition information storage device and the second acquisition information storage device correspond to each of them. Is provided. Then, the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage unit is prioritized over the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit regardless of the acquisition timing of the special information at the time of transition determination. As a result, the launch operation is performed in anticipation of entering the first starting entrance section in accordance with the game situation or the like, and the launch operation is performed in expectation of entering the second start entrance section. Diversification of expectations for operations.

  Further, in the configuration in which the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage unit is prioritized over the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit as described above, the first acquisition information The special notification corresponding to the special information that is stored in the storage means and is not subject to transition determination is sent to the predetermined notification means at a timing before the special information is subject to transition determination. May be executed. When such a special notification is made, the player expects that no entry into the second starting entry portion will occur so that a transition determination is made for the special information subject to the special notification. Expected to enter the second starting entrance part so that the transition operation is not performed for the special information subject to special notification. The consciousness may change depending on the content of the special notification such as performing a launch operation.

  In particular, the transition information in a situation where the probability of a transition response result is low is different from the transition information in a situation where the probability of a transition response result is high, and as a special notification, the transition correspondence result is obtained in a situation where the probability is low. Notification regarding at least one of whether or not the transition correspondence result is obtained in a situation where the probability is high is performed. Thus, for example, in a situation where the probability is high, if a special notification that a transition response result is obtained if the probability is low, the special information related to the special notification is subject to the transition determination. The player can recognize that the transition correspondence result does not occur unless the above probability is low. Then, the player causes the second start information to be entered so that the probability is low before the special information related to the special notification becomes the target of the transition determination. It is considered that the launch operation is performed in the hope that the state where the special information is stored in the storage means will be continued. On the other hand, for example, in a situation where the probability is high, if a special notification is made that a transition response result is obtained in this situation, the special information related to the special notification is subject to transition determination. If the probability is low, the player can recognize that the transition response result does not occur. Then, in order to make the special information related to the special notification subject to transition determination, the player performs a launch operation in the expectation that no further entrance into the second start entrance portion will occur, or the launch operation. Is considered to be canceled.

  Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which a launch operation is performed and a passive game in which a result of a transition determination is confirmed is related to each other, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game. Is possible.

  The “predetermined gaming state” is not limited to one type of gaming state, and includes a configuration in which a plurality of types of gaming states are set as the predetermined gaming state. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of gaming states are set as the predetermined gaming state, a plurality of types of “transition information” are set, and the “transition determination means” determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to one of the predetermined gaming states. It is set as the structure which performs transfer determination of.

  In addition, a dispersion member that disperses the flow direction of the game ball when the game ball flowing down the game area collides is disposed around the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion. A plurality of configurations may be provided. In this case, in response to the special notification, even if a launch operation is performed in expectation of entering the first start entry part or the second start entry part, entry is difficult to occur as expected. It becomes possible to increase the sense of superiority when the irregularity such as the above occurs and the game situation expected by the player is achieved.

  In addition, in the feature F1, with respect to the special information stored in the game acquisition device and the first acquisition information storage means provided in a position that can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine, Prior to the transition determination being performed by the transition determination means, or based on the transition determination being performed by the transition determination means, the game rotation operation is started, and the determination result of the transition determination is handled. As a result of the stop, the game turn operation is terminated as one game time, and the game turn operation of each game time is performed according to the special information that is the target of the transition determination in each game time. In the configuration comprising the game turn control means for controlling the game turn motion device, the “notification control means” means that “the predetermined special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means is the transition judgment. The predetermined notification is performed by the predetermined notification means at a timing before the predetermined special information is the target of the transition determination. Instead of the configuration of controlling the notification means, the special notification reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means is the target of the transition determination is The predetermined notification means may be controlled so that the predetermined notification means is executed at a timing prior to the start of the game times corresponding to the special information.

Feature F2. The notification side determination means has the predetermined special information in one of the situations where the transition determination is performed by the high probability transition determination means or the transition determination is performed by the low probability transition determination means. Different situation notification side determination means (such as a function of executing the processing of step S3705 in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82) for determining whether or not the transition correspondence result is obtained when the transition determination is made. And
The special notification execution unit may determine whether the special information determined by the different situation notification side determination unit is the other status as the special notification based on the determination result of the different situation notification side determination unit. For example, the special notification execution unit for different situations that controls the predetermined notification unit so that the information corresponding to the transition response result is notified (the processing of step S3706 in the MPU 242 of the audio lamp control device 82 is performed). The gaming machine according to F1, wherein the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 has a function of executing a hold notification process based on the execution.

  According to the feature F2, for example, in a situation where the probability is high, if a special notification that a transition response result is obtained if the probability is low, the special information related to the special notification is determined as a transition determination. The player can recognize that the transition correspondence result does not occur unless the probability is low before the target is selected. Then, the player causes the second start information to be entered so that the probability is low before the special information related to the special notification becomes the target of the transition determination. It is considered that the launch operation is performed in the hope that the state where the special information is stored in the storage means will be continued.

Feature F3. In the notification side determination means, in one of the situations where the transition determination is performed by the high probability transition determination means or the transition determination is performed by the low probability transition determination means, the predetermined special information is stored in the situation. The same situation notification side determination means (a function for executing the processing of step S3703 in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82) for determining whether or not the transition correspondence result is obtained when the transition determination is made is provided. And
The special notification execution means, based on the determination result of the same situation notification side determination means, as the special notification, if the special information determined by the same situation notification side determination means is the current situation Same-situation special notification execution means for controlling the predetermined notification means so that the information corresponding to the transition response result is notified (the process of step S3704 is executed in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82) The gaming machine according to the feature F1 or F2, further comprising a function of executing a hold notification process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 based on the above.

  According to the feature F3, for example, in a situation where the probability is high, if a special notification that a transition response result is obtained in the situation, the special information related to the special notification is the target of the transition determination. The player can recognize that the transition correspondence result does not occur if the probability becomes low until the above. Then, in order to make the special information related to the special notification subject to transition determination, the player performs a launch operation in the expectation that no further entrance into the second start entrance portion will occur, or the launch operation. Is considered to be canceled.

Feature F4. Variable entry means (variable winning device 32) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area are easy to enter and a closed state in which entry is difficult to enter;
Variable entry control means for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state (function for executing the big winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
Grant means (payout device 96, payout control device 97) for giving a game ball to a player based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means;
With
When the gaming state transitions to the predetermined gaming state based on the result of the transition determination by the high probability transition determination unit being the transition correspondence result, and the result of the transition determination by the low probability transition determination unit is the transition correspondence In any case where the gaming state shifts to the predetermined gaming state based on the result, the number of times of switching between the open state and the closed state in the variable pitching means is a predetermined number. The game machine according to any one of means F1 to F3, wherein the variable entry control by the variable entry means is performed.

  According to the feature F4, for example, in a situation where the probability of a transition response result is high, if a special notification that a transition response result is given if the probability is low, a special notification related to the special notification is given. If the above probability is not low before the information is subject to transition determination, the player cannot obtain an opportunity to acquire a game ball that is generated by opening / closing the variable ball entry means. Can be recognized. Then, the player causes the second start information to be entered so that the probability is low before the special information related to the special notification becomes the target of the transition determination. It is considered that the launch operation is performed in the hope that the state where the special information is stored in the storage means will be continued. On the other hand, for example, in a situation where the probability is high, if a special notification is made that a transition response result is obtained in this situation, the special information related to the special notification is subject to transition determination. If the probability becomes low, the player can recognize that an opportunity to acquire a game ball generated by opening / closing the variable ball entry means cannot be obtained. Then, in order to make the special information related to the special notification subject to transition determination, the player performs a launch operation in the expectation that no further entrance into the second start entrance portion will occur, or the launch operation. Is considered to be canceled.

  Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which a launch operation is performed and a passive game in which a result of a transition determination is confirmed is related to each other, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game. Is possible.

Feature F5. Transition information storage means for preliminarily storing the transition information (allocation table storage area 222 in the ROM 203 of the main control device 81) is provided, and the transition information storage means uses the first transition information and the second transition information as the transition information. Pre-stored,
The state transition means includes
When the transition determination is performed based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination unit that corresponds to the first transition information, the high probability transition determination unit and Of the low probability transition determination means, first state transition means (step S1611 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81) for transitioning the gaming state to the first predetermined gaming state in which the transition determination is performed by the low probability transition determination means. To the function of executing the process of step S1613),
When the transition determination is performed based on the result of the transition determination that the transition determination by the transition determination unit corresponds to the second transition information, the high probability transition determination unit and Of the low probability transition determination means, second state transition means (step S1602 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81) for transitioning the gaming state to a second predetermined gaming state where the transition determination is performed by the high probability transition determination means. To execute the process of step S1605),
With
Both the high probability transition determination unit and the low probability transition determination unit determine whether the special information corresponds to either the first transition information or the second transition information as the transition determination. ,
The first transition information that is the first transition correspondence result in the high probability transition determination unit and the first transition information that is the first transition correspondence result in the low probability transition determination unit are set to be different from each other. With
The second transition information that is the second transition correspondence result in the high probability transition determination unit and the second transition information that is the second transition correspondence result in the low probability transition determination unit are set to be different from each other. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4.

  According to the feature F5, in the configuration in which the first predetermined game state and the second predetermined game state, which have different advantages as the predetermined game state, are set, for example, it corresponds to the transition to each predetermined game state as a special notification The special notification is diversified by allowing the notification to be performed.

  In addition, according to the above configuration, for example, in the second predetermined gaming state, when a special notification that a transition response result is obtained in the first predetermined gaming state, the special information related to the special notification is provided. If the first predetermined gaming state is not reached before the transition is determined, the player can recognize that the transition response result does not occur. Then, the player can make a transition to the first predetermined gaming state based on the special information acquired based on the entry to the second starting entry part until the special information related to the special notification becomes the subject of the transition determination. Expecting to occur, it is considered that the launch operation is performed.

  On the other hand, for example, in the second predetermined gaming state, when a special notification is made that a transition response result is obtained in the second predetermined gaming state, the special information related to the special notification is subject to transition determination. If the transition to the first predetermined gaming state occurs due to the special information acquired based on the entrance to the second starting entrance portion until the player becomes, the player will confirm that the transition correspondence result does not occur. Can be recognized. Then, in order to make the special information related to the special notification subject to transition determination, the player performs a launch operation in the expectation that no further entrance into the second start entrance portion will occur, or the launch operation. Is considered to be canceled.

  Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which a launch operation is performed and a passive game in which a result of a transition determination is confirmed is related to each other, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game. Is possible.

  The features F1 to F5 for the feature group related to the feature A1, the feature group related to the feature B1, the feature group related to the feature C1, the feature group related to the feature D1, and the feature group related to the feature E1. The configuration limited in any one of the above may be applied.

Feature G1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting entrance portion (upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34) provided in the gaming area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the gaming area;
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the starting pitching section;
Acquisition information storage means (first result display area reservation area Ra, second result display area reservation area Rb) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers with a predetermined number as an upper limit. )When,
A determination is made as to whether or not one special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transfer information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. Transition determination means (function to execute fluctuation start processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the transition determination on the plurality of special information if there is,
The game state is shifted to a predetermined game state based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the transition information. State transition means (function for executing game state transition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
In gaming machines equipped with
The game area is provided with at least a first starting ball entering portion (upper working port 33) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 34) as the starting ball entering portion.
The acquired information storage means includes
First acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters the first starting entrance part with the first prescribed number as the upper limit (first result display part hold) Area Ra)
Second acquisition information storage means (second result display section on-hold) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters the second starting entrance part with the second prescribed number as an upper limit Area Rb)
With
The transition determination means performs the transition determination for each of the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means or the second acquisition information storage means,
Further, when the special information is stored in the second acquired information storage unit, the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit at a timing earlier than the stored special information is stored in the first acquired information storage unit. Priority means (data in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that makes the transition determination by the transition determination means to the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means even if stored in the means Function to execute the setting process),
The special notification reflecting the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means is the target of the shift determination is more than the predetermined special information is the target of the shift determination. Notification control means (MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82, display) for controlling the predetermined notification means so as to be executed by the predetermined notification means (first holding display area Ga in the symbol display device 41) at the previous timing. MPU 252) of control device 212;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine having the characteristic G1, a transition determination is performed on the special information that is acquired by the entry to the starting pitching section and stored in the acquired information storage unit, and the special information is the transition information. Based on the determination, the gaming state shifts to a predetermined gaming state.

  In this case, a first starting ball entering portion and a second starting ball entering portion are provided as the starting ball entering portions, and the first acquisition information storage device and the second acquisition information storage device correspond to each of them. Is provided. Then, the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage unit is prioritized over the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit regardless of the acquisition timing of the special information at the time of transition determination. As a result, the launch operation is performed in anticipation of entering the first starting entrance section in accordance with the game situation or the like, and the launch operation is performed in expectation of entering the second start entrance section. Diversification of expectations for operations.

  In particular, in the configuration in which the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage unit as described above is given priority over the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit, the first acquisition information The special notification corresponding to the special information that is stored in the storage means and is not subject to transition determination is sent to the predetermined notification means at a timing before the special information is subject to transition determination. May be executed. When such a special notification is made, the player expects that no entry into the second starting entry portion will occur so that a transition determination is made for the special information subject to the special notification. Expected to enter the second starting entrance part so that the transition operation is not performed for the special information subject to special notification. The consciousness may change depending on the content of the special notification such as performing a launch operation. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which a launch operation is performed and a passive game in which a result of a transition determination is confirmed is related to each other, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It becomes possible.

  The “predetermined gaming state” is not limited to one type of gaming state, and includes a configuration in which a plurality of types of gaming states are set as the predetermined gaming state. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of gaming states are set as the predetermined gaming state, a plurality of types of “transition information” are set, and the “transition determination means” determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to one of the predetermined gaming states. It is set as the structure which performs transfer determination of.

  In addition, a dispersion member that disperses the flow direction of the game ball when the game ball flowing down the game area collides is disposed around the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion. A plurality of configurations may be provided. In this case, in response to the special notification, even if a launch operation is performed in expectation of entering the first start entry part or the second start entry part, entry is difficult to occur as expected. It becomes possible to increase the sense of superiority when the irregularity such as the above occurs and the game situation expected by the player is achieved.

  In addition, in the feature G1, with respect to the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit or the second acquisition information storage unit, the game turn operation device provided at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine Prior to the transition determination being performed by the transition determination means, or based on the transition determination being performed by the transition determination means, the game rotation operation is started, and the determination result of the transition determination is handled. As a result of the stop, the game turn operation is terminated as one game time, and the game turn operation of each game time is performed according to the special information that is the target of the transition determination in each game time. In the configuration comprising the game turn control means for controlling the game turn motion device, the “notification control means” means that “the predetermined special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means is the transition judgment. The predetermined notification is performed by the predetermined notification means at a timing before the predetermined special information is the target of the transition determination. Instead of the configuration of controlling the notification means, the special notification reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means is the target of the transition determination is The predetermined notification means may be controlled so that the predetermined notification means is executed at a timing prior to the start of the game times corresponding to the special information.

Feature G2. The notification control means includes
When the special information that is stored in the first acquisition information storage means and is not subject to the transition determination by the transition determination means is subject to transition determination by the transition determination means Notification side determination means for determining whether or not the result is obtained (the function of executing the first corresponding process in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82, the processing of steps S2502, S2508, and S2514 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) Function)
Based on the determination result of the notification side determination unit, the predetermined notification is performed so as to notify whether or not the special information determined by the notification side determination unit corresponds to the transition of the predetermined gaming state. Special notification execution means for controlling the means (function for executing the processing of step S2506, step S2507, step S2512, step S2513, step S2516 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212);
The gaming machine according to Feature G1, comprising:

  According to the feature G2, since a notification is made as to whether or not the special information to be notified corresponds to the transition of the predetermined gaming state as a special notification, the player is notified of the special information that is the target of the special notification. In order to make a transition determination, the launch operation is performed or the launch operation is canceled while expecting that no entry into the second starting entrance part will occur, or for special information subject to special notification Therefore, a change in consciousness may occur depending on the content of the special notification, such as performing a launch operation in the hope that no entry into the second start entry portion will occur, so that the transition determination is not performed.

  Note that the “special notification execution means” includes not only a configuration in which special notification is always performed, but also a configuration in which a special lottery is performed when a predetermined lottery is won. Specifically, in the latter case, the special notification execution means includes notification execution lottery means (a function for executing the process of step S2305 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the special notification. Based on the fact that the notification execution lottery means that the notification execution has been won, notification is made as to whether or not the special information determined by the notification side determination means corresponds to the transition of the predetermined gaming state. It is preferable that the predetermined notification means is controlled.

  Also, a notification state and a non-notification state may be set, and a special notification may be performed in the notification state. In this case, a special notification may be always performed in the notification state, and a special notification may be performed when a winning is made in a predetermined lottery.

Feature G3. Transition information storage means for preliminarily storing the transition information (allocation table storage area 222 in the ROM 203 of the main control device 81) is provided, and the transition information storage means uses the first transition information and the second transition information as the transition information. Pre-stored,
The state transition means includes
A first predetermined game which is a kind of the predetermined game state based on a result of the first transition correspondence that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means corresponds to the first transition information. First state transition means for shifting to a state (function for executing the processing of steps S1611 to S1613 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
The gaming state is a kind of the predetermined gaming state based on the fact that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the second transition correspondence result that corresponds to the second transition information. Second state transition means (function for executing the processing of steps S1602 to S1605 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for shifting to a second predetermined gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state;
The gaming machine according to Feature G2, further comprising:

  According to the characteristic G3, in the configuration in which the first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state, which have different advantages as the predetermined gaming state, are set, for example, as a special notification, the transition to each predetermined gaming state is supported. The special notification is diversified by allowing the notification to be performed.

  Note that the configuration of the feature G3 can be applied to the configuration of the feature G1 and other configurations without requiring the characteristic configuration limited in the feature G2.

  The first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state may be the following gaming states. That is, a variable ball entry means (variable winning device 32) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is easy to enter and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the ball, Variable entry control means (a function for executing a big prize opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for executing variable entry control for switching to a closed state after the variable entry means is opened, and the variable entry Providing means (payout device 96, payout control device 97) for giving a game ball to the player based on the game ball entering the device, and the variable ball entry control means moves to the first state. When the game state transitions to the first predetermined gaming state by the means, the variable entry control until the number of times of switching between the open state and the closed state in the variable entry means reaches a predetermined number. When the game state transition to the second predetermined game state occurs by the second state transition unit, the number of times of switching between the open state and the closed state in the variable pitching unit is a predetermined number of times It is good also as a structure which performs the said variable pitch control until it becomes. In this case, the first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state can be obtained by changing the number of times of switching between the open state and the closed state in the variable pitching means and the one-time opening time to change the expected value of the game ball. It is good also as a structure which provides a difference in advantage.

  In addition, the transition determination unit includes a high probability transition determination unit (a function of executing the processing of step S803 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) and a low probability transition determination unit in which the probability of the transition correspondence result is relatively high or low. (The function of executing the process of step S802 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81), and when the transition determination is performed, the first predetermined gaming state includes the high probability transition determination means and the low probability transition Among the determination means, the game state in which the transition determination is performed by the low probability transition determination unit, and the second predetermined gaming state is the high probability transition determination unit and the low probability transition when the transition determination is performed. Among the determination means, the first predetermined gaming state and the second place are configured such that the transition determination is performed by the high probability transition determination unit. The difference may be provided to advantage in a gaming state.

Feature G4. The notification side determination means is special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means, and special information that is not subject to the transition determination by the transition determination means is subject to the transition determination. First notification side determination means for determining whether or not the first transition response result is obtained (function for executing the first response processing in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82, processing in step S2514 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) Function to execute)
In the second predetermined gaming state, the special notification execution unit is configured to display the first predetermined game based on the determination result of the first notification side determination unit based on the determination result of the first notification side determination unit. First special notification execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S2516 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for controlling the predetermined notification means so as to notify whether or not the state transition is supported is provided. The gaming machine according to Feature G3, wherein:

  According to the characteristic G4, in the second predetermined gaming state that is more advantageous than the first predetermined gaming state, the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit as a special notification corresponds to the transition to the first predetermined gaming state. There may be cases where the content of the content is reported. Then, the player stores the first predetermined game such as a new transition to the second predetermined gaming state or the stay of the second predetermined gaming state in the second acquisition information storage means for which the transition determination has priority. It is expected that special information will be stored that has a more favorable result than the transition to the state. The player who has thus expected the launch operation while expecting the entry to the second start entry part so that the transition determination is not performed on the special information that is the target of the special notification. Will be performed. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which a launch operation is performed and a passive game in which a result of a transition determination is confirmed is related to each other, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It becomes possible.

Feature G5. The notification side determination means is special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means, and special information that is not subject to the transition determination by the transition determination means is subject to the transition determination. 2nd notification side determination means for determining whether or not the second transition response result is obtained (function for executing the first response processing in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82, step S2502 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212, step And a function for executing the processing of S2508)
Whether the special notification execution means corresponds to the transition of the second predetermined gaming state based on the determination result of the second notification side determination means, based on the determination result of the second notification side determination means. Second special notification executing means for controlling the predetermined notification means so as to notify whether or not (function to execute the processing of step S2506, step S2507, step S2512, and step S2513 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212). The gaming machine according to Feature G3 or G4, wherein the gaming machine is provided.

  According to the feature G5, there may be a notification of the content that the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means as a special notification corresponds to the transition to the second predetermined gaming state. Then, for example, the player performs a launch operation while expecting that no entry into the second starting entry part will occur, so that the transition determination is performed on the special information that is the subject of the special notification. Perform or abort the firing operation. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which a launch operation is performed and a passive game in which a result of a transition determination is confirmed is related to each other, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It becomes possible.

Feature G6. Variable entry means (variable winning device 32) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area are easy to enter and a closed state in which entry is difficult to enter;
Variable entry control means for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state (function for executing the big winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
Grant means (payout device 96, payout control device 97) for giving a game ball to a player based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means;
With
When the game state transition to the first predetermined game state occurs by the first state transition unit, until the number of times of switching between the open state and the closed state in the variable pitching unit reaches a predetermined number of times The variable entry control by the variable entry control means is performed and the transition to the first predetermined gaming state is performed,
When the game state transition to the second predetermined game state occurs by the second state transition unit, until the number of times of switching between the open state and the closed state in the variable pitching unit reaches a predetermined number The gaming machine according to Feature G3, wherein the variable pitch control is performed by the variable pitch control means and the transition to the second predetermined gaming state is performed.

  According to the feature G6, the variable pitching means is opened / closed both when the transition to the first predetermined gaming state occurs and when the transition to the second predetermined gaming state occurs, and the player You can get an opportunity to win.

Feature G7. The notification side determination means is special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means, and special information that is not subject to the transition determination by the transition determination means is subject to the transition determination. First notification side determination means for determining whether or not the first transition response result is obtained (function for executing the first response processing in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82, processing in step S2514 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) Function to execute)
In the second predetermined gaming state, the special notification execution unit is configured to display the first predetermined game based on the determination result of the first notification side determination unit based on the determination result of the first notification side determination unit. First special notification execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S2516 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for controlling the predetermined notification means so as to notify whether or not the state transition is supported is provided. The gaming machine according to Feature G6, wherein:

  According to the characteristic G7, in the second predetermined gaming state that is more advantageous than the first predetermined gaming state, the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit as a special notification corresponds to the transition to the first predetermined gaming state. There may be cases where the content of the content is reported. In this case, the player determines that the acquisition of the game ball can be expected by performing opening / closing of the variable ball entry means by performing the transition determination on the special information that is the target of the special notification. On the other hand, in the second acquisition information storage means for which the transition determination is to be prioritized, for example, a new transition to the second predetermined gaming state or a transition to the first predetermined gaming state such as maintaining a stay in the second predetermined gaming state. It is expected that special information that yields more advantageous results will be stored. The player who has thus expected the launch operation while expecting the entry to the second start entry part so that the transition determination is not performed on the special information that is the target of the special notification. Will be performed. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which a launch operation is performed and a passive game in which a result of a transition determination is confirmed is related to each other, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It becomes possible.

  Note that the “granting means” includes not only a configuration for directly granting a game ball but also a configuration for indirectly granting a game ball by granting a virtual game ball.

Feature G8. The notification side determination means is special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means, and special information that is not subject to the transition determination by the transition determination means is subject to the transition determination. 2nd notification side determination means for determining whether or not the second transition response result is obtained (function for executing the first response processing in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82, step S2502 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212, step And a function for executing the processing of S2508)
In the second predetermined gaming state, the special notification execution unit is configured to make the special information determined by the second notification side determination unit based on the determination result of the second notification side determination unit in the second predetermined game state. Second special notification execution means (step S2506, step S2507, step S2512, step S2513 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) that controls the predetermined notification means so as to notify whether or not the state transition is supported. The gaming machine according to Feature G6 or G7, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function of executing the process (1).

  According to the characteristic G8, in the second predetermined gaming state that is more advantageous than the first predetermined gaming state, the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit as a special notification corresponds to the transition to the second predetermined gaming state. There may be cases where the content of the content is reported. In this case, the player determines that the acquisition of the game ball can be expected by performing opening / closing of the variable ball entry means by performing the transition determination on the special information that is the target of the special notification. . Then, before the special information corresponding to the transition to the first predetermined gaming state is stored in the second acquisition information storage means for which the transition determination is to be prioritized, the special information subject to the above-described special notification Thus, the launch operation is performed or the launch operation is stopped while expecting that no entry into the second start entry portion is generated so that the transition determination is performed. On the other hand, before the transition determination is performed on the special information that is the subject of the special notification, the second acquisition information storage means that the transition determination is prioritized, the special information corresponding to the acquisition of further benefits. So as to be memorized, the launch operation is performed while expecting the entry to the second start entry part. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which a launch operation is performed and a passive game in which a result of a transition determination is confirmed is related to each other, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It becomes possible.

Feature G9. The transition determination unit includes at least a high probability transition determination unit (a function for executing the process of step S803 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) and a low probability transition determination in which the probability that the second transition correspondence result is relatively high or low. Means (function of executing the process of step S802 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
The first predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the transition determination is performed by the low probability transition determination unit among the high probability transition determination unit and the low probability transition determination unit when the transition determination is performed,
The second predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the transition determination is performed by the high probability transition determination unit among the high probability transition determination unit and the low probability transition determination unit when the transition determination is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature G8, characterized by:

  According to the feature G9, the second predetermined gaming state is more advantageous for the player than the first predetermined gaming state because the probability that the second predetermined gaming state will be at least the second transition corresponding result is higher than the first predetermined gaming state. It will be something.

Feature G10. The second notification side determination means is special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means and is not subject to transition determination, and is subject to transition determination by the high probability transition determination means. Common information determination means (MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82) for determining whether or not the second transition response result is obtained both in the case of becoming the target of the transition determination by the low probability transition determination means. And the function of executing the first response process in step S2508 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212).
In the second predetermined gaming state, the second special notification execution unit is configured to determine that the special information determined by the common information determination unit is the high probability transition determination unit based on the determination result of the common information determination unit. Whether or not it corresponds to the common information that is the result of the second transition correspondence is notified both in the case of being subject to transition judgment by the above and in the case of being subject to transition judgment by the low probability transition judging means. The game machine according to Feature G9, further comprising common information notification executing means (a function of executing the process of step S2513 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for controlling the predetermined notification means.

According to the characteristic G10, in the second predetermined gaming state that is more advantageous than the first predetermined gaming state, the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit as the special notification is the first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state. Any of the states may be notified of content corresponding to the common information that will cause the transition to the second predetermined gaming state. In this case, even if the special information corresponding to the transition to the first predetermined gaming state is newly stored in the second acquisition information storage means for which the transition determination is to be prioritized, It can be determined that the transition to the second predetermined gaming state occurs again by performing the transition determination on the special information that is the target of the special notification. Then, before the transition determination is performed on the special information targeted for the special notification, special information corresponding to acquisition of a further privilege is stored in the second acquisition information storage unit in which the transition determination is prioritized. As stored, the launching operation is performed while expecting the entrance to the second start entrance part. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which a launch operation is performed and a passive game in which a result of a transition determination is confirmed is related to each other, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It becomes possible.
Feature G11. The second notification side determination means is special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means and is not subject to transition determination, and is subject to transition determination by the high probability transition determination means. High probability dedicated information determination means for determining whether or not the second transition response result is obtained when the second transition response result is obtained, and when the second transition correspondence result is not obtained when the transition determination is performed by the low probability transition determination means. (The function of executing the first corresponding process in the MPU 242 of the sound lamp control device 82, the function of executing the process of step S2502 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212),

  In the second predetermined gaming state, the second special notification execution unit is configured to determine that the special information determined by the high probability dedicated information determination unit is based on the determination result of the high probability dedicated information determination unit. Dedicated to high-probability that results in the second transition response when it becomes a transition determination target by the probability transition determination means and does not become the second transition response result when it becomes a transition determination target by the low-probability transition determination means A high-probability dedicated information notification execution unit (a function of executing the process of step S2507 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) that controls the predetermined notification unit so as to perform notification of whether or not it corresponds to information; The gaming machine according to Feature G9 or G10, wherein:

  According to the feature G11, in the second predetermined gaming state which is more advantageous than the first predetermined gaming state, the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit as the special notification is the first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state. A notification may be made that the content corresponds to the high-probability dedicated information that will cause the transition to the second predetermined gaming state only in the second predetermined gaming state. In this case, the player newly stores special information corresponding to the transition to the first predetermined gaming state in the second acquisition information storage means for which the transition determination has priority, and the special information is determined as the transition determination. If the gaming state has shifted to the first predetermined gaming state, the transition to the second predetermined gaming state is made even if a transition determination is made for the special information that is the subject of the special notification. It can be determined that it does not occur. Then, the player performs the launch operation or stops the launch operation in the expectation that no entry into the second start entry portion will occur. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which a launch operation is performed and a passive game in which a result of a transition determination is confirmed is related to each other, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It becomes possible.

Feature G12. The special information that becomes the second transition correspondence result in the transition determination by the low probability transition determination means is configured to be the second transition correspondence result in the transition determination by the high probability transition determination means,
The second special notification execution unit is configured to transfer the special information that is the determination target by the second notification side determination unit or the transition by the low probability transition determination unit when the special information is the target of the transition determination by the high probability transition determination unit. In the case where the information is a result of the second transition correspondence in any one of the cases where the determination is made, the special information which is the determination target by the second notification side determination means in the second predetermined gaming state. Arbitrary notification execution means for controlling the predetermined notification means so as to notify that the transition to the second predetermined gaming state is supported (the processing of steps S2506 and S2512 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 is executed) The gaming machine according to Feature G10 or G11, wherein

  According to the feature G12, the special information that becomes the second transition correspondence result in the first predetermined gaming state becomes the second transition correspondence result also in the second predetermined gaming state, so that the second predetermined gaming state has the first predetermined correspondence direction. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity of information that should be stored in the gaming machine, in order to increase the probability that the second transition correspondence result is higher than the gaming state.

  In this case, in the second predetermined gaming state which is more advantageous than the first predetermined gaming state, the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means as the special notification is the first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state. In any case, regardless of whether or not the information corresponds to the transition to the second predetermined gaming state, notification that the special information corresponds to the transition to the second predetermined gaming state is performed. Then, when the special notification is made, the player has the special information corresponding to the transition to the second predetermined gaming state only in the second predetermined gaming state or the first predetermined gaming state. It is necessary to predict whether the information is special information corresponding to the transition to the second predetermined gaming state. Then, in response to the prediction, the player expects that no entry into the second starting entry portion will occur so that the transition determination is performed on the special information that is the subject of the special notification. Expecting to enter the second starting entrance part so that the launch operation is performed or the launch operation is stopped, or the transition determination is not performed on the special information subject to the special notification. It is possible to make a determination to perform a launch operation. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which a launch operation is performed and a passive game in which a result of a transition determination is confirmed is related to each other, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It becomes possible.

Feature G13. A non-accepting state in which the game ball is less likely to enter or impossible to enter than the first start entrance part, and the game ball enters the second start entrance part from the first start entrance part. An acceptance control means (a function for executing a power combination support process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that can be switched to an acceptance state that is easy to ball,
The acceptance control means is a switching mode for switching the second starting ball-injection portion between the non-acceptance state and the acceptance state, and there is a relative chance that the acceptance state does not become the acceptance state or per unit time. Having a low low frequency switching mode and a high frequency switching mode with a relatively high opportunity to become the acceptance state per unit time,
The notification control unit sets a notification state in which the control of the predetermined notification unit can be performed so that the special notification is performed and a non-notification state in which the control is not performed, and a switching mode of the reception control unit Characterized in that it is provided with notification state setting means (a function for executing the processing of step S2318 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) to set the notification state in a situation where is in the high-frequency switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the feature G13, special notification is performed in a situation in which entering the second starting entrance portion is more likely to occur than the first starting entrance portion. Thereby, for example, when it is considered that the shift determination is not performed on the special information related to the special notification stored in the first acquisition information storage unit, By performing the launch operation while expecting to occur, it becomes possible to continue the state in which the special information is stored in the second acquisition information storage means in which the transition determination is prioritized, and accordingly, the above-mentioned It is possible to prevent the migration determination from being performed on the special information related to the special notification.
Feature G14. The notification control means includes

A grasping means (display control device) for grasping a determination result when the special information is the object of the transition determination when the special information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored in the first acquisition information storage means. A function of executing the process of step S2307 in the MPU 242 of 212);
Grasping information storage means for storing the content grasped by the grasping means as grasping information (holding notification permission area 292 in the hold display information setting area 265 of the work RAM 254 of the display control device 212),
Notification information setting means for setting notification information so that special notification corresponding to the grasp information stored in the grasp information storage means is performed (for outputting an internal command to the VDP 255 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) Processing) and
Notification control execution means (VDP 255 of the display control device 212) for controlling the predetermined notification means so that notification corresponding to the notification information set by the notification information setting means is performed;
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G13, comprising:

  According to the feature G14, special notification can be performed in response to the special information being stored in the first acquisition information storage unit.

Feature G15. The notification control means includes
Number grasping means for grasping the number of special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means and not subject to the transition judgment by the transition judging means (the process of step S2308 in the MPU 242 of the display control device 212 is executed) Function)
Number information storage means for storing information on the number of the special information grasped by the number grasping means (the hold notification disabled area 293 in the hold display information setting area 265 of the work RAM 254 of the display control device 212);
Notification state setting means (step S2318 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for setting a notification state in which the control of the predetermined notification means can be executed so that the special notification is performed and a non-notification state in which the control is not executed. The function of executing the process of step S2320),
With
The notification information setting means sets notification information corresponding to the grasp information stored in the grasp information storage means in the notice state, and stores in the number information storage means in the non-notification state. The gaming machine according to Feature G14, wherein notification information corresponding to the number of pieces of information being set is set.

  According to the feature G15, it is possible to satisfactorily switch between a state in which the number of special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit is notified and a state in which the special notification is performed. In addition, when the non-notification state is switched to the notification state, it is possible to immediately perform special notification for the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit at that timing.

Feature G16. In the situation where a plurality of special information is stored in the first acquisition information storage unit, the transition determination unit performs the transition determination on the plurality of special information, and the timing acquired by the information acquisition unit is The transition judgment is performed in order from early special information.
The notification control means controls the predetermined notification means so that the special notification is performed while clearly indicating the order of the transition determination of the special information related to the special notification. The gaming machine according to any one of G15.

  According to the feature G16, since the special notification is performed while the order of the transition determination of the special information related to the special notification is clearly indicated, the special information related to the special notification stored in the first acquisition information storage unit is transferred. In the case where it is considered that the determination is not desired, when the player tries to generate a ball entering the second starting ball entering portion, the player can perform the launch operation while being aware of the order of the determination of the transition.

Feature G17. A gaming operation device (main display unit 43) provided at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
Prior to the transition determination unit performing the transition determination on the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit or the second acquisition information storage unit, or by the transition determination unit, the transition determination At each game time, the game turn operation is started based on the fact that the game has been performed, and the game turn operation is terminated as a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination. A game turn control means for controlling the game turn operation device so that a game turn operation of each game turn is performed according to the special information subject to the transition determination (game turn control processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81). Function to execute)
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G16, comprising:

  According to the feature G17, the player can confirm the result of the transition determination in each game time by looking at the game time motion device.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the “game turning operation device” is “a picture display means for performing a variable display of a picture”, the “game turning control means” is stored in the “first acquisition information storage means or the second acquisition information storage means”. Prior to the transition determination being performed by the transition determination unit for the stored special information, or based on the transition determination being performed by the transition determination unit, the variation display of the pattern is started, Each game is displayed in accordance with the special information subject to the transition determination in each game round, with the stop result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment being displayed and the display of the variation of the pattern being ended as one game round. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the design display means is controlled so that the display of changes in the design is performed once.

Feature G18. The game time control means is an operation continuation time determining means (function for executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for determining an operation continuation time when the game turn operation is performed in each game time. ), And when the operation for the game times of each game time is performed, the operation for the game times is finally stopped when the operation duration time determined by the operation duration determination means elapses.
The operation continuation time determination means continues the operation of the game times corresponding to special information different from the special information subject to the special notification in the situation where the special notification is being executed by the predetermined notification means. When determining the time, the operation continuation time is determined without reflecting the determination result when the special information that is the target of the special notification is the target of the transition determination. The gaming machine according to Feature G17.

  According to the feature G18, since the operation continuation time in each game time is determined without reflecting the determination result when the special information related to the special notification is the target of the transition determination, the special notification may be performed. In the configuration described above, it is possible to suppress fluctuations in the time required to digest each game time according to the content of the special information related to the special notification.

Feature G19. The game times control means includes:
Information of operation duration when a game turning operation is performed in the game operation device is stored in advance, and operation duration information is stored in which a plurality of types of information of the operation duration are stored so that each operation duration is different. Means (variable display time table storage area 223 in the ROM 203 of the main controller 81);
Prior to the transition determination unit performing the transition determination on the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit or the second acquisition information storage unit, or by the transition determination unit, the transition determination When the game turning action is started on the basis of the fact that the action has been performed, a plurality of types of information stored in the action duration information storage means are based on the contents of the special information that is the subject of the transition determination. An operation continuation time selection means (a function for executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for selecting one operation continuation time information from the operation continuation time information;
Prior to the transition determination unit performing the transition determination on the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit or the second acquisition information storage unit, or by the transition determination unit, the transition determination The game turning action is started based on the fact that the action continuation time has elapsed, and the action continuation time corresponding to the information of the action continuation time selected by the action continuation time selection means has elapsed. Operation control means for final stop (function to execute the process of step S815 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, function to execute the variation end process, etc.),
With
The operation continuation time selection means determines when the special information that is the target of the transition determination becomes the target of the transition determination at a timing later than the special information that is the target of selection of the information of the operation continuation time. The gaming machine according to Feature G17, wherein information on the operation duration time is selected without reflecting a result.

  According to the feature G19, since the operation continuation time in each game time is determined without reflecting the determination result when the special information related to the special notification is the target of the transition determination, the special notification may be performed. In the configuration described above, it is possible to suppress fluctuations in the time required to digest each game time according to the content of the special information related to the special notification.

  The feature group related to the feature A1, the feature group related to the feature B1, the feature group related to the feature C1, the feature group related to the feature D1, the feature group related to the feature E1, and the feature group related to the feature F1. On the other hand, the configuration limited in any one of the features G1 to G19 may be applied.

  In addition, according to each said characteristic, it is possible to solve the following subjects.

  For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a big hit gaming state is triggered by the fact that a gaming ball has entered the start ball entering section provided in the gaming area. Done. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the display of the variation of the picture is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and a stop result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed in the final stop display of the variation display. A display effect corresponding to one game is displayed. In addition, when the lottery result is a so-called jackpot gaming state transition winning, opening and closing of a variable pitching device provided in a gaming area, for example, is executed after a display effect for one game is executed, The game balls are paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable pitching device.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the starting entrance part while the display of the change of the pattern is being performed, information used for the winning lottery is held and stored with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as an upper limit. There are pachinko machines that are designed to be used. In the case of the hold storage, after the display of the variation of the pattern is completed, a winning lottery is performed using the information stored and stored, and the next variation display of the pattern is started.

  In the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a game in which a game ball is fired so that a ball enters the starting pitching part, and a lottery result when a ball enters the starting pitching part is hit. It can be said that it consists of a game of confirming whether or not. With respect to the former game, the player pays attention to whether or not the starting ball entering portion occurs until the upper limit of the reserved memory is reached, and with respect to the latter game, the variation display mode of the pattern However, the player pays attention to whether or not it is likely to be a stop result corresponding to winning the transition to the jackpot gaming state.

  Here, in the gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game by diversifying the game. In order to diversify such games, in the game of firing game balls as described above, a method of diversifying the flow mode of game balls in the game area can be considered, and lottery is performed for each game as described above. In the game of confirming whether or not the result is successful, a method of diversifying the display pattern of the display effect performed every game time is conceivable.

  However, since the game area is limited for the former, there is a limit in trying to diversify the game, and for the latter, even if the display pattern for each game is diversified, attention to the game There is still a limit in terms of increasing the degree. Therefore, there is still room for improvement in increasing the degree of attention to games.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 33 ... Upper working port, 34 ... Lower working port, 41 ... Symbol display device, 53 ... Game ball launching mechanism, 81 ... Main control device, 202 ... MPU, 203 ... ROM, 204 ... RAM, 212 ... Display control device, 221... Appropriate table storage area, 223... Variable display time table storage area, 252... MPU, 253... Program ROM, 254. Table storage area, RE ... reservation area, Z1-Z3 ... design row.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 is a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player,
A starting pitching portion into which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the start ball entry unit;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
A variable pitching means capable of switching between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means for performing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
A granting means for granting a game ball to a player based on a game ball entering the variable pitching means;
When it is determined whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transfer information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means Is a transition determination means for sequentially performing the transition determination on the plurality of special information,
State transition means for transitioning the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means that the determination target special information corresponds to the transition information. When,
Equipped with a,
By the transition of the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state by the state transition means, the number of times the switching between the open state and the closed state is performed in the variable pitching means becomes a predetermined number of times In the gaming machine in which the variable entry control is performed ,
The game area is provided with at least a first starting entrance part and a second starting entrance part as the starting entrance part,
The second starting entrance portion includes an acceptance control means capable of switching between a non-acceptance state where a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter, and an accept state where a game ball is easier to enter. ,
The acceptance control means has a first mode and a second mode that is more likely to be in the acceptance state than the first mode as a control mode of the second starting entrance part, and the variable entrance control. In the state where the variable pitch control is performed by means, the first mode is set.
The acquired information storage means includes
First acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when a game ball enters the first starting entrance part, with the first prescribed number as an upper limit;
Second acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when a game ball enters the second starting entrance part, with a second prescribed number as an upper limit;
With
The transition determination means performs the transition determination for each of the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means or the second acquisition information storage means,
The gaming machine is
Means for performing the number of on-hold displays corresponding to the number of special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means;
When special information is stored in the second acquired information storage means, the special information acquired by the information acquisition means at an earlier timing than the stored special information is stored in the first acquired information storage means. Priority means for making the transition determination by the transition determination means to the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means even if stored,
Information corresponding to the determination result in a case where the predetermined special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means is the target of the shift determination, than the predetermined special information is the target of the shift determination A destination identification means to identify at the previous timing;
By making the on-hold display mode corresponding to the predetermined special information a special mode, the special notification corresponding to the information specified by the destination specifying unit is the target of the transition determination. Special notification control means to be executed at a timing before
In the situation of the second mode, the notification corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means is the target of the shift determination is that the predetermined special information is Means for executing at a timing prior to the target of the transition determination;
With
The special notification control means includes
Switching means for switching from the non-executable state that disables execution of the special notification to the executable state that enables execution of the special notification;
Storing information corresponding to the information specified by the destination specifying means, and information storage means capable of storing and holding the information even in the unexecutable state
By using the information stored in the information storage means in the executable state, the special notification corresponding to the information specified by the destination specifying means is executed, and the switching means causes the special notification to be executed. A notification executing means capable of causing the special notification to be executed using the information stored in the information storage means at the time of the switching when switched to the executable state;
It is characterized by having.

Claims (1)

A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting pitching portion into which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the start ball entry unit;
Special information acquired by the information acquisition means, an acquisition information storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a plurality of numbers,
When it is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transfer information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means Is a transition determination means for sequentially performing the transition determination on the plurality of special information,
State transition means for transitioning the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means that the determination target special information corresponds to the transition information. When,
In gaming machines equipped with
The special notification corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the shift determination is before the predetermined special information is the target of the shift determination. Notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means so as to be executed by the predetermined notification means at the timing;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Images